JP6593495B1 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

A gaming machine capable of playing a game with an appropriate prescribed number is provided. In AT, a game can be started when a prescribed number of medals out of at least a plurality of prescribed numbers “2” or “3” are inserted. In the AT, information corresponding to the specified number can be displayed on a predetermined display unit. In the AT, when displaying information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display unit, a predetermined timing (after the game start set process is performed) after all reels stop and until the start switch is detected is detected. In step S322), the specified prescribed number display data is stored as the display data of the predetermined display section. In addition, when displaying information corresponding to the specified number, it is displayed in a display mode that can be identified from the push order instruction information. [Selection] Figure 42

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a slot machine is known as one of gaming machines (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2006-214434, A

  The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance as a gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solution means (the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses).
The present invention (sixth embodiment)
A hopper (35) for storing medals;
A hopper disc (101) provided in the hopper;
A hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disc;
Drive control means (main control board 50) for controlling the drive of the hopper motor,
In a game where the credit has reached the upper limit (“50”), the drive control means drives the hopper motor when a predetermined condition (the symbol combination corresponding to the small role is stopped on the active line) is satisfied. , Configured to execute a payout process capable of paying out medals,
The hopper disc is provided with a plurality of (eight) holding portions (102) capable of holding medals stored in the hopper.
Certain circumstances in (medals stored in the hopper 35, the respective holding portions 102 of the hopper disc 101 situations medal is held), when the hopper disc the hopper motor is driven to rotate, holding portion Are formed so that the medals held in the pass through the discharge path (path from the holding section to the discharge section) are sequentially discharged from the discharge section (103),
The moment when the last discharged medal of the current game (medal with the letter “A” in FIGS. 17A and 17B) is discharged from the discharging unit by the payout process executed in the predetermined situation The position of the holding portion where the last discharged medal is held is the first position (the first position shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B),
The first discharge medal that can be discharged in the next payout process at the moment when the last discharge medal of the current game is discharged from the discharge unit by the payout process executed in the predetermined situation (FIGS. 17A and 17B). )), The position of the holding portion where the medal with the letter “B” is held is the second position (the second position shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B).
When the payout process executed in the predetermined situation is finished and the rotation of the hopper disk is stopped, the holding unit holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process has the first position and the second position. And a predetermined portion of the hopper disk (corresponding to a portion between two adjacent holding portions) covers at least a part of the discharge path .

  According to the present invention, the performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

In this embodiment, it is a block diagram which shows the outline of control of the slot machine which is an example of a game machine. In this embodiment, it is a front view explaining a mode until the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot passes the insertion sensor. In 1st Embodiment (A), it is a figure explaining the voltage fall when a power failure generate | occur | produces with a time chart. In 1st Embodiment (B), it is a figure explaining the relationship between an insertion sensor and passage of a medal. In 1st Embodiment (B), it is a figure explaining ON / OFF of a making sensor with a time chart. In 1st Embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram when a medal is discharged | emitted from a medal payout apparatus. In 1st Embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram which shows the mode of ON (detection) / OFF (non-detection) of the payout sensor when a medal is sent out from a medal payout device. In 1st Embodiment (C), it is a figure which shows ON / OFF of a payout sensor with a time chart. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a disassembled perspective view which shows the outline of a main control board and a substrate case. In 2nd Embodiment, (a) is a top view which shows the board | substrate case which accommodated the main control board. (B) is AA arrow sectional drawing which shows the example 1 of a gate trace. (C) is AA arrow sectional drawing which shows the example 2 of a gate trace. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure explaining the flow of a process when a disconnection generate | occur | produces between the main control board and the sub control board. In 4th Embodiment, it is sectional drawing (schematic diagram) explaining the movement of the stop button of a stop switch, (a) shows a no-load state, (b) is when a detection sensor is turned on from off. (C) shows a state where the stop button is pushed to the deepest part, and (d) shows a state when the push of the stop button is released and the detection sensor is turned off. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the relationship between a motion of a stop button, and the excitation state of a motor with a time chart, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. FIG. In 5th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the relationship between ON / OFF of a power supply, and a voltage level with a time chart, (a) shows the power-off after starting a main program, (b) is before a main program start. Indicates power failure. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state before the last discharged medal comes into contact with the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the last discharged medal with the fixed shaft and FIG. 4 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state before contact with the movable shaft and a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk has advanced from (a). In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the last discharged medal is in contact with the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is movable by being pushed by the last discharged medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device showing a state where the shaft has moved. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state at the moment when the last discharged medal is discharged from the discharge unit, and (b) is a state after discharging the last discharged medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk is stopped. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the drive signal of the hopper motor in 6th Embodiment, the drive state of a hopper motor, and the discharge | emission state of the medal from a discharge part. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the operation | movement of the main control board in 6th Embodiment, the drive state of a hopper motor, the detection state of a payout sensor, and the discharge | emission timing of a medal. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the payout process in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the flow of the payout process in 6th Embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, it is a sectional side view of the slot machine in a state where the front door is closed, and is a view for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board and the sub control board. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) Shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) Shows Example 3 and (d) shows Example 4. In the eighth embodiment, it is a side sectional enlarged view of the lower front portion of the housing (A portion of FIG. 22) of the slot machine in a state where the front door is closed, and is a view for explaining a gap between the cabinet and the front door. is there. In 9th Embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the kind and special condition of a special role (community), and (b) is a figure which shows the kind of game state and the prescribed number of each game state, (C) is a figure which shows the number table of the internal lottery in the setting 1, and an advantageous area lottery. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation determination table used in common with non-RT and RT (non-AT) in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation determination table used in RB inside and BB inside in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows Example 1 of the test pattern display of management information display LED in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows Example 2 of the test pattern display of management information display LED in 10th Embodiment. In 11th Embodiment, (A) is a figure which shows various LED on a display board, (B) is a figure which shows management information display LED, (C) is a figure which shows setting value display LED. It is. In 11th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the relationship between the digits 1a-5a and the digits 1b-5b, and the segments A-G and P. FIG. It is a figure which shows the output port in 11th Embodiment. In 11th Embodiment, (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between an interrupt, a LED display counter value, a digit signal, and a segment signal. Moreover, (B) is a figure which shows a LED display request flag. It is a figure which shows the address, label name, name, etc. of the data memorize | stored in RWM. It is a figure explaining the concept of a difference counter value, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a difference counter value and an advantageous area, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. It is a flowchart which shows the program start process (M_PRG_START) by a main control board. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 11th Embodiment. 41 is a flowchart showing a game start set process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an AT game number counter update process in step S281 in FIG. In FIG. 41, it is a flowchart which shows the advantageous area transfer lottery process in step S283. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous area transfer process in step S347 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows AT lottery processing in step S355 of FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an AT initial game number determination process in step S363 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the pushing order instruction number set process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S294 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example 1 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50. FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an interrupt process (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the sub difference number counter management process in 11th Embodiment. 57 is a flowchart showing a sub difference number counter management process in the eleventh embodiment, and is a flowchart following FIG. 56. In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows an accessory condition device and an operation end condition, (B) shows a specified number for each RT, and (C) shows a winning number for each winning number. It is the front view, top view, and right view which show the outline | summary of the structure containing the reel and stop switch in 13th Embodiment.

In the present specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
“Bet” refers to betting a medal (game medium) to play a game. In order to bet a medal, an actual medal is maintained through the medal insertion slot 47, or the bet switch 40 is operated to bet a credited (stored) medal.
On the other hand, “credit (also referred to as“ storage ”)” refers to storing medals in the slot machine 10, unlike the above “bet”. In this specification, “credit” is used in a meaning that does not include “bet”.
Furthermore, “insertion” means betting or crediting a medal.
The “specified number” means the number of bets that can be started (executed) in the game. For example, in a game with the specified number “2” or “3”, the game can be started with either the bet number “2” or “3”, and the game cannot be performed with the bet number “1”.
For convenience of explanation, the “specified number” may be referred to as “the number of bets”.
On the other hand, when referring to “the number of bets”, there may be cases other than the “specified number”. For example, in a game with a prescribed number “2” or “3”, when one medal is inserted (before the game is started), the bet number is “1” (the number bet at that time).

“Care” means that a player inserts a medal from a medal slot 47 (described later).
The “care bet” means that the player bets medals by cleaning the medals from the medal slot 47.
“Maintenance credit” means that a player credits a medal (adds credit) by cleaning the medal from the medal insertion slot 47.
A “bet medal” refers to a bet medal.
“Stored medal” means a medal that is credited (stored).

A “reserved bet” means that a player operates a bet switch 40 (described later) to bet a part or all of the credited medals within a range in which the player can bet. To do.
“Automatic betting” refers to automatically betting the number of medals bet in the previous game by the control process of the slot machine 10 when the replay wins.
Here, the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed (meaning that it has been stopped on the active line; the same applies hereinafter) is referred to as “small combination winning”. On the other hand, in the “Rules for Game Machine Approval and Type Verification (hereinafter simply referred to as“ Rules ”), when the combination of symbols corresponding to replay is stopped, the condition device related to replaying is not activated. Is not interpreted as a “winning”. However, in the present application (this specification and the like), replay is also treated as one of the roles (replaying game), and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed may be referred to as “replay winning”.
“Checkout” refers to paying out a bet medal and / or a stored medal to a player. In the present embodiment, a settlement process is executed when a settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

“Payout” means that a medal is paid out to a player based on a winning combination, or a medal is paid out by the above-described payment. When paying out a medal to a player based on the winning of a combination, storing it as a credit (adding the stored medal, in other words, updating electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)), and paying out This includes both paying out actual medals from the mouth (not shown). The medals are paid out by crediting, for example, with “50” as the limit number, and medals for which the number of credits exceeds “50” are actually paid out to the player.
Note that “payout” may be referred to as “grant”. Therefore, the “number of payouts” may be referred to as “number of grants”.

In the present embodiment, the “game medium” is a medal, but electronic information (electronic medal, electronic data) is used as a game medium in the case of, for example, an encapsulated (ECO) game machine. “Electronic information” means, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is played on a gaming machine. The game machine can be credited as a game medium for performing the game.
The “game medium” may be referred to as “game value”.

  Further, when the game medium is electronic information, “medal payout” means to credit (add) to the game medium credit device provided in the gaming machine. Therefore, “medal payout” does not mean that the medals are actually paid out from the hopper 35 (described later), but the game medium credit device is credited with electronic information for the payout corresponding to the winning combination ( (Adding) is also included.

  In the case where the game progresses as “N−1” game, “N” game, “N + 1” game,... (“N” is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is “N” game. When it is an eye, the game of the “N” game is referred to as “current game”. Further, the game of the “N-1” game is referred to as “previous game”. Furthermore, the game of the “N + 1” game is referred to as “next game”.

In the present specification, a numerical value with “(B)” added to the end of the number (particularly, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value with “(H)” at the end of the number means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating “16” in a decimal number is expressed as “00010000 (B)” in a binary number, and “10 (H)” in a hexadecimal number. In addition, a numerical value indicating a decimal number is expressed as “16 (D)” as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether the number is binary, decimal, or hexadecimal, the end symbols of “(B)”, “(D)”, and “(H)” may be omitted, respectively. .

The “operation mode” of the stop switch 42 means the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing (timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the effective line).
Further, the “advantageous operation mode” of the stop switch 42 means that in the game where the game result (combination of symbols stopped on the active line) has an advantage / disadvantage due to the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the game has a payout or a large number of payouts. An operation mode in which a symbol combination stops, an operation mode in which a symbol combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT stops, or an operation mode in which a symbol combination that does not shift (fall) to an unfavorable RT stops. The “advantageous operation mode” is also referred to as a correct operation mode and a correct answer pressing order.

  “A game in which an advantage / disadvantage of the game result is caused by the operation mode of the stop switch 42” is, for example, a game won in any of winning numbers “3” to “8” shown in FIG. Equivalent to the game won). In addition, although not shown in FIG. 58, for example, in a game won in a plurality of types of replays (in the case of duplicate replay wins, a game won in a so-called “push order replay”), the RT shifts depending on the type of replay won. This is also the case.

The “instruction function” means a function that instructs the player how to operate the stop switch 42. The instruction function is a function for instructing the player about an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 in principle.
In other words, the “instruction function” refers to a device that facilitates winning.
Note that “display” indicates that the “instruction” content is visible, and “notification” indicates that the player is informed of the instruction content. Therefore, the “instruction function” is both a “display function” and a “notification function”.

Further, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the notification of the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous may be “operation of the instruction function”, but the notification of any operation mode including the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous is “ It may be “actuated”.
For example, if the push order bells shown in the winning numbers “3” to “8” in FIG. 58B described later are in the 6-select push order, the payout at the time of the push order win is 10 in the example of FIG. Although it is one, it is assumed that instead of this, it will be one, three, four, ten, or missed (non-winning) according to the pressing order.
Here, the notification of the pressing order for winning the 10-piece combination is a notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 and, of course, corresponds to the “operation of the instruction function”.
On the other hand, the notification of the pressing order for winning one, three, or four winning combinations may be referred to as “advantageous operation mode notification (instruction function activation)”. "Notification of"

Since the pushing order for winning the 4 winning combination is the pushing order not winning the 10 winning combination, it is not the most advantageous operation mode. However, since the payout amount is “4” with respect to the bet number “3” and the difference number of the game is “+1”, this is an operation mode in which the difference number is increased, which is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.
Similarly, the pushing order for winning the 3 winning combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pushing order not winning the 10 winning combination. However, since the payout amount is “3” with respect to the bet number “3” and the difference number is maintained (the difference number is not decreased), this is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.

  Further, similarly, the pushing order for winning a single winning combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is a pushing order not winning a 10 winning combination. Further, the payout amount is “1” with respect to the bet number “3”, and the difference is reduced. However, since it can be said that the operation mode does not miss the role, it may not be an unfavorable operation mode.

In the present embodiment, in the operation of the instruction function at the time of pushing order bell winning, an operation mode (correct answer pushing order) in which the winning combination with the highest payout number wins is notified.
However, for example, when the difference sheet counter value (described later) in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit value (“2400 (D)”), but there is a margin in the remaining number of games (the advantageous section clear counter value described later) in the advantageous section. When the winning order bell is won, for example, as described above, it is possible to notify the pressing order for winning the 3 or 4 winning combinations and to control the difference counter value to maintain the current state.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the instruction function is limited to one specified number. For example, it is assumed that the specified number for operating the instruction function is set to “3”. In this case, in the game of the prescribed number “2” or “3” in the AT, when the game is started with the bet number “3” and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be operated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the bet number “2”, the instruction function cannot be operated even when the pushing order bell is won.

The “game section” includes a “normal section (non-advantageous section)” and an “advantageous section”. Unit 5.9 had a “standby section” (a game section that was won in the advantageous section lottery but has not yet shifted to the advantageous section). Is not provided. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a game section other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
The “normal section” is a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a push order instruction number or a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct push order) described later is a peripheral board (for example, the sub control board 80). ) Is a game section that is prohibited from being transmitted, and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (the process related to the instruction function is not executed). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery of the winning combination, it is possible to make a decision (lottery or the like) as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous section.

  Since the instruction function must not be activated in the normal section, it is not possible to display the push order instruction information on a predetermined display device (LED or the like) electrically connected to the main control board 60. Since the signal related to the above is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is also impossible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80.

On the other hand, the “advantageous section” is a game section having a performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). Specifically, when the instruction function is activated, an instruction is given on the main control board 60. A game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when the pressing order instruction information is displayed so that the contents (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output an instruction content that the main control board 60 performs or an effect contrary to the received signal related to the instruction function.

In addition, the advantageous section may be a game in which an advantage / disadvantage is caused in the game result by the operation mode of the stop switch 42, or the instruction function may not be activated.
On the other hand, during an advantageous section, in a game in which an advantage / disadvantage is caused by the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may be always activated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
The AT (notification game state) is a game state in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game in which an advantage / disadvantage is caused by the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Therefore, the AT is always in the advantageous section, and the AT is not executed during the non-favorable section.

In addition, the AT may always notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (at 100%) in a game in which the game result has an advantage / disadvantage depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. In order to make it within the range defined by the rules, it is also conceivable that the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not notified even if the game results in an advantage / disadvantage in the game result depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
For example, when the upper limit value of the difference counter is approached during the AT but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is temporarily not notified from the viewpoint of extending the life of the AT. (The instruction function is not activated).

  In addition, the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT can be variously set. For example, firstly, “advantageous section = AT” is set. In this case, winning the advantageous section and winning the AT are equivalent. Then, AT is started from the first game in the advantageous section. Also, the AT ends with the end of the advantageous section.

Secondly, “AT ≠ advantageous zone” is set.
In this case, the start (execution) condition of the AT is not satisfied only by shifting to the advantageous section, and whether or not the AT is executed is determined by lottery or the like on the condition that the AT is in the advantageous section. When it is decided to execute, the AT is executed until a predetermined end condition of the AT is satisfied. In addition, when it is non-AT when it shifts to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to a normal section, a precursor, CZ (chance zone (a period in which it is easy to win an AT)), or the like.

When shifting to the precursor after the shift to the advantageous section, it may be necessary to shift to the precursor, and to shift to the AT after the predetermined number of games of the precursor is completed. Alternatively, at the time of or after the transition to the advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery or the like whether it will be the precursor or the prelude to the gasses. . Further, when it is determined that the gasse precursor has been reached, the advantageous section may be maintained after the end of the gasset precursor or may be shifted to the normal section.
Furthermore, when the AT termination condition is satisfied, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated. Alternatively, when the AT ends, but the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

In addition, when the advantageous section is started, the number of games of the advantageous section is determined, and the lottery or the like related to the advantageous section is not executed during the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when the advantageous section is started, the initial number of games in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, whether or not the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section is added (added) is determined (lottery etc.). Can be mentioned.
Furthermore, when a predetermined end condition is set for the advantageous section and the predetermined end condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, even when the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (or the remaining number of games of the AT) is included, To end the advantageous section.

  Here, the “predetermined end condition” of the advantageous section means that a difference counter value described later has exceeded “2400 (D)” or an advantageous section clear counter (number of games in the advantageous section) described later is “ 1500 (D) ”. When any of these conditions is satisfied, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to the normal section (non-advantage section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, AT ends simultaneously with the end of the advantageous section.

In the advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as “section indicator”) 77 described later is turned on. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be always turned on during the advantageous section, but may be turned on when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous section.
Here, the “predetermined lighting condition” includes, for example, a time when the instruction function is activated in a gaming state that is an advantageous section and the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”. Note that after the advantageous section display LED 77 is once lit, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.

In addition, “section Sim (simulation) payout rate” means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even if the winning combination “PB ≠ 1” is won). If there is more than one type of symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (the highest-order bell that will give the maximum payout when winning the push order bell) is assumed. It is the rate of appearance when it is assumed that the display is stopped. The calculation of the section Sim payout rate does not include the payout (number of payouts) due to the action of an accessory (such as 1BB operation). In the game won for replay, when the bet number is “3”, the number of payouts is counted as “0”. Calculated as “0”, the number of payouts “x” (“x” is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of games paid out for replay and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the “game state in which the section Sim appearance rate exceeds“ 1 ”” includes RT and the main game state set so that the section Sim appearance rate exceeds “1”.
Here, for example, RT with a high replay winning probability is set as the RT with the section Sim appearance rate exceeding “1”.
Further, assuming that a CZ (chance zone), AT, a withdrawal section, etc. are normally provided as the main gaming state, AT is given as the main gaming state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”.

  When ending the advantageous section, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous section, for example, during the game end check process described later or the game start set process in the next game of the final game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. To do. When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interruption process by executing the initialization process of the advantageous section display LED flag described later.

Examples of the “process related to the advantageous section” include the following processes.
1) Advantage zone (transition) lottery 2) Advantage zone clear counter update (subtraction, clear)
3) Update difference counter (calculation, clear)
4) Update of advantageous section type flag 5) Control of advantageous section display LED 77 (Update of advantageous section display LED flag)

The “processing related to the instruction function” includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game number management type AT (specification that terminates the AT when the remaining number of games becomes “0”), the AT game number counter is updated (subtraction, addition addition, clear)
4) In the case of a difference number management AT (a specification that terminates AT when the remaining difference number becomes “0”), the AT difference number counter is updated (subtraction, addition addition, clear).

According to the current rules, it is determined that the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed with one prescribed number in one gaming state (RT) except for the following. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the specified number “3”, the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function can be executed, and when the specified number “2”, the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed. It was.
However, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to update the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter regardless of the prescribed number.

In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number is “0” in FIGS. 26 and 58 described later), in other words, in the game when the condition device is not operated, It is determined that the process related to the advantageous section (favorable section shift lottery) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the process related to the advantageous section may be executed even if the winning lottery result is non-winning.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the winning lottery result is non-winning, if the non-winning probability is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (when it is not extremely low probability, for example, “1/17500” or higher), the instruction function is concerned. Processing (AT lottery processing) can be executed.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous section), when the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the next game becomes the advantageous section. Therefore, it is not possible to execute the advantageous section transition lottery (the process related to the advantageous section) and to notify the correct push order (the process related to the instruction function) in the game won in the advantageous section.
However, the advantageous section transition lottery (the process related to the advantageous section) and the AT lottery (the process related to the instruction function) may be performed in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific combination lottery result is obtained, it may be determined as an advantageous section and AT (without executing a lottery).

  The management information display LED (also referred to as “role monitor” or “ratio indicator”) 74 is made up of, for example, four LEDs as shown in FIG. It is composed of an LED that indicates which of the items is indicated by a predetermined symbol or the like, and a two-digit ratio segment (an LED that displays the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratio of the following five items 1) to 5) every predetermined time.
1) One of the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (7U.) Or the command-in-charge ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Character ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Consecutive character ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Property ratio (cumulative) (7A.)

For example, in the case of displaying an accessory ratio (cumulative), if the ratio is “50”%, the symbol “7A.” Indicating the accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the identification segment, and “50” is displayed. Display in the ratio segment.
Here, “cumulative” refers to the sum of the numbers that have been counted so far, and in the present embodiment, it is counted until at least “175000” number of games. When the total number is less than “175000” games, the ratio is displayed, for example, by blinking display, and when it is greater than “175000”, the ratio is displayed, for example, by lighting display. The cumulative total continues to be added until reaching a value (upper limit value) that can be stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 even after the number of “175000” games has been reached.
Further, “6000 games” is the number of games in which one set is set to “400” games and the 15 sets are totaled.

“Advantageous section ratio” refers to the ratio (ratio) of staying in the advantageous section with respect to the total gaming section (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games in all game sections is “1000” and the number of games in the advantageous section between them is “700”, the advantageous section ratio is “70%”.
Further, the “instruction-involved item ratio” is a value obtained by dividing the total of the number of payouts at the time of actuating an accessory and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is operated by the total number of payouts. Note that, in a slot machine that is not equipped with an accessory, the “instructed accessory ratio” is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum of the number of payouts at the time of the actuating operation and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instructed accessory counter.

Furthermore, “the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated” is based on the fact that the stop switch 42 is operated in accordance with the pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function, for example, the winning number “ When 10 bells “3” to “8” win, “10” is added to the instructed accessory counter.
On the other hand, when a single bell in the example of FIG. 58 wins because the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order different from the displayed push order in a game in which the pointing function is activated, “1” is added to.
Similarly, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the winning combination is missed because the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the displayed pressing order (when the winning combination is not won), the instructed bonus counter Is not added. In other words, the count value in the previous game remains the same.

  In the example of FIG. 26 described later, when the common bell (winning number “3”) is won during the AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when the winning bell is won and the acquired number display LED 78 is pushed. There are a case where the order instruction information (dummy) is displayed and a case where the instruction function is not activated. When the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the common bell, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction accessory counter.

  On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the number of payouts of the game is not added to the instruction bonus counter. However, the total number of payouts is added to the counter. In this case, the case where the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order by image or sound is also included.

“Consecutive character ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of payouts during the operation of the first type special character (RB) to the total payout number. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “the number of payouts during 1BB operation relative to the total number of payouts” is indicated.
For example, when the total number of payouts in the “6000” game count is “2000”, and the payout number when the “first-class special feature (RB)” is “500”, The “ratio (6000 games)” is “25 (%)”.

Further, the “community ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of the operation of the accessory to the total payout number. Here, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special combination, the “combined item” is also referred to as a second-type special combination (CB), MB (also referred to as 2BB. Second-class combination continuous action device. CB. Is continuously operated.), SB (single bonus) is included.
Note that, in the above five items, in the gaming machine that does not have a function corresponding to the item, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as “-”.
For example, in the case where “RB (first type special character)” is not provided, there is no continuous character ratio. Therefore, when the ratio display numbers “2” and “4” are displayed, the ratio segment is set to “- "Lights up.
As described above, the management information display LED 74 displays five types of ratios, but as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 described later, a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. To do.

Further, it is stipulated in the rules that the advantageous section ratio and the instructed accessory ratio should be 70% or less. In addition, it is described that the ratio of actors should be 70% or less, and that the ratio of consecutive actors should be 60% or less.
For this reason, it can be confirmed by seeing the information displayed on the management information display LED 74 whether it is within the range of the rule.

A gaming machine with a specification with an advantageous section ratio of 70% or less is referred to as a “7U” type, and a gaming machine with a specification with an instructed accessory ratio of 70% or less is referred to as a “7P” type. In a gaming machine having an advantageous section, it is either “7U” type or “7P” type. In the case of the “7U” type, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the “7P” type, the instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the “7U” type, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game section needs to be “70”% or less, but in the “7P” type, the total number of payouts paid out by the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is total. What is necessary is just to make it 70% or less of the number of payouts, for example, the whole period or most of a game area may be an advantageous area.

For example, when shifting to a non-favorable section, it is set to win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of 100%, and set to win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of almost 100% (for example, about 98%). Or setting to win the advantageous section lottery with a high probability (for example, 70%).
The “7U” type cannot perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery) by referring to the setting value itself, but the “7P” type performs processing related to the instruction function by referring to the setting value itself. It is possible.
In the twelfth embodiment to be described later, most of the inside of the BB2 is in the advantageous section, and a lottery is performed as to whether or not AT is executed in this advantageous section.

Further, the management information display LED 74 can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a 2-digit identification segment and a 2-digit ratio segment as in the case of the slot machine (rotating-type game machine). Then, a base value in real time (during measurement) for each “60000” out balls (“base value” indicates how many safe balls are out of 100 out balls) and “60000”. “The base values of the previous one, two times, and three times before are sequentially displayed. For example, the real-time base value identification segment is displayed as “bL.”, The previous base value identification segment is displayed as “b1.”, And the second previous source value identification segment is “b2.” And the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as “b3.”.
As described above, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines among gaming machines but also to pachinko gaming machines.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10 which is an example of a gaming machine in the present embodiment. This embodiment consists of 1st Embodiment-5th Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
A main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided as typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 includes an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (not necessarily including only those illustrated in FIG. 1). The appearance of the main control board 50 and the fact that the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 will be described in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection unit to which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit that transmits signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the peripheral device for input is indicated by an arrow from the peripheral device to the main control board 50, and the peripheral device for output is indicated by an arrow from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium that can store (update) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs necessary for the progress of the game, various data (for example, a data table), and the like.
The main CPU 55 indicates a CPU (IC having a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. Drive control and payout at the time of winning a prize.

An MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside the MPU inside the MPU.
Note that an MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is also mounted on a sub control board 80 described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the one installed in the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are sent into the medal selector.
The movement of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 in the medal selector will be described with reference to FIG.
In the medal selector, as shown in FIG. 1, a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and a closing sensor 44 (a pair of closing sensors 44a and 44b) are provided (but not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 is first configured to be detected by the passage sensor 46.

  Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals, and forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 from the payout slot when the insertion of medals is not permitted. To do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35 is formed. The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that closes an opening formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector (opening leading to the medal return opening) and guides the medal to the hopper 35 side. And an actuator for driving the switching member.

  Here, the blocker 45 is in a state where the insertion of medals is not permitted during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 are stopped and the payout corresponding to the winning combination is completed at the time of winning the winning combination). To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when a game is not being performed.

  In the medal selector, an insertion sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In this embodiment, the insertion sensor 44 includes a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance, and after the predetermined time has elapsed since a medal is detected by one insertion sensor 44a, the other insertion sensor 44b. It is comprised so that it may be detected by. Then, based on the timing when the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not a correct medal has been inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and operation switches operated by the player. The settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the “operation switch (or simply“ switch ”)” switches on / off of an electric signal based on the operation of the operation body by the player (operator) (in response to external force). It refers to a device (including an electric circuit and / or an electric component) and does not limit the shape of an operating body operated by a player.

  When the operation switch is in the OFF state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the OFF state). When the operation switch (operating body thereof) is operated by a player or the like, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electric signal indicating that the operation switch is turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the OFF state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and is turned on when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 has a lever (bar) shape (which is also referred to as “start lever (switch) 41”), the bet switch 40, the stop switch 42, and the checkout switch. The operation body 43 has a push button shape (for this reason, it is also referred to as a “bet button (switch) 40”, a “stop (stop) button (switch) 42”, and a “settlement button (switch) 43”). In the fourth embodiment, which will be described later, the operating body of the stop switch 42 (the part that the player pushes in) is referred to as a “stop button 42a”.

  Although not shown in FIG. 1, LEDs (light emitting means) are provided on the operation body of the operation switch and / or around or near the operation body. When the operation acceptance of the operation switch is in the permitted state, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, and when the operation acceptance of the operation switch is in the unauthorized state, for example, the operation switch The LED or the like emits red light to indicate to the player whether the operation switch is permitted or not.

  Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the operation of the stop switch 42 is acceptable, all the LEDs of the stop switches 42 emit blue light, and the player can be operated. Shown in When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. Thereafter, the remaining stop switch 42 can be operated because the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 that has been controlled to stop is finished, and the detection sensor 42e (fourth described later) of the operated stop switch 42 is reached. After the embodiment is turned off. Therefore, during that period, all the LEDs of the stop switch 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is finished and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to the stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is The LEDs of the stop switch 42 that remain in red light emission but have not been operated yet are made to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number, prescribed number) medals are provided.
However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

  The prescribed number is determined in advance according to, for example, when the accessory is not in operation / at the time of operation. Specifically, the number is set to 3 when the accessory is not operating, when the SB is operating, when the 1BB is operating, and when the 2BB is operating. When the 1-bet switch 40a is operated twice, two medals can be inserted, and when operated three times, three medals can be inserted. Further, when the specified number is 3, three medals can be inserted at a time by operating the 3-bet switch 40b, and when the specified number is 2, the 3-bet switch 40b can be operated. Two medals can be inserted at a time. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated in a state where less than the prescribed number has already been bet, bet processing is performed so that the number of bets is three.

The start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to three (left, middle, right) reels 31 and are operation switches operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (pays out) a medal that has been bet and / or stored (credited) in the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50. In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. In FIG. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. Thus, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed therebetween.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (such as a relay board). For example, one or more other boards (such as relay boards) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78.
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED for displaying the number of medals stored (credited) in the slot machine 10 and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

The acquisition number display LED 78 is an LED for displaying the number of payouts (player acquisition number) at the time of winning a winning combination. Like the credit number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78 is composed of two upper and lower digits. .
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit may be turned off and only the lower digit may be displayed as “0”.

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (notifies an advantageous push order) in a game that informs the push order during AT. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also serves to display the acquisition number, error contents, and push order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is needless to say that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying push order instruction information may be provided.
Note that during the AT, an advantageous notification of the pressing order is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 of a symbol display device.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) for displaying symbols, motors 32 for driving the reels 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reels 31.

  The motor 32 serves as a driving unit for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control unit 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs that constitute symbol combinations corresponding to roles) is attached is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.
Each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape on, for example, the circumferential side surface of the reel 31 and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated one time, or the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (cuts) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, a symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected. Further, from the moment the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, how many pulses of the (stepping) motor 32 are driven, and how many symbols ahead of the symbol on the reference position are stopped on the effective line. Can be identified.

  In addition, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when paying out medals of the hopper 35 from a payout port, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

A medal that has been maintained and received (determined to be normal) from the medal slot 47 is formed so as to be accommodated in the hopper 35.
In the present embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 includes a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance. When the medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member (a movable piece 39a in FIG. 7 described later) moves by the medal. By the movement of a predetermined moving member, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off. Based on whether or not the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off within a predetermined time range, it is determined whether or not the medal has been paid out correctly.

For example, when the pair of payout sensors 37 are not detected to be turned on even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that no medal has been paid out, and a hopper error (no medal) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output the ON signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.
Details of these operations will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When starting the game, the player inserts a medal that has been credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet), or cleans and inserts a medal from the medal insertion port 47 (manual bet). When the start switch 41 is operated in a state where a prescribed number of medals for the game are bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) performs lottery by the hand lottery means 61 and drives all the motors 32 to control all the reels 31. Control to rotate. As the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reel 31 are moved up and down in the display window at a predetermined speed.

  Then, the player presses the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and the lottery result (internal lottery) of the winning lottery means 61 is controlled. The reel 31 related to the motor 32 is stopped so as to correspond to the result determined by the means.

  The game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the active line (when the winning combination of the winning combination), a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are examples, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (decision, selection) of winning numbers. Here, “the lottery of the winning number by the role lottery means 61” is the same as the “internal lottery” in the rules of the wind management law (rules relating to the recognition of the gaming machine and the examination of the type, etc .; hereinafter simply referred to as “rules”), The lottery result by the role lottery means 61 is the same as the “result determined by the internal lottery” in the rules. Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as “internal lottery means 61” in an expression according to the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the winning lottery means 61, based on the winning number, the winning and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number are determined, and the winning and replaying condition device that is operable in the game, In addition, the accessory condition device is determined. Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like.

  The role lottery means 61 includes, for example, a lottery random number generation means (hardware random number, etc.), a random number extraction means for extracting a random number generated by the random number generation means, and a random value extracted by the random number extraction means. A winning number determining means for determining a winning number;

  The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal numbers). The random number is, for example, a random number for which a counter that performs 1 count at 200 n (nano) sec continues to count as a cycle in a range of “0” to “65535”. While the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number Keep counting.

  The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The judging means collates the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means with a lottery table to be described later, thereby determining a winning number corresponding to the area to which the random value belongs.

  The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of winning flags corresponding to each combination based on the lottery result by the combination lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all combinations. When any of the winning combinations is won in the lottery performed by the winning lottery means 61, the winning flag for the winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). In addition, the winning of a combination includes a case where there is one winning combination (single winning) and a case where there are a plurality of winning combinations (double winning).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects a push order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the combination lottery means 61 (at the time of push order bell or push order replay win). Decision).
The “push order” of the push order instruction numbers selected here means a push order that is advantageous to the player (correct answer push order). For example, when a push order bell is selected, it indicates a push order (correct answer push order) for winning a high-order bell. In addition, when the replay overlap is won, it indicates a push order that promotes to an advantageous RT or a push order that does not fall to an unfavorable RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique push order instruction number.
During the AT, when winning the push order bell or push order replay, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically “ = * ”(“ * ”= 1, 2,...) Is displayed. As described above, the function of displaying the pressing order instruction information when the condition device having an advantageous pressing order is operated is also referred to as an instruction function.
In addition, during the AT, when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the main control board 50 is the sub control board at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined). A command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number is transmitted to 80.
When receiving the command, the sub control board 80 displays the correct pressing order in the image display device 23.

  Note that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only during the advantageous section (AT). Therefore, even if the push order designation number is selected by the push order designation number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order designation number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. In the normal section, it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number.

The effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the winning number, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
Here, the production group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. Then, when the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 selects the selected effect group. The number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. The sub control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. The production group number is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, unlike the above-mentioned push order instruction number.

  Further, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80. For this reason, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives each game and effect group number, the effect can be output based on the received effect group number. However, even when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the production group number, so the sub control board 80 does not notify the correct push order based on the production group number. . On the other hand, during AT, when the push order bell or push order replay is selected, a push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls to start the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when receiving the rotation start command of the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment. .
Further, after the winning number is determined by the winning lottery means 61, the reel controller 65 refers to the ON / OFF of the winning flag in the current game, and the stop position determining table corresponding to the ON / OFF of the winning flag. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected. Drive control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is turned on, the reel control means 65 validates the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (the combination with the winning flag turned on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is controlled so as to be able to stop on the line, and the reel 31 is controlled so as not to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than the winning combination (the combination for which the winning flag is off) on the effective line.

Here, “within the range of stop control of the reel 31” means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)). Means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated to when the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms except for a predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) in which MB is operating. Is set to Thus, in this embodiment, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to four symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

  On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 that is operating in MB, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. Thereby, for the predetermined reel 31 in the MB operation, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated In addition, the design is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.
That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol corresponding to the winning number does not stop at a predetermined effective line, the reel 31 is stopped before the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbol corresponding to the winning number is controlled to stop as much as possible on the predetermined effective line (retraction stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol combination that does not correspond to the winning number stops on the effective line, By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, the combination of symbols not corresponding to the winning number is controlled so as not to stop on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Further, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won (for example, when a pressing order bell is selected), the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. In accordance with a predetermined priority, the drawing-in stop control for the symbol with the highest priority is performed.

The winning determination unit 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination of the reel 31 stopped on the active line is a symbol combination corresponding to any combination when the reel 31 is stopped.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the combination has stopped on the active line. Specifically, based on the condition device operated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42, and / or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination that stops on the active line before the reel 31 actually stops is previously determined. Judgment is made in advance, or a combination of symbols stopped on the effective line after the reel 31 is stopped is judged in advance.

The control command transmission means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output from the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
As control commands, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a pressing order instruction number (only when a winning number that is in AT and has a correct pressing order is won) , Production group number, RT (game state) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on a winning combination, and the like.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is directed to the sub control board 80 in one direction by parallel communication. Sends information (control command) necessary for output.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, and may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
An effect peripheral device such as the following effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, the peripheral device for production is not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data and the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the production.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing programs such as a lottery for production, various data, etc. as production data.

  The effect lamp 21 is made of an LED, for example, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect lamp 21 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31, and a back lamp for illuminating from behind the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three symbols that are continuously visible from the display window). Fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reel 31 from the top, a frame lamp that is arranged on the front face of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinks when winning a winning combination, and the like are included.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, and the like, and various effect images during the game (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to condition devices operated in the game, etc.) In addition, game information (such as the number of games and the number of games acquired during the operation of an accessory or an advantageous section (AT)) is displayed.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a state until the medal M inserted from the medal insertion port 47 passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic view seen from the front. FIG. 2 shows the inside of the medal selector so that it can be seen. The medal M indicates M1 to M4 according to the position. The position of M1 indicates a state where the medal M is placed on the medal placement portion 47b of the medal insertion slot 47 (a state before being released). That is, at the position of M1, the lowest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placement portion 47b are in contact with each other when viewed from the front.
In FIG. 2 (and FIG. 4 described later), it is assumed that the substantially square portions displayed as the input sensors 44a and 44b are the light receiving and emitting ranges (sensor eyes) of the input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively (respectively). It is not the case of the input sensors 44a and 44b.)

Further, the position of M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M is not visible when viewed from the front. That is, at the position M2, the uppermost point of the outer periphery of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placement part 47b overlap. For example, assuming that the player releases his hand from the medal M when the medal M is at the position M1, the medal M falls from the position M1. Therefore, at the position of M2, it is in a state of being released from the player's hand and falling (moving) downstream.
The “upstream side” indicates the medal insertion port 47 side, and the “downstream side” indicates the insertion sensor 44b side (hopper 35 side). Speaking of the position of the medal M, M1 → M2 → M3 → M4 from the upstream side toward the downstream side.

In the example of FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the medal M is detected by the passage sensor 46 when the medal M is positioned at M <b> 2.
Further, the position of M3 indicates the position (ON) at the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. Further, the position of M4 indicates the position (off) when the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

  The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion for inserting the medal M into the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when the player bets or credits the medal M as a game medium. The medal slot 47 includes a medal guard part 47a and a medal holder 47b. The medal holder 47b has a substantially curved surface (curvature slightly larger than the periphery of the medal M) extending in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of the drawing so that a plurality of (up to about ten) medals M can be placed simultaneously. Curved surface).

The substantially curved surface of the medal placement portion 47b and the surface (the surface visible in FIG. 2) where the medal M of the medal guard portion 47a contacts are formed so as to intersect substantially vertically.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, the portion where the medal placing portion 47 b and the medal guard portion 47 a intersect each other has an opening portion through which one medal M can flow down. In the state where two medals M are stacked, the medal M does not fall from the opening, but when the thickness of one medal M is, the medal M flows down from the opening. For this reason, for example, the player places a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal placement part 47b and increases the pressing force while pressing the plurality of medals M in the direction of the medal guard part 47a. By weakening, the medals M placed on the medal placing portion 47b can be dropped into the medal selector from the opening one by one.

  When the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion port 47 (released downward), the medal M flows down the passage in the medal selector. In the medal selector, a passage sensor 46, an insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided from the upstream side. Further, the blocker 45 described above is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the closing sensor 44a (in FIG. 2, below the closing sensor 44a).

  When the medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided for determining the presence or absence of a medal clogging or a goto action. The passage sensor 46 detects the medal M for a predetermined time (predetermined) from when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M. Further, when the medal M is no longer detected after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is determined that it is normal. On the other hand, if the medal M continues to be detected after a predetermined time has elapsed after the passage sensor 46 detects the medal, it is determined that a medal retention error has occurred. Further, when the medal M is not detected after the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M and before a predetermined time has elapsed, it is determined that the medal M has been illegally passed.

  When the medal M flows down in the medal passage, the position of the blocker 45 is reached. The blocker 45 is disposed on the lower surface side in the medal passage. When the blocker 45 is in the ON state (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is ON), the medal flow path is formed so that the medal M can be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, it serves to send the medal M that has moved from the upstream side to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b without sending it out of the medal path.

  On the other hand, when the output port 52 is in the off state (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is off), the blocker 45 moves so as to be shifted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of the drawing in FIG. Thus, an opening (pit) is formed in the medal passage. Thereby, when the blocker 45 is in the OFF state, the medal M is dropped from this opening immediately before reaching the M3 and is sent out of the medal passage (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M dropped from the opening is returned to the medal return port (not shown) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a.

For example, if the specified number of the game has already been bet and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, no more medals can bet or credit, so the blocker 45 is controlled to be in the off state. Thus, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion port 47 in this state, it falls from the opening and is returned to the medal return port.
On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the opening is blocked by the blocker 45, so that the medal M flowing down in the medal passage passes over the blocker 45 and enters the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. It can move to the side.

  In this embodiment, the blocker 45 is arranged as shown in FIG. 2, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Regardless of the on / off state of the blocker 45, the medal M can be detected by the passage sensor 46. When the blocker 45 is in the on state, the medal M can be guided to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and When the blocker 45 is in the off state, the medal M may be sent to the medal return port without being detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, the blocker 45 may be positioned between the passage sensor 46 and the closing sensor 44a.

  Further, the passage sensor 46 only needs to be positioned upstream of the blocker 45 and is disposed at a position where the medal M inserted from the medal insertion port 47 can be detected even when the blocker 45 is in the OFF state. Just do it. In FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the medal M can be detected when the medal M is positioned at M2, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the medal M is further downstream than the position of M2. It is also possible to arrange the passage sensor 46 so as to detect the medal M when it is moved to.

  The insertion sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting the medal M that has passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed with a predetermined distance therebetween. First, when the medal M reaches the position of M3, the upstream insertion sensor 44a can detect the medal M (from OFF to ON). When the medal M further flows down, the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns from off to on). By determining the on / off timing of these two insertion sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal M is normal. When the medal M reaches the position of M4, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are not detected. The medals M that have passed through the insertion sensors 44 a and 44 b are sent to the hopper 35.

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, the position of the medal M is M2, that is, the position where the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b from the moment when the medal M becomes invisible when the medal selector is viewed from the front. The time until reaching (the movement locus is indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is set to time T2. It is a value when the hand is released from the medal M (at the initial speed “0”) and released downward when the medal M is positioned at M1. Therefore, the speed when the medal M is positioned at M2 exceeds “0”.

Further, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position of M2. On the other hand, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided at a portion where the medal passage is bent from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction in FIG. When the medal M comes into contact with the impact member, the speed of the medal M is decelerated and is directed toward the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M3 (the moment when it is detected by the insertion sensor 44a) to the moment when it is positioned at M4 (the moment when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b) is set as time T3. .

<First Embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a view showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of the present embodiment.
FIG. 3 shows voltage levels when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or when a power failure occurs).
In FIG. 3, the voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is assumed to be the supply level V0. In the state of the supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 3 shows an example in which a power interruption has occurred at time S11 (an event in which the supply of power has been interrupted has occurred). In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs, the voltage drops to the power interruption detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from when the power interruption occurs (time S11; supply level V0) until the power interruption is detected (time S12; power interruption detection level V1) is at least 20 interrupts (one interruption time 2.235 ms × 20 (Interrupt = 44.7 ms) or more.
On the main control board 50, a voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) (not shown) is provided. When the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or lower than the power-off detection level V1, a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and the power supply is detected by detecting whether or not the signal is input. Detect disconnection.

When the voltage further decreases from the power-off detection level V1 and falls below the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
In the example of FIG. 3, at time S13, the voltage level reaches the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, and then decreases to Low. Since the main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process when the voltage becomes lower than the drive voltage limit V2, when the power-off occurs at time S11, the power-off process can be completed at least by time S13. Is set.

Further, detection of power interruption is executed in interrupt processing executed every 2.235 ms. However, when power interruption is detected continuously for two interrupts, power interruption processing is executed in the next interruption processing. Therefore, in FIG. 3, time S12 is a timing at which it is determined that the voltage is lower than the power-off detection level V1 in the interruption process twice in succession and the power-off is detected. Then, power-off processing is executed in the next interrupt processing.
In the interrupt process, the following process is executed. First, it is determined whether or not a power-off is detected. When a power-off is detected, the process proceeds to a power-off process (without moving to a normal interrupt process). In the power-off process, first, the output port 52 is turned off. By the process of turning off the output port 52, the blocker 45 is turned off. Furthermore, stack pointer saving processing, power-off processing completion flag (flag for determining whether or not normal power-off has been performed) setting processing, RWM53 checksum execution processing, RWM53 write-protection processing, etc. After the sequential execution, a reset waiting state (loop processing state) is entered. This reset waiting state is a state in which no processing is performed by design.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, the power-off process is executed in the interrupt process following the interrupt process (time S12) in which the power-off is detected, and the blocker 45 is turned off.
Note that the power-off process is not limited to the interrupt process that is performed after the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected, and the power-off process may be executed in the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected. In this case, “T1 = S12−S11”.

  On the other hand, FIG. 3 also illustrates the medal positions (M2, M4) after the medal is inserted. In FIG. 2, it is assumed that the player releases his hand from the medal M in a state where the medal M is at the position M1. In this case, the medal M falls at the initial speed “0”. Thereby, the medal M is released into the medal selector. In FIG. 3, the time S11 at which the power cut occurs and the time at which the medal M reaches the position of M2 are matched.

As shown in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M4 is T2, but in FIG. 3, the time T2 has elapsed since the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2. Later, it is assumed that the medal M is positioned at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship of “T2> T1”.

  Therefore, if the power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power interruption process is executed before the medal M reaches M4, and the insertion sensor 44b does not detect the medal M. Therefore, when the power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M is sent to the medal return port (lower plate) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44b. For this reason, the medal M does not normally pass through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the medal M is swallowed, but after the power is cut off (after time S11), the medal M is added with “1” (adding “1” to the bet or credit). Not. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the bet or credit process will be executed after the power interruption.

For example, in the case where the power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the time T1 has elapsed (during power-off processing), the medal M is positioned immediately before M4 in FIG. Is after the passage of the position M3), the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.
Further, in the case where the power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the time T1 has elapsed (during power-off processing), the medal M is positioned upstream of the position of M3 in FIG. At that time, the medal M is not detected by either the insertion sensor 44a or the insertion sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.

In FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when the medal is located at M3 is defined as time T2 ′.
In this case, it is preferable to design so as to satisfy the relationship of “T2 ′> T1”.
In the case of designing in the above relationship, if a power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the medal M reaches M3, the power shut-off process is executed to turn off the blocker 45. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a and is sent to the medal return port.

Here, the difference between the prior art and the first embodiment (A) will be described.
Conventionally, when a power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b when the power interruption is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off. Therefore, the medal “1” addition process (bet process or credit process) is executed after the power failure occurs. However, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process after the power interruption occurs. This is because after the power interruption occurs, all the processes related to the progress of the game should be stopped immediately.
Therefore, if configured as in the first embodiment (A), even if the player inserts the medal M from the medal insertion slot 47 and the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 (immediately after the insertion). Since the medal “1” addition process is not executed, the function of the slot machine 10 can be enhanced.

<First Embodiment (B)>
The first embodiment (B) defines the relationship between the input sensors 44a and 44b and the power interruption.
FIG. 4 is a front view showing a process from when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the arrow direction indicates the traveling (downward) direction of the medal M.
FIG. 4A shows a diagram at the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the closing sensor 44a is the moment when it is turned on from off, and the closing sensor 44b remains off. This position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left in FIG. 4 and enters the state shown in FIG. 4B, the insertion sensor 44a remains in the state where the medal M is detected, and the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M. It becomes like this. Therefore, in FIG. 4B, the closing sensor 44a is on, and the closing sensor 44b is the moment when it is turned on from off.
In FIG. 4, even when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M overlap, both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are indicated by solid lines, but the medal M and the insertion sensor 44a and It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be disposed on the near side in the direction perpendicular to the sheet of FIG. 4 with respect to the medal M, or may be disposed on the back side.

When the medal M further advances and enters the state of FIG. 4C, the medal M is detected by both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Accordingly, the making sensor 44a in this case is on, and the making sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 millimeters (so-called 25 pie (φ)) in the general specification, and 30 millimeters (so-called 30 pie (φ)) in the special specification. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the making sensors 44a and 44b so that the state shown in FIG. Here, as will be described later, whether or not the state shown in FIG. 4C, that is, the time during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are on (the medal M is detected) is within a predetermined range. Determines whether or not to determine a medal insertion error. Therefore, the distance between the making sensors 44a and 44b varies depending on how the time during which both the making sensors 44a and 44b are on is set.

  When the medal M further advances from the state of FIG. 4C, the insertion sensor 44a does not detect the medal M as shown in FIG. In this case, the closing sensor 44a is the moment when it is turned off from on, and the closing sensor 44b remains on. When the medal M further advances, the insertion sensor 44b does not detect the medal M as shown in FIG. Therefore, in this case, the closing sensor 44a remains off, and the closing sensor 44b is the moment when it turns from on to off. Note that the position of the medal M in FIG. 4E corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing on / off of the closing sensors 44a and 44b in a time chart. In FIG. 5, time S21 is the moment when the making sensor 44a is turned on from off (the making sensor 44b remains off), and corresponds to the timing of FIG.
Next, let S22 be the time at which the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (from OFF to ON) (FIG. 4B). Furthermore, the time when the insertion sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (from on to off) (FIG. 4D) is set to S23. Furthermore, let S24 be the time when the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (from on to off) (FIG. 4E).

  Here, if the time Ta during which the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M (between time S21 and S23) is in the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 1) The main control board 50 determines that the normal medal M has passed, and if it is out of this range, determines that it is a medal passing error.

  Further, the time Tb (between time S22 and S23) in which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is within the range of 4.47 ms (2 interrupts) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interrupts). If so (condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the normal medal M has passed, and if it is out of this range, it determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

Furthermore, if the time Tc during which the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (between time S22 and S24) is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 3) The main control board 50 determines that a normal medal M has passed, and if it is out of this range, a medal passing error is assumed.
When all of the above conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, and when at least one condition is not satisfied, a medal passing error is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), the input monitoring counter is decremented by “1”.
Here, the insertion monitoring counter becomes “+1” when the above-described passage sensor 46 detects the medal M, and when the medal normally passes the insertion sensors 44a and 44b (both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). → On → Off, so at time S24). That is, “1” and “0” are repeated in the normal state.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M and only the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal, the insertion monitoring counter becomes “−1” and the main control board 50 determines that the medal passage error has occurred. To do.

When the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter = “+ 1”) and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, the passage sensor 46 further detects the medal M. When the insertion monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value equal to or greater than “2”, the main control board 50 determines that a medal clogging error has occurred. For example, when the normal value of the insertion monitoring counter is set to “0” to “2”, the main control board 50 determines that a medal clogging error occurs when the insertion monitoring counter becomes “3” or more. It is done.
The input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state.

  In FIG. 5, when the insertion sensor 44b is turned from on to off at time S24, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by "1", and it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 determines that the medal insertion Processing (bet processing or credit processing) is executed. For example, if the bet number is less than the prescribed number at that time, a bet number “1” addition process is executed. Specifically, when the specified number in the game is “3” and the bet number at that time is “0”, the bet number is changed from “0” by the “1” addition process of the bet number. Update to “1”.

At that time, if the bet number has already reached the prescribed number and the credit number has not reached the maximum number of “50”, the credit number “1” addition process is executed. For example, when the credit number at that time is “10”, the credit number is updated to “11”.
When the bet number reaches the specified number and the credit number reaches the maximum number “50”, the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45. Thereby, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in that case, even if the medal M is inserted, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect it.

In FIG. 5, in addition to turning on / off the closing sensors 44a and 44b, the timing at the time of occurrence of power interruption and the detection of power interruption is displayed. FIG. 5 shows Example 1 and Example 2, and both cases are exemplified by the case where the power interruption occurs at the timing (time S21) when the closing sensor 44a is turned on.
In Example 1, the power-off is detected after the time T1 has elapsed since the time S21 when the power-off occurred. Here, in Example 1, “T1> T3” is set. Therefore, when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at the moment when the power is cut off, the power-off process is started after the “1” addition process for the medal M has already been executed.

Here, the time T3 from the time S21 to S24 can be represented by “Ta + Tc−Tb”. Therefore, the minimum time of the time T3 corresponds to 4 interrupts and is “8.94 ms”.
The maximum time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts and is “252.555 ms”.
And in Example 1, it sets so that a power-off process must be performed after progress of time S24. For this reason, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of power interruption (time S21) to the execution of the power interruption processing is set to be 114 interrupts or more.

  If the setting is made as described above, even if the power-off occurs at the moment (time S21) when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M, the power-off process is executed after the “1” addition process for the medal M is performed. The medal M is normally bet or credited. Therefore, swallowing of the medal M can be prevented.

Also, in the example 2, contrary to the example 1, the power-off process is executed before the “1” addition process for the medal M is executed. That is, in Example 2, it sets so that it may become the relationship of "T1 <T3".
As described above, the time T3 from the time S21 to S24 corresponds to 4 interrupts in the minimum time. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship of “T1 <T3”, it is necessary to execute the power-off process within three interrupts from the occurrence of the power-off. However, since it is difficult to set the power-off process to be executed within 3 interrupts from the occurrence of the power-off, the minimum time Tc is set to be longer than 4 interrupts. For example, the minimum time of the time Tc can be set to 15 interrupts. If the time T1 from the occurrence of power interruption (time S21) to the power interruption process is set to about 10 interrupts, the power interruption process is executed before time S24 when the power interruption occurs at time S21. It becomes possible.

  When the power-off process is executed, the medal M “1” addition (bet or credit) process is not executed thereafter. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at the time S21 (when the power is cut off), the medal M1 “1” addition process is not executed. As a result, there is a demerit that the medal M is swallowed. However, as described in the first embodiment (A), after the power interruption occurs, the “1” addition process of the medal M is not executed. The power-off process can be executed as quickly as possible.

<First Embodiment (C)>
In the first embodiment (C), the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and the power interruption is defined.
When adding the medals to be paid out to the credits, the storage area for the number of credits provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated without driving the hopper motor 36. Further, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so that the number corresponds to the number of credits stored in the storage area.

  Then, when paying out medals after the number of credits reaches the upper limit “50”, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out medals from the hopper 35 (discharge from the payout port). In this case, each time a medal is paid out, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are configured to detect on / off. When the on / off detection results by the payout sensors 37a and 37b are within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and when the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M Are not paid out correctly, and the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

  FIG. 6 is a plan view for explaining the operation when the medal M is paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 6, a hopper disk (substantially disk-shaped rotating disk) is attached to the bottom surface of the hopper 35, and this hopper disk is rotated by driving of the hopper motor 36. In this hopper disc, a plurality of openings capable of holding the medal M are formed along the outer periphery of the hopper disc. The medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter the opening of the hopper disk. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disk rotates and the medals M held in the opening of the hopper disk are discharged one by one. A new medal M in the hopper 35 enters the opening where the medal M is discharged and emptied.

In FIG. 6, the medal M located at M <b> 1 indicates the one immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk. Both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are parts that constitute a medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is a shaft that does not move when the medal M is paid out. On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that reciprocates each time one medal M is paid out. The movable shaft 38b is arranged at a position indicated by a solid line in the drawing in a no-load state, and is fixed by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6 and corresponding to a spring 39b in FIG. 7 described later). 38a is urged. The medal M (M1) immediately after being discharged from the opening of the hopper disk comes into contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
In the state where the medal M is disposed at the position (M1) indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6 and is in contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, the medal M is between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. Narrower than diameter. Therefore, at this time, the medal M cannot pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

  The pushing force in the direction F1 in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M discharged from the opening of the hopper disk. When the pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M, the medal M can move in the F1 direction, and the pushing shaft pushes the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction. The fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the direction F2 in the figure while maintaining the state in contact with the medal M. Further, the movable shaft 38b moves to a position where the medal M can pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is wider than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure.

  Thereby, the medal M passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and is discharged in the direction F1 (medal payout port side) in the drawing. The medal M at this time is indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 6 (M2). When the medal M is discharged, the force that pushes the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction is released. As a result, the movable shaft 38b is returned again to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6 by the force of the spring.

  FIG. 7 is a plan view for explaining an on (detected) / off (non-detected) state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medal M is paid as described above in the medal payout device. FIG. 7 shows a state where the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) every time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 7A shows the state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is disposed at the position (initial position) indicated by the solid line in FIG. The movable piece 39a is attached so as to be rotatable around the central axis in the drawing, and is urged clockwise by a spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise in the drawing, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is urged toward the fixed shaft 38a in the drawing.
In a state where the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise in FIG. 7 by the spring 39b and no force other than the tensile force of the spring 39b acts on the movable piece 39a, the movable piece 39a has a predetermined stopper (not shown). To stop at the position of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 7A, on the left side of the movable piece 39a, a payout sensor 37a (upper side in the figure) and 37b (lower side in the figure) are arranged. The movable piece 39a is formed so as to extend toward the payout sensors 37a and 37b. When the movable piece 39a is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7 (a), the leading end is detected by the payout sensor 37a. ing.
In FIG. 7, each of the payout sensors 37a and 37b shows the sensor housing, and the illustration of the light emitting / receiving section (sensor eye) is omitted. In this respect, it differs from the making sensors 44a and 44b of FIGS.

Here, the state where the payout sensor 37a is detecting the movable piece 39a is in the on state (for example, FIG. 7A), and when the movable piece 39a is not detected, it is in the off state (for example, FIG. 7B). It is set to be.
Similarly, the state where the movable piece 39a is not detected is the off state (for example, FIG. 7A), and the payout sensor 37b is turned on when the movable piece 39a is detected (for example, FIG. 7C). Is set to
In the state of FIG. 7A, the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is in an on state, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is in an off state.

  As illustrated in FIG. 6, when the pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M, the movable shaft 38b starts to move in the F2 direction in FIG. 6, but the movable shaft 38b is thus When moved, in FIG. 7A, the movable piece 39a starts to rotate counterclockwise against the biasing force of the spring 39b. Then, when the movable piece 39a moves to the position shown in FIG. 7B, the tip of the movable piece 39a goes out of the dispensing sensor 37a. As a result, the payout sensor 37a does not detect the movable piece 39a, and is turned off. Even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 7B, the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the dispensing sensor 37b. Accordingly, in the state of FIG. 7B, the payout sensor 37a is in an off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in an off state.

  In FIG. 6, when the movable shaft 38b further moves in the F2 direction and reaches the position of the two-dot chain line portion in FIG. 6 (the position where the medal M can pass through the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b). 7, the movable piece 39 a further rotates counterclockwise and reaches the position of FIG. Thereby, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the dispensing sensor 37b, and the dispensing piece 37a detects the movable piece 39a. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7C, the payout sensor 37a is in an off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in an on state.

  In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further ejected from the position of M2, the force for urging the movable shaft 38b in the direction F2 in FIG. 6 disappears, so the movable shaft 38b is at the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. Return. The return force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b in FIG. Thereby, in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a goes out of the dispensing sensor 37b, and the dispensing sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7D shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7D, the payout sensor 37a is in an off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in an off state.

  When the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the dispensing sensor 37a, and the dispensing sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a. Thereby, it returns to the state (initial state) of Fig.7 (a). In the state of FIG. 7A, as described above, the payout sensor 37a is in the on state and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state. Moreover, when it returns to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the position of a continuous line in FIG.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing on / off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b in a time chart.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the medal payout process is started and the hopper motor drive signal is in the ON state.
In FIG. 8, the state before time S31 is the state shown in FIG. When time S31 is reached, the state shown in FIG. 7B is reached, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is in the off state). Next, when time S32 is reached, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 8, the time from time S31 to S32 is Td.

  The payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is on until time S33. At time S33, the payout sensor 37b is off. This state is the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S33 is assumed to be Te. Then, when time S34 is reached, the state returns to the state (initial position) of FIG. 7A and the payout sensor 37a is turned on. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is Tf.

In the payout process, the main control board 50 monitors the time during which the payout sensors 37a and 37b are in the on / off state, and determines that it is a medal payout error if it is not within a predetermined time range.
For example, in FIG. 8, the time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Accordingly, when the payout sensor 37b is turned on by the 12th interrupt after the payout sensor 37a is turned off, it is determined to be normal, but if the payout sensor 37b is turned on by the 12th interrupt. If not, a medal payout error is assumed.

  The time Te during which the payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state is set to 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) or more and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when the time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b is turned off is monitored, and when the time Te is not within the predetermined time range. The main control board 50 determines a medal payout error.

  Further, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf until the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts). ) And less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Tf until the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the payout sensor 37a is turned on is monitored. When it is not within the predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Further, in FIG. 8, similarly to FIG. 3 and FIG. 5, the time from the occurrence of power interruption to the power interruption processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that the power is cut off at the time S31, that is, at the timing when the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 3, the example in which power interruption is detected by 20 interrupts has been described. However, in the example of FIG. 8 (first embodiment (C)), at least after the time S34 has elapsed (from time S31 to time It is set so that the power-off is detected and the power-off process is executed at the time T1 elapses).

  Here, since the maximum time (Td + Tf) of time “Td + Tf” is “12 + 27 = 39” interrupt, the time T1 from the power-off to the execution of the power-off processing is set to 40 interrupts (89.4 ms), for example. Set. By setting in this way, even if the power interruption occurs at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power-off process can be started after the payout process for one medal is normally completed. That is, “(Td + Tf) <T1” can be set.

Conventionally, there has been a case where a power interruption (such as a power failure) occurs during the medal payout process. In this case, depending on the occurrence timing of the medal payout process and the power interruption, it is determined that the medal has been paid out even though the medal has not been paid out, and there is a possibility of causing a loss to the player.
On the other hand, in the first embodiment (C), even if the power is cut off during the medal payout process, the medal can be paid out correctly.

  In particular, when the medal payout process is started, that is, even when the power is cut off at the timing of time S31 in FIG. 8, the power-off is detected after the completion of one medal payout process, and the process proceeds to the power-off process. Therefore, for example, the power-off process is not executed when the payout sensor 37a is in an off state or when the payout sensor 37b is in an on state. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the power-off process from being performed in the middle of the medal payout process and the medal payout process from being interrupted before the (single) medal payout process ends normally.

  If the time T1 is set longer than necessary, the next medal payout process may be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is executed at least before the next medal payout process is executed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the period of the single medal payout process is time T4 and the payout sensor 37a is changed from the on state to the off state at the timing of time S35, the setting is made such that “T1 <T4”.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment relates to a gate mark formed on the substrate case of the main control substrate 50.
In the prior art, the shape, size, position, and the like of the gate trace of the substrate case have been determined exclusively by the mold designer at the time of mold manufacture for the convenience of mold manufacture.
However, since the gate trace is an uneven surface, even if a hole is made aiming at the gate trace, for example, there are cases where it cannot be visually recognized (not noticed).

If the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is disposed directly under the gate trace, the main CPU 55 is accessed by making a hole in the gate trace and passing a wire through the hole (the goto action is There was a risk of being done. In particular, when the gate mark has a shape that is thinner than the other part, it becomes easier to make a hole than the other part.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent the goto action from being performed using the gate trace of the substrate case.

FIG. 9 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58) in an exploded manner.
The substrate case 56 includes an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, both of which are (injection) molded products made of a transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is housed inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be clearly and visually confirmed from the outside of the board case 56.

On the main control board 50, electronic components such as the above-described main CPU 55, management information display LED 74 (4-digit LED; also referred to as “role monitor” or “ratio indicator”), set value display LED 73, and the like. It is installed. Although many electronic components such as the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 described above are mounted on the main control board 50, illustration is omitted in FIG. Further, although not shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 50 is equipped with bet switches 40a and 40b, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a passage sensor 46 in the medal selector, and failure check LEDs for the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Has been. Note that the failure confirmation LED is not limited to this.
For example, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is extinguished when the start switch 41 is off, and when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects on). ) Are turned on (lighted).

  Note that the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and other operation switches and failure detection LEDs of sensors described later are turned off when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects that the sensor is turned on), and are turned off when the operation switch is turned off. You may comprise so that it may light.

In addition, two failure confirmation LEDs for the bet switches 40a and 40b are provided for the bet switch 40a and 40b. The bet switch 40 is turned off when the bet switch 40 is not operated, and the bet switch 40 is operated. When the electrical signal at that time is received, the LED is turned on.
Furthermore, a total of three failure confirmation LEDs for the passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are provided for each sensor. When the medal is not detected, the LED is turned off. When the medal is detected, the LED is turned on. LED.
Then, for example, the administrator operates the start switch 41 and confirms whether or not the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is turned on / off. Can be confirmed. The same applies to other switches or sensors.

  The failure confirmation LED may be turned on / off by operating the start switch 41 or the like when the front door is opened during normal operation (setting is not being changed and setting is not being confirmed). . Alternatively, the failure confirmation may be executed by opening a front door and executing a predetermined operation after a door open error occurs. Further, it may be turned on / off by operation of the start switch 41 or the like at all times (even during setting change or setting confirmation).

On the main control board 50, the model number of the board is displayed (printed or the like). Although not shown in FIG. 9, model numbers and the like are also displayed on the upper surfaces of the RWM 53 and the ROM 54.
Furthermore, screw holes 50a for passing screws are formed in the four corners of the main control board 50.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at the four corners inside the lower surface of the lower cover 58. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw hole 50a and the boss 58c overlap, and the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case 58 by screwing the screw hole 50a through the screw to the boss 58c. can do.

  When the upper cover 57 is overlaid on the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed to fit with each other (in FIG. 9, the specific shape of the fitting portion is not shown). Further, caulking portions 57a are provided on the left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the drawing. Similarly, caulking portions 58a are provided on the left and right rows of the lower cover 58 in the drawing. In addition, in FIG. 9, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the specific shape and detailed shape of the crimping parts 57a and 58b.

When the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together and caulking is performed using the caulking portions 57a and 58a, after that, at least a part of the caulking portions 57a and 58a must be destroyed (unless plastic deformation is performed). The cover 57 and the lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
Thereby, the security of the main control board 50 can be ensured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, gate traces 57 b are provided at two locations outside the upper surface of the upper cover 57. In the substrate case 56 (the state in which the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted), the side in which the main control board 50 is accommodated is referred to as “inside”, and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as “outside”. .
In FIG. 9, the gate traces 57b are provided at two places, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be provided at some places.

Here, the “gate” is a gate for pouring resin (hot water) into the mold during resin molding, and the gate trace is a trace that remains at the boundary between the gate and the molded product after resin molding. is there.
When the substrate case 56 (the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG. 9, it is low cost to use a die that is divided in the vertical direction in FIG. In addition, when a multi-cavity mold is used, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and from the viewpoint of resin (hot water) fluidity, it is preferable to provide a gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed not on the side surface but on the upper surface in FIG.

Furthermore, considering the cutting of the gate trace protrusion at the time of molding, the gate trace is preferably provided outside.
From the above, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided outside the upper surface.
For the same reason as described above, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outer side of the lower surface (the surface on the opposite side of the visible surface in FIG. 9). In FIG. 9, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is provided at two places like the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57. However, it may be provided at one place or at three or more places. Also good.

  Further, when resin (hot water) flows from the gate into the mold, the spread of the resin (hot water) in the mold is not uniform, and if there is a difference in cooling time, the molded product may be warped and deformed. Therefore, the gate position of the molded product is preferably arranged at a position where the spread of the resin (hot water) in the mold is uniform. Furthermore, when providing gates at a plurality of locations, it is preferable to make the distance from the end of the molded product to the gate and the distance between the gates as uniform as possible.

  10A is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 and the main control board 50. FIG. 10A shows a state in which the main control board 50 is accommodated in the board case 56 (a state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together). It is a plan view seen from above. Further, the main control board 50 is seen through from the upper surface side of the upper cover 57.

Furthermore, (b) shows Example 1 of the arrow sectional view of AA in FIG. (A), and (c) shows Example 2 of the arrow sectional view of AA in FIG. Indicates. In these sectional views, hatching is omitted from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 10A, in a state where the main control board 50 is accommodated in the board case 56, the vertical direction of the upper cover 57 from the two gate marks 57b (on the main control board 50 side) (below directly) The model number display, the management information display LED 74, the set value display LED 73, and the main CPU 55 (socket) are set not to be positioned. As described above, the RWM 53, the ROM 54, and the failure confirmation LED are also mounted on the main control board 50, but it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not positioned directly above them.

The reason why the gate trace 57 is arranged as described above is as follows.
The main control board 50 needs to visually confirm whether or not unauthorized modification or the like has been performed even after the slot machine 10 is installed in the market. In particular, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the main CPU 55 and the like (including the RWM 53 and the ROM 54; the same applies hereinafter) are compatible and whether or not they have been altered by the goto action. Further, since the main control board 50 is accommodated in the board case 56 and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually confirm the main control board 50 from the outside of the board case 56. is there.
The board case 56 that houses the main control board 50 is attached to the inside of the slot machine 10, for example, inside the back surface. This is because the numerical values displayed by the set value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 are attached at positions where they are easy to see.

  Therefore, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 looks at the board case 56 (main control board 50) from the direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. That is, it is considered that the substrate case 56 (main control substrate 50) is visually observed as shown in FIG. For this reason, if the main CPU 55 or the like is arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, the gate mark 57 may hinder the visibility thereof. In particular, information displayed (printed or the like) on the upper surface of the main CPU 55 or the like is also made visible without hindering visibility.

  Since the entire upper cover 57 is molded from a transparent resin, even if it is directly under the gate mark 57b, the visibility is not completely hindered. However, as shown in FIG. 10B and FIG. 10C, the cross section of the gate trace 57b becomes an uneven surface, so that the visibility just below the gate trace 57b is lowered (becomes worse than the plane). That is true. In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 10B, since the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface, whitening may occur due to the stress at the time of cutting the resin. Therefore, also in this case, the visibility just below the gate mark 57b is hindered.

Further, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is a smooth surface with no irregularities except for the gate trace 57b, even if a hole is made by a goto action, it can be easily noticed visually.
On the other hand, the gate trace 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. For this reason, if a hole is formed in the gate hole 57b and then the hole is sealed with, for example, a resin material, it may be difficult to visually determine whether or not the hole is formed in the gate mark 57b. For this reason, there is a possibility that a goto action using the gate mark 57b is performed.

  On the other hand, when the hole is made in the gate mark 57b, the goto action is easily performed if the main CPU 55 or the like is positioned in the vertical direction (below the gate mark 57b). Therefore, if the main CPU 55 or the like is not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, it becomes difficult to access the main CPU 55 and the like, and it is possible to make the goto action difficult.

  In addition, the model number displayed (printed, etc.) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information for checking the presence or absence of fraud, so that the model number is displayed for easy confirmation (easy to read). The gate trace 57b is not arranged immediately above the region. Furthermore, when the gate mark 57b exists directly above the model number display, a hole is made in the gate mark 57b to access the inside of the substrate case 56, and to prevent the model number display from being tampered with, The gate mark 57b is not arranged directly above the model number display.

  Further, for the set value display LED 73, it is necessary to see the displayed numerical value when the setting is changed or when the setting is confirmed. Further, regarding the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to look at the displayed numerical value in order to confirm whether the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio, etc. are within an appropriate range. Therefore, the gate trace 57b is not arranged directly above these LEDs. Further, in the same manner as described above, the gate trace 57b is used to make a hole in the gate trace 57b, from which the LED in the substrate case 56 is accessed, and it is difficult to perform the goto action. The gate mark 57b is not arranged on the upper side.

  In addition, with respect to the failure confirmation LED described above, the administrator of the slot machine 10 operates the operation switch to confirm whether or not the failure confirmation LED corresponding to the operation switch is lit. Therefore, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located directly above the failure confirmation LED. As described above, the failure confirmation LED is not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b to make it difficult for the goto action to be performed.

In FIG. 10, the cross-sectional views of Example 1 shown in (b) and Example 2 shown in (c) have the same outer shape of the gate mark 57 b. In Example 1 of (b), the inner surface of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b remains a flat surface. On the other hand, in Example 2 of (c), the inner surface of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b is formed in a protruding shape (thick).
The outside of the gate mark 57b has a protrusion 57d at the center thereof, and has a recess 57c formed so as to sink into a cylindrical shape at the outer periphery thereof. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected at the time of molding, and this boundary is cut with a cutter when the molded product is separated from the mold. Therefore, the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface by a cutter. There are two methods for cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product: a method of automatically cutting at the time of injection by a molding machine and a method of cutting in a subsequent process.

  Here, at the time of cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, it is costly to process the cut surface into a completely smooth surface, in other words, to make the smooth surface with the height of the protrusion 57d substantially “0”. It becomes high and difficult. Therefore, the recessed portion 57c is formed so as not to protrude above the outer surface of the upper cover 57 even if the height of the protrusion 57d remains. Thereby, for example, when the worker who assembles touches the upper cover 57, it is possible to prevent the projection 57d from being injured.

As shown in FIG. 10B, when the recessed portion 57c is provided in the gate mark 57, the thickness of the upper cover 57 is reduced by that amount. In this way, if there is a portion with a small thickness, there is a possibility that the go-to action of opening a hole in the recessed portion 57c and accessing the inside of the substrate case 56 may be facilitated.
Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 10C, a protrusion 57e is provided on the opposite side (inside) of the upper surface outside where the gate mark 57b is provided to prevent the thickness of only the recessed portion 57c from being reduced. Yes. If the protrusion 57e is provided and a portion where the wall thickness is reduced is not provided, it is possible to make it difficult to make a goofing action such as making a hole in the recessed portion 57c.

  Further, the protrusion 57e not only contributes to fraud countermeasures by preventing a part of the thickness of the gate mark 57b from being thinned, but also functions as a dimple (hot water pool) during molding. In FIG. 10B, when resin (hot water) is injected from the mold gate (position corresponding to the protrusion 57d) and the resin (hot water) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the resin (hot water) There is a risk that the flow will change suddenly and will not be able to flow stably. Therefore, by providing a dimple (hot water reservoir) at a position facing the tip of the gate, the flow of the resin (hot water) is less likely to change suddenly when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate. (Hot water) can flow stably. The protrusion 57e may have various shapes such as a square cross section, a triangular cross section, a trapezoidal cross section (in the case of FIG. 10C), a dome shape, and the like, and the protrusion 57e becomes thin by providing the recess 57c. Any shape may be used as long as the shape can be prevented.

  In addition, regarding the visibility in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate trace 57b, the smoother the lower side of the gate trace 57 is superior to the uneven shape. Therefore, regarding the visibility directly under the gate mark 57b, the shape of FIG. 10B is superior to the shape of FIG. 10C. In addition, the shape of FIG. 10B simplifies the shape of the mold because it is not necessary to form a portion corresponding to the protrusion 57e in the mold as compared with the shape of FIG. 10C. Cost).

Further, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outer side (lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, a protrusion 57d and a recess 57c shown in FIG. 10B are formed on the outside. This is because, as described above, it is more convenient in terms of molding process to provide the protrusions 57d and the recessed portions 57c outside the molded product.
Then, when the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58, setting is made so that the pin positions of the main CPU 55 and the like of the main control board 50 are not positioned in the vertical direction of the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58. This is because a hole is made in the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 so that the pins such as the main CPU 55 cannot be accessed.
When the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 has the shape shown in FIG. 10C, the protrusion 57e in FIG. 10C faces the pin side of the main control board 50. It goes without saying that the pins protruding from the lower surface side of the control board 50 and the protrusions 57e are formed so as not to interfere (contact).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted, the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 are overlapped in the vertical direction. It is preferable to arrange (shift) so as not to become. In particular, in the case of the gate traces 57b and 58b shown in FIG. 10B, the thickness of part of the gate traces 57b and 58b (recessed portion 57c) is reduced, but the portion where the thickness is reduced is the upper cover. By disposing at a position where 57 and the lower cover 58 do not overlap, it is possible to prevent portions that are easily targeted from overlapping.
Further, when the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 are overlapped in the vertical direction, the position of the gate mark of the other cover can be known only by looking at one cover. turn into. In order to prevent this, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 are prevented from overlapping in the vertical direction.

<Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection). Later, when communication is restored, or when communication fails due to the influence of noise, etc.).
As described above, the control command transmission means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits a command such as a push order instruction number and information on the operated stop switch 42 to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub control board 80 outputs an effect based on the command received from the main control board 50, and updates the effect according to the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are disconnected, and communication becomes impossible. The cause includes poor contact and radio wave goto. When the sub control board 80 stops receiving the command from the main control board 50, the production stops in the current state. In addition, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub control board 80 determines whether or not there is a disconnection in communication between the two. Therefore, even if the main control board 50 is disconnected between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80, the progress of the game (the operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42 is performed). Etc.), the command transmission process is continued to the sub-control board 80. On the other hand, when the sub control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 maintains the effect state at that time.
Even when the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are disconnected, for example, during AT, the main control board 50 pushes the acquired number display LED 78 in the order of pushing by the operation of the instruction function. Display instruction information. Thereby, even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning normally, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order by looking at the pressing order instruction information.
Furthermore, since the player can compare the push order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 with the effect contents (correct answer push order) displayed on the image display device 23, the information on both is contradictory. When this is done, it is possible to know that a problem has occurred in the image display by the sub-control board 80.

For example, when the disconnection occurs in the middle of the “N” game and the communication is restored in the middle of the “N + 1” game, the sub control board 80 can receive the command transmitted from the main control board 50. Sometimes, the production cannot be suddenly switched to the “N + 1” game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (a command for informing a game start), so that the “N + 1” game is started. This is because it cannot be determined. For this reason, when communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is disconnected and then returned, depending on the content of the production, there is a risk of misunderstanding the player.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, the production is given a sense of incongruity while avoiding misunderstandings to the player as much as possible. A production that does not exist is output.

FIG. 11 shows the operation of the main control board 50 in the third embodiment (referred to as “main action” in FIG. 11) and the effect display by the sub control board 80 (referred to as “sub display” in FIG. 11). .), And illustrates five examples including pattern 1 (example 1) to pattern 5 (example 5).
Patterns 1 to 5 show examples in which communication is disabled (disconnection occurs) in the middle of the “N” game and communication is restored in the middle of the “N + 1” game.
In the main operation of FIG. 11, “bet” means that the bet switch 40 is operated and a specified number is bet effectively. “Start” means that the game is started by operating the start switch 41 after a specified number of bets have been placed. Furthermore, for example, “right stop” means that the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 stops).

Further, in the sub-display, “push order effect” means an effect of displaying an image of the correct push order in, for example, a game won for the push order bell or push order replay. Specifically, for example, “middle right display” means an effect that informs that the correct answer pressing order is “middle right”. For example, “middle left display” is an effect after the left stop switch 42 is operated, and the stop switch 42 to be operated second is left, and the stop switch 42 to be operated third is in the middle. This means an effect to be notified.
Furthermore, for example, “right stop effect” is an effect that the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 is stopped) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 is operated is received. means.

In the pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated in the “N” game, as described above, the main control board 50 performs lottery drawing. In the game, “middle right” is an example of winning the push order bell that is the correct push order. In this case, the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct push order “middle right / left” to the sub-control board 80 during AT. Upon receiving this command, the sub control board 80 outputs a push order effect that displays the correct right and left push order to the image display device 23.
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the correct push order “middle right and left” on the acquired number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player operates the right stop switch 42 as the first stop in the correct pressing order (right stop). As a result, the right reel 31 stops and a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it outputs an effect (right stop effect) in which the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 is stopped), and displays a right / left middle display, a left middle display (others, etc. Display of “−left middle”, “× left middle”, etc.).
Pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection occurs after the right reel 31 stops, and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 becomes impossible (sub disconnection). That is, this is an example in which communication is disabled during the game.

  Even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning), the main control board 50 can proceed with the game. The example of pattern 1 shows an example in which the left and middle stop switches 42 are respectively operated (the left and middle reels 31 are stopped) after the occurrence of disconnection in the “N” game (the left middle stop). ).

  Next, it is assumed that a bet operation for the “N + 1” game is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the “N + 1” game, as in the case of the “N” game, an example is shown in which “right / middle left” wins the push order bell (or push order replay), which is the correct push order. In the “N + 1” game, as in the “N” game, an example is shown in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the middle order of right and left. Any combination lottery result may be used.

  When the “N + 1” game is won with the push order bell (or push order replay) having the correct push order, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order by the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 even when the correct pressing order is not displayed on the image display device 23. Become.

In the “N + 1” game, an example is shown in which the player first operates the right stop switch 42. Thereafter, it is assumed that the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is restored before the second left stop switch 42 is operated.
Thereby, when the player operates the left stop switch 42 which is the second stop switch 42, the command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When receiving this command, the sub control board 80 updates the image display so as to correspond to the received command. That is, an image indicating that the left stop has been performed is displayed (left stop effect). Here, the sub-control board 80 updates the continuation of the previously displayed effect, that is, the effect of the “N” game.

  Accordingly, the second stop switch 42 (left) of the “N + 1” game is actually operated, but the second stop switch 42 (left) of the “N” game is operated on the sub control board 80. Outputs the effect when operated. Since the second correct push order in the “N” game is on the left, in this example, it is operated in the correct push order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (push order correct answer effect) and outputs the last medium display effect.

Then, in the “N + 1” game, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When receiving this command, the sub control board 80 outputs an effect corresponding to the third stop of the “N” game, that is, an intermediate stop effect.
In the case of “N + 1” game, even if the winning combination with the correct pressing order is won and the correct pressing order is other than the middle left, the effect is output as described above under the condition of pattern 1. Is done. That is, in the “N + 1” game, when the pressing order operated by the player is in the middle left or right, even if the pressing order corresponds to the incorrect answer pressing order, the pressing order failure as in pattern 2 to be described later Production is not output.

  Furthermore, in the case of the “N + 1” game, even if the winning combination that does not have the correct pressing order is won, or even if the winning combination is not won, if the pressing order operated by the player is right / left middle, The same production is output. That is, even if the “N + 1” game does not have the correct answer pressing order, the sub-control board 80 indicates that the left stop switch 42 has been operated after the communication is restored (in the example of pattern 1). When a command is received, a left stop effect (push order correct answer effect) is output, and a medium display is output.

  Next, when the bet for the “N + 2” game is made and the “N + 2” game is started by operating the start switch 41, the main control board 50 makes a “ A command corresponding to the start of the “N + 2” game is transmitted. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 outputs the effect at the start of the “N + 2” game. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, the command of the effect group number and the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receipt of these commands, the sub control board 80 displays the push order effect and the correct answer push order as at the start of the “N” game.

As described above, in the pattern 1, the sub-control board 80 is based on the command received from the main control board 50 ("N + 1" game) until the third stop of the "N + 1" game. When the “N + 2” game is started, it is updated to the “N + 2” game.
Further, at the end of the game, the main control board 50 transmits a command for the acquired number to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 may display an image of the acquired number during AT together. In such a case, since the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the acquired number of commands at the end of the “N” game, that is, during the disconnection, “N−1” at the end of the “N” game. “The number of games acquired at the end of the game remains displayed. Then, when the communication is restored and the command for the number acquired at the end of the “N + 1” game is received, the sub control board 80 updates the image display so that the number acquired at the end of the “N + 1” game is reached. .

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as pattern 1. Further, the disconnection timing is the same as that in pattern 1, but the timing at which communication is restored is different from that in pattern 2. Pattern 2 is an example in which communication is restored after the left stop, which is the second stop, in the “N + 1” game.
In pattern 2, the main operation and sub-display in the “N” game are the same as in pattern 1, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
Next, in the “N + 1” game, the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of right and left, but it is assumed that communication returns after the second left stop.

  Immediately before the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect and the middle left display for the “N” game. In this state, when communication is restored and the player operates the stop switch 42 (third stop) in the “N + 1” game, the command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the middle stop command while displaying the left middle, it determines that the order is incorrect and the push order failure effect is output. In the third embodiment, after the push order failure effect is output, the subsequent push order effect is not output.

In the “N + 1” game, when it is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated in the middle / left / right push order, the communication is restored after the middle / left stop, and the right stop command is executed after the right stop is performed. Also when it is transmitted to the board 80, a push order failure effect is output in the same manner as described above. Since the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect and the middle left display, if the right stop command is received at this time, the same stop command is received twice in one game. . Even in such a case, it is processed as a push order failure without performing an error notification and the effect is output.
When the “N + 2” game is started as in the case of the pattern 1, the command at the start of the “N + 2” game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 starts to produce the “N + 2” game.

In pattern 3, the main operation and sub-display of the “N” game are the same as in pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop in the “N + 1” game. Therefore, in the “N + 1” game, after the communication is restored, a left stop command as a third stop is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Since the sub-control board 80 outputs the “N left display” of the “N” game, when it receives a left stop command in this state, it is determined that the correct answer is pressed. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (push order correct answer effect), and then outputs an intermediate display.

  However, on the main control board 50 side, the “N + 1” game ends the game with the third left stop. Next, the game proceeds to the “N + 2” game, and when the command at the start of the “N + 2” game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command and receives the “N + 2” game. Switch to the start effect. Therefore, the left stop effect and middle display that have been output are canceled. Also, even if a command at the start of the “N + 2” game is received while the middle display is being output, an error notification is not performed, and an effect at the start of the “N + 2” game is output according to the received command. .

Pattern 4 is an example of displaying the number of remaining games during AT in the sub display. In Pattern 4, the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication return timing are the same as in Pattern 3.
The main control board 50 transmits a command of the number of remaining games of the AT to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game and game. When the sub control board 80 receives a command of the remaining number of games of AT from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 updates the display of the remaining number of games of AT. In addition, during AT, the display of the number of remaining games is not performed independently, but is output together with the push order effect of the pattern 3.

In Pattern 4, when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game), the main control board 50 transmits a command of the remaining number of games during AT to the sub control board 80. Here, in the “N” game, the remaining number of games of the AT is 10 games.
The sub-control board 80 displays the remaining number of games during the AT (remaining 10 games) based on the command received from the main control board 50 at the start of the “N” game.
Then, when the “N” game is disconnected in the middle and the disconnection state continues even at the start of the “N + 1” game, the main control board 50 performs the sub- Although a process for transmitting a command of the remaining number of games (9 games) in the AT is executed to the control board 80, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to disconnection). For this reason, in the “N + 1” game, “the remaining 10 games” of the “N” game remain displayed.

  When the communication returns to the middle of the “N + 1” game (after the middle left stop) and shifts to the “N + 2” game, the main control board 50 transfers to the sub-control board 80 at the start of the “N + 2” game. In contrast, a command of the remaining number of games (8 games) in the AT is transmitted. When receiving this command, the sub control board 80 updates the display of the remaining 10 games to the display of the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is an example when the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication return timing are the same as pattern 4, but the “N” game is the remaining one game of AT.
When the “N” game starts (when the start switch 41 is operated), the main control board 50 transmits a command of the remaining number of games during AT (1 game remaining) to the sub control board 80. When receiving this command, the sub control board 80 updates the display of the remaining one game (from the display of the remaining two games so far).
When a disconnection occurs after the right stop of the “N” game, the main control board 50 sets the remaining number of games during AT to 0 at the start of the “N + 1” game (when the start switch 41 is operated). A command indicating that the game is a game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, but the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the “N + 1” game, the display indicating that the remaining AT game is one is continued.

Further, the sub control board 80 outputs an AT end effect when the AT ends. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on receiving a command (at the start of the game) indicating that the number of remaining games in the AT is 0 game.
However, in the example of pattern 5, since the sub-control board 80 has not received a command indicating that the number of remaining games in the AT is 0, the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, at the end of the “N + 1” game, an effect indicating that the game is the remaining one of the AT is output.

When the “N + 1” game ends and the “N + 2” game is entered, at the start of the “N + 2” game, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating a normal game (non-AT) to the sub-control board 80. Send. Based on the reception of this command, the sub-control board 80 erases the display of “1 remaining game” and outputs a normal (non-AT) effect.
At the end of the AT, an image display such as “Pachinko / pachislot is a game machine that can be enjoyed moderately” is performed to prevent sinking. However, in the case of the pattern 5, since the sub display is not normally restored at the end of the “N + 1” game, the image display cannot be performed. Therefore, as a countermeasure, the game history is managed on the sub-control board 80 side, and when the next game (“N + 2” game in the example of FIG. 11) is entered across the end of AT, the game The image display may be performed at the start of the operation.

  In the above patterns 1 to 5, when the disconnection occurs in the “N” game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the effect immediately before the occurrence of the disconnection of the “N” game until the communication is restored. When the communication returns in the middle of the game, the continuation of the effect output as the “N” game is output based on the command received in the “N + 1” game. Thus, for example, in pattern 1, when the “N + 1” game receives a left stop command after communication has been restored, the correct answer is issued regardless of whether or not the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct answer pressing order. A push order effect will be output.

  On the other hand, in pattern 1, for example, when an “N + 1” game is received and after a communication return, if an intermediate stop command is received, the push order of the effects being output at that time, that is, “N” game Since the middle left display is in the incorrect answer pressing order, a pressing order failure effect is output regardless of whether or not the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct answer pressing order. However, even if the push order failure effect is output in the “N + 1” game, if the player operates the stop switch 42 in the correct push order of the “N + 1” game, it is advantageous for the player. Since the combination is stopped and displayed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

  As described above, when the communication returns in the “N + 1” game, the “N + 1” game outputs the effect that takes over the effect before the disconnection (“N” game), and the “N + 2” game. Reset the production at the start (return to the correct production). Thereby, it is possible to minimize the output of an unnatural effect in both the game in which the disconnection has occurred and the game in which the communication has been restored, and to prevent the player from being misunderstood as much as possible.

Further, in the example of FIG. 11, an example is shown in which the communication is restored to the “N + 1” game after the disconnection occurs in the “N” game, but the communication is restored when two or more games have elapsed after the occurrence of the disconnection. Even so, it is the same as FIG.
For example, when a break occurs in the “N” game and communication returns to the “N + a” game (a = “2” or more), the “N + a-1” game will be interrupted until the “N + a-1” game. The last previous production continues to be output. Then, in the “N + a” game in which the communication is restored, the continuation of the performance of the “N” game that has been continuously output is executed based on the command received after the communication is restored. Next, at the start of the “N + a + 1” game, the effect at the start of the “N + a + 1” game (correct effect) is updated.

<Fourth embodiment>
The motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing when rotating and stopping the reel 31, and these are all in an excited state. Then, when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, a predetermined time (time T11 described later) is set to a state in which excitation is performed simultaneously for four phases (hereinafter referred to as “four-phase excitation state”).
The fourth embodiment relates to the time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 is stopped.
FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 12, hatching is omitted from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawing. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that an actual product has a structure as shown in FIG. In FIG. 12, the process from when the stop button 42a is pushed in until it returns to the original state is illustrated in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). In the figure, the upper side is the player side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10. In the figure, the upper side from the front door 12 is the side visible to the player.
Furthermore, a line where the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. It is assumed that the moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line is the moment when the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12A, a stop button 42a is an operating body of the stop switch 42, and is operated when the player turns on the stop switch 42 (pushes into the slot machine 10). The player side of the stop button 42a is disposed so as to protrude from the front door 12 provided on the front surface of the housing of the slot machine 10 by about several millimeters. When this portion is viewed from the front side on the player side, it is substantially cylindrical. In the no-load state, the stop button 42a is urged in the direction F3 (outward direction, player direction) in the drawing (a) by the spring force of the (compression) coil spring 42c. An end of the player side of 42 a protrudes from the front door 12. In this state, in the drawing of the stop button 42a, the lower surface portion (hereinafter referred to as “flange-shaped portion”) and the front door 12 are in contact with each other.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided on the inner side of the front door 12 (inside the housing), and abuts the stop button 42a when the stop button 42a is pushed in, and prohibits further movement of the stop button 42a. It is.

  A moving piece 42d that can move integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the lower surface side of the stop button 42a. Further, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is disposed directly below the moving piece 42d. In the figure, in the unloaded state shown in (a), when the stop button 42a is urged toward the front door 12 by the urging force of the coil spring 42c, the tip (lower end in the figure) of the moving piece 42d is It arrange | positions in the position away from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state of (a) in the figure, the detection sensor 42e does not detect the moving piece 42d and is in the off state.

  Next, as shown in (b) in the figure, when the player stops the rotation of the reel 31, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction. Thereby, the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure against the urging force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing, the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a also moves downward in the drawing. Thereby, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters the detection sensor 42e. And if the front-end | tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e will be in an ON state from an OFF state. FIG. 12B shows the position of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state. At the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a is not yet in contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

  When the stop button 42a is further pushed in from the state of FIG. 12B, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the stopper 42c as shown in FIG. 12C. This position is the deepest part when the stop button 42a is pushed. Further, in the state of FIG. 12C, since the state in which the tip of the moving piece 42d is detected by the detection sensor 42e is maintained, the detection sensor 42e is in the on state.

  When the player releases the push of the stop button 42a from the state of FIG. 12C (excluding the force in the direction F4 in FIG. 12C), the stop button 42a is moved by the biasing force F3 of the coil spring 42c. A force to return to the initial position is applied. As a result, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d integral with the stop button 42a move upward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d does not contact the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (FIG. 12 (d)).

FIG. 12D shows the arrangement of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state. In the state of FIG. 12D, the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further returned from the state of FIG. 12D, the stop button 42a comes into contact with the flange-shaped front door 12 of the stop button 42a, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state shown in FIG. 12A, which is a no-load state of the stop button 42a.
The state of FIG. 12B showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state and the state of FIG. 12d showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e is turned off from the on state are generally Although it is the same, there is no particular problem even if a slight deviation occurs.

FIG. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excitation state of the motor 32 in the fourth embodiment, where (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. Show.
In FIG. 13A, the time when the stop button 42a is at the initial position (FIG. 12A) in the no-load state and the stop button 42a starts to be pushed is S41. The time when the stop button 42a is pushed in and the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off, that is, when the state becomes the state of FIG. Furthermore, the time when the stop button 42a is pushed in from the position and the stop button 42a reaches the deepest part (when the state shown in FIG. 12C is reached) is set to S43. The above times S41, S42, and S43 depend on the player's pushing speed and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pushed in slowly, the time from the time S41 to S43 becomes longer, and if the stop button 42a is pushed earlier, the time from the time S41 to S43 becomes shorter.

Next, it is assumed that pressing of the stop button 42a is released at time S44. It is assumed that the stop button 42a is located at the deepest part at the time S44.
When the pushing of the stop button 42a is released, as described above, a force is applied to the stop button 42a to return to the initial position by the spring force of the coil spring 42c. It is assumed that the operator of the stop button 42a does not touch the stop button 42a from the moment when the push of the stop button 42a is released.
Then, the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned off from on, that is, when the detection sensor 42e is in the state of FIG. Here, the time from time S44 to S45 is T11.

  The time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (movement distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e is turned off. In Example 1 of (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed so that the time T11 is 100 ms.

  On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is turned on (specifically, when the detection sensor 42e is turned on) (when the state becomes the state shown in FIG. 12B), the reel control means 65 makes the reel corresponding to the stop switch 42. 31 stop control is performed, and the reel 31 is stopped at a position corresponding to a winning lottery result (result determined by the internal lottery means) by the winning lottery means. As described above, the time from when the reel 31 stop control is started (after detection of the detection sensor 42e is detected) to the reel 31 is stopped (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game). Within 190 ms (the number of moving frames is 5 frames or less when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21 symbols, and the number of moving frames is 4 frames or less when the symbols are 20 symbols). Therefore, since the winning lottery result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the start of deceleration of the reel 31 to the stop of the reel 31 is not constant.

Further, after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position, the reel control means 65 is in a state where the motor 32 is energized (brake is applied) simultaneously for a predetermined period of time for four phases (the above-described four-phase excitation state). ).
Here, the motor 32 in the present embodiment is a four-phase stepping motor. For example, the motor 32 (reel 31) is rotated during the first / two-phase excitation (not limited to the first / two-phase excitation). Absent). Therefore, even during rotation of the motor 32, one excitation state is maintained. And when stopping the rotation drive of the motor 32, it is set as a four-phase excitation state.
In addition, when a bound stop is performed after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position (when the reel 31 is made to vibrate at the stop position), for example, a three-phase excitation state is used instead of a four-phase excitation state. Is also possible.

  The moment when the rotational drive of the motor 32 is stopped may exceed the position at which the motor 32 or the reel 31 is to be stopped due to the inertia at the time of rotation of the motor 32 or the reel 31. A four-phase excitation state is set, and a static torque is generated so as not to move by inertia from the stop position. When the motor 32 is in the four-phase excitation state, the next operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is not permitted. The operation acceptance of the next stop switch 42 is permitted during the first or second stop because the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 changes from the on state to the off state (returns to the state of FIG. 12 (d)). ) And when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that has stopped rotating is completed.

The reason for this control is as follows.
In order to hold the stop position of the reel 31, the motor 32 is controlled to a four-phase excitation state. When controlled in such a manner, more load is applied than usual, so the load of the entire slot machine 10 is reduced. It gets bigger. Therefore, in order to reduce this load, the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted after the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32 is completed.

  In Example 1 of FIG. 13A, when the result lottery result by the role lottery means (result determined by the internal lottery means) is a predetermined result (for example, at the time of pushing order bell winning), the four-phase excitation state is set. The excitation time T12 from the start to the end is set to 90 interrupts (2.235 × 90 = 201.15 ms). Here, when the combination lottery result is a predetermined result, the excitation time T12 in the four-phase excitation state is set to “90 interrupt”. The excitation time T12 is always constant regardless of the combination lottery result. It does not necessarily mean.

Therefore, in Example 1 of the fourth embodiment, the setting is such that “T11 <T12”.
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from the time S42, the reel 31 stops within 190 ms. As described above, the number of moving frames during stop control when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is “21” is within 5 frames (minimum 1 frame), or the number of symbols on the reel 31 is “20”. Since the number of moving frames at the time of stop control is within 4 frames (minimum 1 frame), the reel 31 stops within about “40” to “190” ms from time S42.
On the other hand, the time from when the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state until the stop button 42e reaches the deepest portion and the pushing force of the stop button 42e is released (time from time S42 to S44) is , “40” to “180” ms. For this reason, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the push of the stop button 42a is released are close (substantially the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, it is assumed that the four-phase excitation state is started at the timing (time S44) when the pressing of the stop button 42a is released, and after the detection sensor 42e is changed from the on state to the off state (time S45), The motor 32 is designed so that the four-phase excitation state ends (time T12 elapses). For this reason, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is finished, it can be set so that the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off before the end of the four-phase excitation state, the next stop button 42a can be accepted for operation when the four-phase excitation state ends. . Thereby, it becomes possible to advance a game at high speed.

  On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 13B, from the moment (time S44) when the pressing of the stop button 42a reaching the deepest part is released until the detection sensor 42e is turned off (from time S45). This is an example in which the time T11 (until it reaches) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is three times that of Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
In Example 2, as in Example 1, it is assumed that the four-phase excitation state is started from the moment (time S44) when the pressing of the stop button 42a reaching the deepest part is released, and the motor 32 has four phases. The sensor 42e is designed to be turned off after the excitation state is finished. For this reason, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, it can be set so that the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, the design is such that the four-phase excitation state is completed, so that the operation of the next stop button 42a is permitted when the detection sensor 42e is turned off. can do. Thereby, it becomes possible to advance a game at high speed.
As described above, both Example 1 and Example 2 have control advantages.
In Example 1 and Example 2 in FIG. 13, an example is shown in which the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is different. However, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, for example, if “T11 <T12”, the next stop button 42a can be received when the four-phase excitation state is completed. Therefore, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, the game in Example 1 can be digested at a higher speed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to the relationship between power on / off and program activation.
FIG. 14 is a time chart illustrating an outline of control in the fifth embodiment.
In FIG. 14, (a) is a diagram showing a state when a power interruption occurs after the main program (the program of the main control board 50) is started. The power supply is turned on at time S51 and then turned off at time S55.
When power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1), supply of power to both the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is started, and the main control board 50 and The voltage level of the sub-control plate 80 gradually increases and reaches the supply level V0 (level when the power is on). In FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, the power-off detection level V1, and the drive voltage limit V2 are the same as those in FIG.

  After the power is turned on at time S51, the time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 reach the supply level V0 is S52. Thereafter, the sub-program by the sub-control board 80 starts from time S53 when time T22 has elapsed from time S52. Thereafter, the main program by the main control board 50 is started from time S54 when time T23 (T23> T22) has elapsed from time S52. In this way, the subprogram is started first, and then the main program is started when the first command after power-on is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. This is because the command can be received on the sub-control board 80 side.

Next, when the power is cut off (the power switch 11 is turned off or a power failure occurs) at time S55, the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level decreases, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 can execute the power-off process if the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2.
Further, when the power interruption occurs at time S55, the voltage becomes the power interruption detection level V1 at time T0 (20 interrupt) as in FIG. 3, and the power interruption is detected (time S56). Further, after detection of power-off, the power-off processing is executed after, for example, one interruption, as in FIG. It is assumed that the power-off process ends at time S57.
Thereafter, when time S58 is reached, the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2, and the program (processing) cannot be executed. For this reason, control is performed so that the power-off process is completed before time S58 is reached.

When the main program is started at time S54, the main CPU 55 is set, the RWM 53 is checked, whether the previous power-off is normal, the setting key switch is checked, etc., and then interrupt processing is started. . When the setting key switch is OFF, after the interruption process is started, a power-off recovery process (such as initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 53) is executed. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to the setting change process after the interruption process is started.
Then, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), when the power cut occurs after starting the main program, if the setting key switch is OFF, the power cut-off process is executed after the power cut-off recovery process is completed. To do. As a result, the program can be terminated normally.
On the other hand, when the power cut occurs after starting the main program, if the setting key switch is on, the power cut process is executed without starting the setting change process. This is because if the setting change process is executed after the power interruption, a problem may occur.

In order to execute the main program normally, the setting of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 are always executed even when the power supply is detected simultaneously with the activation of the main program.
Furthermore, after the main program is started, even if a power interruption occurs thereafter, it is always executed until the interrupt is started. This is to detect a power interruption in the interrupt process. As in the first embodiment (A), for example, at the “N” interrupt, a voltage drop (power-off detection level V1) at which it is determined that a power-off has occurred is detected, and the next “N + 1” game However, when the voltage drop is detected, the power-off is detected at the “N + 1” interrupt (determined that the power is cut off). Then, the power-off process is executed from the “N + 2” interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 14A, the main program is activated at time S54, and the power is cut off at time S55 thereafter. However, even if the power is turned off at the same time as S54 (starting of the main program), the power-off process is set to be completed before the voltage reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
In FIG. 14A, a time T21 from when the power is turned on (time S51) until the voltage reaches the supply level V0 (time S52), the voltage is changed to the low level from the occurrence of the power interruption (time S55). It is set so as to be shorter than the time T24 to become.
The time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 until the main program starts) is set to be shorter than the time T24.

FIG. 14B is an example when a power interruption occurs before the main program is started by the main control board 50. In the example of FIG. 14B, the power is turned on at time S51, and the power is turned off at time S59. Here, time S59 is before time S54 in FIG. That is, after the power (supply level V0) necessary for starting the main program is supplied, the power is cut off before the predetermined time (time T23) elapses (before reaching time S54), and the voltage decreases. It is an example. In such a case, the main program is not started. Therefore, after that, the voltage gradually decreases, and finally the power supply becomes a low level.
In the example of FIG. 14B, when the power is turned on again, it can be normally started.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 14, it is considered that a power interruption occurs immediately after the subprogram is started (after time S53) and before time S54 (before the main program is started). It is done.
When the power interruption occurs at the above timing, the sub program executes the power interruption process of the sub program. Then, before the voltage supplied to the sub-control board 80 reaches the drive voltage limit V2, it is possible to finish the power-off process of the sub-program.
Further, since the power interruption at the above timing is a power interruption before the main program is activated, the main program is not activated as described above.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, the passage sensor 46 is provided. This is because the passage sensor 46 increases the accuracy of the medal insertion determination and is also effective as a countermeasure against fraud. However, the passage sensor 46 may not be provided, and only the pair of input sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect the medal M moving in a substantially horizontal direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the medal M is dropped substantially vertically downward, the medal M may be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
(3) In FIG. 2, the blocker 45 is disposed on the lower surface side of the medal passage, but is not limited thereto. Any function may be used as long as the medal M is sent out of the medal path before the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a.
Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are illustrated so as to detect slightly above the center position of the medal M when viewed from the front, but the actual product is like this. Does not mean. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any way as long as they are arranged so that the passing medal M can be reliably detected.

  (4) In FIG. 3, the time T2 is the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M4, but is not limited thereto. For example, the time until the medal M is at the position M1 in FIG. 2 and reaches M4 from the moment when the hand is released may be set to T2, and “T2> T1” may be set. Alternatively, the time until the medal M reaches M4 from any predetermined position between M1 and M2 may be set as T2, and “T2> T1” may be set.

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when the power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power interruption process is executed until the medal M reaches M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power interruption process may be executed before the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44a due to the power-off process.
Alternatively, when the power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power interruption process may be executed before the medal M reaches the insertion sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but the power-off process is executed without being detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

(6) Furthermore, in the first embodiment (A), the time T1 from when the power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, until the power failure is detected and the power failure process (blocker off) is executed. Is set shorter than the time until the medal M reaches the position where the blocker 45 is installed from the position of M2 (this time is referred to as “T2 ′”). With this setting, when the power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the blocker 45 is already turned off when the medal M reaches the position of the blocker 45 from the position of M2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal from passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
In the above description, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment when the hand is released at the position M1 or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in FIG. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power-off process (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt process following the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set such that the power-off process (blocker off) is executed after, for example, “2” to “5” interrupt processes, counting from the interrupt process that detected the power-off. Or you may perform a power-off process (blocker off) by the interruption process which detected the power-off.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, when the power interruption occurs, the time T0 until the voltage reaches the sustain level V1 from the supply level V0 is set to 20 interrupts. Without limitation, various settings can be made depending on the performance of the power source.

  (9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, when the medal M is paid out by the medal payout device, the payout sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the medal M itself to be paid out. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged like the insertion sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect the passage of the medal M (to be paid out).

Further, when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged in this way, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Dispensing sensor 37a on, dispensing sensor 37b off (time S31 ')
Dispensing sensor 37a on, dispensing sensor 37b on (time S32 ')
Dispensing sensor 37a off, dispensing sensor 37b on (time S33 ')
Dispensing sensor 37a off, dispensing sensor 37b off (time S34 ')
Follow the course of
Then, the time from time S31 ′ to S34 ′ is set to be shorter than time T1 (time from occurrence of power interruption to execution of power interruption processing).

  (10) In the second embodiment, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c are on the outside, but conversely, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c are on the inside. It is also possible. The same applies to the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58. In this case, if the gate mark 57b has the shape shown in FIG. 10B, the outer surface of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 becomes a smooth surface. On the other hand, if it is made into the shape of FIG.10 (c), the protrusion 57e will be formed in the outer side of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58. FIG.

  (11) In the second embodiment, as an example of the substrate case 56, an example in which the main control substrate 50 is accommodated inside is given. However, the second embodiment can be applied not only to the main control board 50 but also to other control boards that are desired to prevent fraud, for example, the board case of the sub-control board 80. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 also includes the RWM 83, the ROM 54, the sub-CPU 85, etc., but at least the sub-control board 80 in the vertical direction (directly below) on the upper surface of the upper cover in the board case of the sub-control board 80 For example, the CPU 85 is not disposed, and the RWM 83 and the ROM 54 are not disposed. Similarly, it is possible to prevent the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 from overlapping in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark.

(12) In the third embodiment, the push order effect during AT and the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31) and the remaining number of games during AT are given as examples. The third embodiment can be applied even when displaying the number of games (BB games, etc.) acquired and the remaining number of acquirable games.
For example, the number acquired at the start of the “N” game is “200”, the number acquired at the start of the “N + 1” game is “209”, and the number acquired at the start of the “N + 2” game is “ Assume that there were 218 ”. In addition, the main control board 50 transmits a command related to the acquired number to the sub-control board 80 at the start of each game.
As in the example shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that a disconnection occurs in the middle of the “N” game, and communication is restored in the middle of the “N + 1” game.

  In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays “200” as the acquired number in the “N” game. At the start of the “N + 1” game, since the command related to the acquired number is not received (due to disconnection), the “N + 1” game also maintains the display of the acquired number “200”. Next, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command related to the acquired number at the start of the “N + 2” game, it updates the display of the acquired number “218” based on the command.

  (13) FIG. 11 of the third embodiment shows an example in which the image display is returned to normal at the start of the “N + 2” game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display may be returned to normal after all stop of the “N + 1” game or after a betting operation is performed. Alternatively, it is possible to return the image display to normal at a predetermined timing based on a command transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the time of full stop or after full stop.

  (14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of the disconnected “N + 1” game, there may be a case where an acquirable number of games in AT or an additional (addition) lottery is won. In this case, since the “N + 1” game is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive a command based on winning the extra lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the “N + 2” game, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the result after the addition (addition) lottery, and at the start of the “N + 2” game, the sub control board 80 Display the game information (the number of obtainable games and the number of games) after the game is added.

  (15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, a disconnection occurs after the first right stop of the “N” game, and communication returns before the first stop switch 42 of the “N + 1” game is operated. Can be considered. In the “N + 1” game, it is assumed that the player has made the right first stop. In this case, when the sub control board 80 receives the first stop command for the right first game in the “N + 1” game, it means that it has received the stop command for the stop switch 42 that has already been operated. Output. Then, at the time of a betting operation after all stops of the “N + 1” game, or at the start of the “N + 2” game, the image display is returned to a normal one.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), when the acquired number of images is displayed during AT, the following method can be given as an example of the update processing of the acquired number of images before and after disconnection.
When the payout process is performed, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the acquired number of sheets to the sub control board 80. Here, when a disconnection occurs in the middle of the “N” game, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the acquired number of “N” games. Immediately before the disconnection of the “N” game, it is assumed that the sub-control board 80 displays “100” as the acquired number during AT. In addition, it is assumed that each of the “N” game and “N + 1” game in the AT acquires 10 cards.
In this case, the number acquired in the AT at the end of the “N” game should be “110” originally, but remains “100” (because it is disconnected). Then, it is assumed that communication has returned in the middle of the “N + 1” game. As a result, the sub control board 80 can return the acquired number in the AT to a normal value based on the acquired number command received during the payout process of the “N + 1” game. Here, the normal value may be returned at the time of the payout process of the “N + 1” game, or may be returned to the normal value at the start of the “N + 2” game as in the example of FIG. Further, it may be updated to “110” at the time of payout processing of the “N + 1” game, and may be updated to “120” at the start of the “N + 2” game.

  (17) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines, for example. In pachinko machines, the starting opening (the winning opening that triggers the changing of symbols by the symbol changing display device and acquiring random numbers for the big win lottery), the electric chew winning opening (when the game ball wins, the next winning is To make it easier, a prize opening with an accessory that opens for a certain period of time and closes.The electric chews are not limited to the tulip shape.) Provided. And it is possible to apply 1st Embodiment (B) in these winning a prize mouths.

Specifically, for example, a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball won in the starting port) and a discharge sensor (a sensor that detects a gaming ball after being detected by the winning sensor) are provided at the starting port. Is provided. Also, the attacker is provided with a V winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball won by the attacker) and a discharge sensor (a sensor that detects a gaming ball after being detected by the V winning sensor). .
For example, in the case of the start port, when a power interruption occurs at the moment when the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the game ball is set to be detected by the discharge sensor before the power interruption process is executed. Thereby, even if a power failure occurs at the moment when the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, it is possible to correctly count the winning ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a prize ball from being paid out even though a game ball has won a prize opening. The same applies to the attacker's V winning sensor and the discharge sensor.

  (18) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of one of the gaming machines. However, the slot machine 10 is a “rotor-type gaming machine” installed in a fourth sales office that is subject to the wind management law. The present invention is not limited to (so-called “pachislot gaming machines”), and can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that do not use medals for gaming as gaming media.

Here, the enclosed game machine (medalless game machine) can eliminate, for example, the medal payout device (unit including the hopper 35, the hopper motor 36, and the payout sensor 37) in FIG. Also, the medal slot 47 and the medal selector can be eliminated. And all the electronic medals (electronic game media) awarded by winning a combination are stored in the credit number display LED 76. In this case, it is conceivable that the credit number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (a maximum of “99,999” electronic medals can be stored).
Even in such a casino machine or an enclosed game machine (medalless game machine), the present invention can be applied to all of the above-described embodiments and the following embodiments except for the first embodiment.

<Sixth Embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to the control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50.
Here, FIGS. 15 to 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship among the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the medal, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
FIG. 15A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 before the last discharged medal comes into contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 15B shows the last discharged medal. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state before contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and in a state where the rotation of the hopper disk 101 has advanced from FIG.

FIG. 16A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the last discharged medal is in contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 16B shows the last discharged medal. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state where the movable shaft 38b is pushed and moved.
Further, FIG. 17A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state at the moment when the last discharge medal is discharged from the discharge unit, and FIG. 17B shows the hopper after discharging the last discharge medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the rotation of the disk is stopped.

  In the sixth embodiment, the medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 that stores medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 that rotates the hopper disk 101. The medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 as in the first embodiment. The main control board 50 controls the driving of the hopper motor 36.

As shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the hopper disc 101 is formed in a disc shape, and the hopper disc 101 has a holding portion which is an opening capable of holding medals stored in the hopper. Eight are provided along the outer periphery of the hopper disk 101.
Furthermore, each holding part 102 is formed in a circular hole shape penetrating from the upper surface to the lower surface of the hopper disk 101. The medals stored in the hopper 35 are formed so as to enter the holding units 102 through the upper openings of the holding units 102 and be held by the holding units 102, respectively.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, during the medal payout process, when the hopper motor 36 is driven, the hopper disk 101 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disc 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held in each holding portion 102 move in a clockwise arc together with the hopper disc 101 and are sequentially discharged from the discharge portion 103.
When a medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103, the holding unit 102 that holds the medal becomes empty. Then, another medal stored in the hopper 35 newly enters the empty holding unit 102.

As described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 includes the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. And in 6th Embodiment, between the fixed axis | shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is made into the discharge part 103 from which a medal | token is discharged | emitted.
As shown in FIG. 16B, when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, and when the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes larger than the diameter of the medal, the medal is fixed to the fixed shaft 38a. And the movable shaft 38b. At this time, medals are discharged from the discharge unit 103.
Further, the medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103 at the moment when the medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6). It is a moment. When the movable shaft 38 b returns to the original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medal has been discharged from the discharge unit 103.

In addition, in the one payout process, a medal discharged last from the discharge unit 103 is referred to as a “last discharge medal”, and in the next payout process, a medal discharged first from the discharge unit 103 is referred to as “first This is referred to as “discharge medal”.
15 to 17, medals are indicated by two-dot chain lines. The medal with the letter “A” is the last discharged medal in one payout process, and the medal with the letter “B” is the first discharged medal in the next payout process.

In addition, the position of the holding unit 102 where the last discharge medal is held at the moment when the last discharge medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103 in one payout process is referred to as a “first position”. The position of the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharge medal in the next payout process at the moment when the last discharge medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103 in the process is referred to as a “second position”.
FIG. 17A shows the state at the moment when the last discharged medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103 (the hopper disc 101, each holding unit 102, each medal with the letters “A” to “D”, and the fixed shaft 38a. , And the positional relationship of the movable shaft 38b). In FIG. 17A, the position of the holding unit 102 where the medal with the letter “A” is held is the first position, and the medal with the letter “B” is held. The position of the holding unit 102 is the second position.

In the sixth embodiment, when the main control board 50 ends one payout process, the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medal in the next payout process has the first position and the second position. The hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in a state where the hopper disk 101 is stopped.
FIG. 17B shows a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped after the last discharge medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103. In FIG. 17B, the first position and the second position are indicated by broken lines, respectively. In FIG. 17B, the medal with the letter “B” is the first discharged medal in the next payout process. Then, as shown in FIG. 17B, the hopper disc 101 is in a state where the holding unit 102 holding the medal with the letter “B” is located between the first position and the second position. Has stopped rotating.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as the hopper motor 36.
For this reason, at the end of the payout process, the drive of the hopper motor 36 is suddenly stopped by flowing a current in the direction opposite to that when the medals are discharged from the main control board 50 to the hopper motor 36, and the hopper disc 101 Can be stopped suddenly.

Further, as described above, when the medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, this is detected by the payout sensor 37.
For this reason, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last discharged medal has been discharged from the discharge unit 103, a current in the direction opposite to that when the medal is discharged is supplied to the hopper motor 36 to rotate the hopper disk 101. When suddenly stopped, the holding unit 102 holding the first discharged medal in the next payout process can be stopped at the second position.

In addition, by passing a current in the reverse direction to the time of discharging the medal to the hopper motor 36, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the reverse direction, and the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise). .
Therefore, at the end of the payout process, even if the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medal in the next payout process passes the second position, a current in the direction opposite to that when discharging the medal is By flowing through the motor 36, the hopper disk 101 can be reversely rotated to return to the second position.
Then, by returning the holding unit 102 holding the first discharged medal to the second position, the first discharged medal can start moving from the same second position every time. Thus, the same operation can be performed for each payout process, so that the first discharge medal can be discharged stably.

Here, when a constant current flows, the DC motor as the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates from a state where the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, and the discharge state of medals from the discharge unit 103 in the sixth embodiment.
In FIG. 18, the upper line indicates the driving signal of the hopper motor 36, the middle line indicates the driving state of the hopper motor 36, and the lower line indicates the discharge state of medals from the discharge unit 103.

The drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal output from a predetermined output port provided in the main control board 50. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, a constant current is supplied to the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is switched from on to off, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes “0”.
Furthermore, in FIG. 18, “stop” in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates a state where the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped, and “constant speed” in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft is constant speed. The state reached (constant speed).

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from “stop” and then reaches “constant speed”.
Further, the portion where the line indicating the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is inclined upward to the right indicates that the rotation of the driving shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerated.

Thus, the hopper motor 36 using a DC motor gradually accelerates the rotation of the drive shaft when the drive signal is turned on from off.
For this reason, when the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medal is stopped at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerated until the holding unit 102 reaches the first position. Therefore, it takes a longer time than the medal discharge interval at constant speed.
That is, when the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharge medal is stopped at the second position, the time required from the start of driving of the hopper motor 36 to the discharge of the first discharge medal from the discharge unit 103 is the hopper motor. This is longer than the medal discharge interval when the drive shaft 36 rotates at a constant speed.
As a result, there is a possibility of giving the player a feeling that the discharge of the first (first) medal is delayed.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the main control board 50 is configured such that when one payout process ends, the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medal in the next payout process is between the first position and the second position. In the positioned state, the driving of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped.
If the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharge medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, the distance to reach the first position is shorter than when the holding unit 102 stops at the second position. . As a result, the time to reach the first position is also shorter than when it stops at the second position. Therefore, even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerated, the first (first) medal It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the game has been delayed.

When the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, as shown in FIG. 17B, two adjacent holding units 102 in the hopper disc 101 are used. A portion corresponding to between the two is positioned in front of the discharge unit 103.
As a result, an unauthorized device such as a wire is inserted from a medal payout opening provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12 and an unauthorized operation (gotten operation) is attempted to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disk 101 with the unauthorized device. Even if it is broken, a portion corresponding to the space between two adjacent holding portions 102 in the hopper disk 101 becomes a barrier, and access to the holding portion 102 by an unauthorized device can be prevented.

When the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is “constant speed”, the hopper disk 101 rotates at a constant speed in the clockwise direction. At this time, medals held in each holding unit 102 are sequentially discharged from the discharge unit 103 at equal intervals.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the driving signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned from on to off, the driving state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from “constant speed”, and thereafter reaches “stop”.
In FIG. 18, the portion where the line indicating the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is slantingly downward indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerated.

Thus, the hopper motor 36 using a DC motor gradually decelerates the rotation of the drive shaft when the drive signal is turned from on to off.
Then, the last discharged medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharge unit 103), and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, whereby the last discharged medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103. Is detected by the dispensing sensor 37, the main control board 50 turns the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from on to off.
Thereby, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerated, and the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medal in the next payout process is located between the first position and the second position. Thus, the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the main control board 50 turns the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from OFF to ON, thereafter, the main control board 50 transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80. This payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started payout processing.
On the other hand, when receiving the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 starts processing related to the output of the payout sound. Thereafter, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is started.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the main control board 50 turns the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from on to off, the main control board 50 thereafter transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80. This payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has finished the payout process.
On the other hand, when receiving the payout end command, the sub-control board 80 ends the processing relating to the output of the payout sound. Thereby, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 ends.

Here, the “payout sound” means a sound output from the sub-control board 80 side in accordance with the payout of medals. As the payout sound, for example, a sound such as “Purururu” can be output from the speaker 22.
“Processing related to output of payout sound” means a series of processes such as a process for selecting a sound to be output, a process for selecting a channel for outputting the selected sound, and a process for outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. That means. By executing this series of processing, a payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22.

  When the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the main control board 50 transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the payout start command, the main control board 50 performs processing related to output of the payout sound. By starting the operation, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be started before the first discharge medal is discharged from the discharge unit 103.

When the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the main control board 50 transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the payout end command, the main control board 50 processes the output of the payout sound. When the discharge of medals from the discharge unit 103 is stopped, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be ended.
Thereby, it is possible to give the player the impression that the payout of medals and the payout sound are synchronized.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship among the operation of the main control board 50, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, the detection states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and the discharge timing of medals from the discharge unit 103.
When a payout winning combination wins, the main control board 50 sets the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and turns on the drive signal of the hopper motor 36.
For example, when 10 winning combinations are won and 10 medals are paid out, “10” is set as the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
That is, when “N” (N ≧ 1) medals are paid out, “N” is set as the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 “starts” (starts driving) from the “stopped” state, goes through “acceleration”, and reaches “constant speed”.
At the end of one payout process, the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medal in the next payout process is stopped between the first position and the second position. At the start of this, the hopper motor 36 reaches “constant speed” until the holding portion 102 that holds the first discharged medal reaches the first position.
That is, the stop position of the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medal is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches “constant speed” until the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medal reaches the first position. is doing.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 reaches “constant speed” from “stop” through “acceleration”, the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharge medal reaches the first position, thereby performing the first discharge. The medals are surely discharged from the discharge unit 103.
Furthermore, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both off.
Note that the timing (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

In the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active unlike the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37a is set so that the state where the movable piece 39a is detected is turned off and the state where the movable piece 39a is not detected is turned on.
On the other hand, the payout sensor 37b is set to high active as in the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37b is set so that the state where the movable piece 39a is not detected is turned off and the state where the movable piece 39a is detected is turned on.
For this reason, in the sixth embodiment, at the timing (a) in FIG.
In the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the payout sensor 37b is set to high active. Therefore, the payout sensor 37a signal is different from that in FIG. 8 in the first embodiment (C). The waveform is reversed on and off.

Further, at the timing (b) in FIG. 19, when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, the payout sensor 37a is turned on, and the payout sensor 37b is turned off.
The state (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Furthermore, at the timing of (c) in FIG. 19, the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, the payout sensor 37a is turned on, and the payout sensor 37b is also turned on. Become. At this time, medals are discharged from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharge portion 103).
The state (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, at the timing (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is energized by the spring 39b and is returning to its original position, the payout sensor 37a is on, and the payout sensor 37b is off. It becomes.
The state (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Further, at the timing (e) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is urged by the spring 39b to return to the original position, and both the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been ejected, and updates the payout number data.
The state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When paying out “N” medals, (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the “N” medals have been discharged.
When it is determined that the “N” th medal has been ejected, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36.
Further, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 goes through “deceleration” and reaches “stop”.
Thereby, the payout process of “N” medals is completed.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, first, the payout number data is set in step S101. This process is a process of storing the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50. For example, when “N” (N ≧ 1) medals are paid out, “N” is stored as the payout number data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S102.

In step S102, the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 is started. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the state where the movable piece 39a is not detected (the state where the movable shaft 38b is pushed and moved by the medal) is on. It is set to be.

If “Yes” in the step S103, the process proceeds to the next step S104, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. If “Yes” in step S104, the process proceeds to the next step S105. On the other hand, if “No” in step S104, an error occurs.
Here, if the payout sensor 37b is already on when the payout sensor 37a is turned on from off, “No” is set in step S104. In this case, it is conceivable that the discharge unit 103 is jammed (medal jam error). If a medal jam error occurs, the error continues until the jammed medal is removed (error factor is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, when the jammed medals are removed and the reset switch is operated, the error is canceled.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, an error occurs if “No” continues for a predetermined time in Step S103 (the predetermined time elapses with “No”). In this case, it is conceivable that the medal in the hopper 35 is empty (a hopper empty error). If a hopper empty error occurs, the error continues until the medal is replenished in the hopper 35 (the error factor is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, when medals are replenished in the hopper 35 and the reset switch is operated, the error is released.
In step S105, the main control board 50 determines again whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. If “Yes” in step S105, the process proceeds to the next step S106. On the other hand, when “No” in step S105, an error occurs as in the case of “No” in step S104.

  In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is on. If “Yes” in step S106, the process proceeds to the next step S107, and the main control board 50 determines again whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. If “Yes” in step S107, the process proceeds to the next step S108. On the other hand, when “No” in step S107, an error occurs as in the case of “No” in step S104 or S105.

In step S108, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. If “Yes” in step S108, the process proceeds to the next step S109, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is off. If “Yes” in step S109, the process advances to step S110, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off.
If “Yes” in the step S110, the process proceeds to the next step S111. On the other hand, when “No” in step S110, an error occurs as in the case of “No” in step S104, S105, or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout number data. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the payout number data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and storing the subtracted data as new payout number data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout number data is “0”. Here, when “Yes” is determined in the step S112, the process proceeds to the next step S113, and the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 is stopped. And the payout process by this flowchart is complete | finished. On the other hand, if “No” in step S112, the process returns to step S103. As a result, the next medal is paid out. Then, the process from step S112 to S103 is repeated until the payout number data becomes “0”.

Here, the medals discharged from the discharge unit 103 are usually guided to the medal tray through a passage called a medal chute.
However, in rare cases, a medal discharged from the discharge unit 103 may bounce off the inner wall of the medal chute and return to the discharge unit 103. At this time, the bounced medal hits the medal that is about to be ejected from the ejection unit 103 next, and the medal that is about to be ejected may be pushed back.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as in steps S103 to S110 in the flowchart of the payout process in FIG. 20, the on / off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is repeatedly determined in the order of “payout sensor 37a” → “payout sensor 37b”. To do.
Thereby, it is possible to detect an error such that a medal that is about to be ejected from the ejection unit 103 is pushed back.

For example, when one medal is about to be ejected and the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, the payout sensor 37a is turned on, and the payout sensor 37b is turned off. (Timing (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, it is assumed that the medal paid out before this medal bounces back and hits this medal, the medal is pushed back, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, “No” is determined in step S105 of FIG. 20, resulting in an error.
Further, for example, it is assumed that the medal is pushed back at the timing (c) in FIG. 19 and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, “No” is determined in step S107 of FIG. 20, resulting in an error.

<Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
The sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, eight holding portions 102 are provided on the hopper disc 101. However, the number of holding portions is not limited to eight. For example, the size of the hopper disc 101 is five, six, ten, or the like. It can be set appropriately according to the situation.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disc shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the hopper disk 101 may be formed in a sprocket shape. That is, the holding unit 102 is not limited to a circular hole shape as long as it can hold a medal.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotation direction of the hopper disk 101 during the medal payout process is clockwise. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the medals held in the above may be sequentially discharged from the discharge unit 103.
(4) In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as the hopper motor 36. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a stepping motor may be used as the hopper motor 36.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, but may be the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. Even in such a payout process flow, the discharge of medals can be detected. However, in such a payout process flow, it is not possible to detect an error in which a medal that is about to be ejected next is pushed back by a medal bounced off the inner wall of the medal chute.
In FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents.
(6) The various modifications shown in the first to sixth embodiments and the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Seventh embodiment>
This relates to the arrangement of the main control board 50 attached inside the cabinet 13 and the sub control board 80 attached to the back surface of the front door 12.
FIG. 22 is a sectional side view of the slot machine 10 in a state where the front door 12 is closed, and is a view for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 whose front side is open, and a front door 12 that is attached so that the opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.
Moreover, the cabinet 13 is comprised by the box shape which the front side opens by assembling the bottom plate 13a, the back plate 13b, the right side plate, the left side plate, and the top plate.
Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is disposed below the inside of the cabinet 13 (on the bottom plate 13a). The medal payout device 15 is for paying out medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. I have.

Further, a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by the back plate 13b, the right side plate, and the left side plate is provided above the medal payout device 15 inside the cabinet 13, and on the reel base 110, a symbol is provided. A display device 14 is arranged.
The symbol display device 14 includes a square frame-shaped reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged in parallel inside the reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, a motor 32 is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by a reel frame 14a.
Further, a transparent reel substrate case 121 is disposed on the reel frame 14 a, and the reel control substrate 120 is accommodated in the reel substrate case 121. The reel control board 120 controls driving of the three motors 32.

In addition, a transparent main board case 56 is disposed above the symbol display device 14 inside the cabinet 13. More specifically, the main board case 56 is fixed to a position corresponding to the upper side of the symbol display device 14 on the front surface side (inner surface side of the housing) of the back plate 13 b of the cabinet 13. The main control board 50 is accommodated in the main board case 56.
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, the main control board 50 is connected to the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the symbol display device 14, the medal payout device 15, the reel control board 120, and the sub control board via the input port 51 or the output port 52. 80 etc. are electrically connected.

  The front door 12 is attached so as to be able to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13 so as to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13. More specifically, the left side portion of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. The front door 12 rotates around the hinge, so that the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.

A transparent display window is provided at the center of the front door 12. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. Then, the player can visually recognize each of the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window.
Further, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, and the like are arranged. .

Furthermore, a medal payout port which is an opening through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 15 pass and a medal paid out from the medal payout port are received at the lower part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12. A medal tray is arranged.
Further, an effect lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, and the like are disposed on the front side (player side) of the front door 12.

A transparent sub-board case 87 is disposed on the upper surface of the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the sub-board case 87 is fixed at a position corresponding to the back side of the front door 12 (the inner surface side of the housing) and above the symbol display device 14 and the back side of the image display device 23. ing. A sub control board 80 is accommodated in the sub board case 87.
The sub-control board 80 controls effects, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, and the like. In addition, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, and the like are electrically connected to the sub control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. Then, the sub control board 80 determines what kind of effect is output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50, and the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, The output of the image display device 23 is controlled.

As described above, the main board case 56 is disposed above the symbol display device 14 inside the cabinet 13, and the main control board 50 is accommodated in the main board case 56.
A sub board case 87 is disposed on the back surface of the front door 12 above the symbol display device 14, and a sub control board 80 is accommodated in the sub board case 87.
As shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are disposed so as to face each other.
Further, the distance between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 when the front door 12 is closed is set wider than the width of the reel control board 120 in the depth direction.

  Here, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for electrical storage is disposed on the sub control board 80. The electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolytic solution. When the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is ruptured due to a failure, the filled electrolyte may be scattered. At this time, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is disposed at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, the electrolytic solution scattered when the electrolytic capacitor 86 is ruptured due to a malfunction. The main CPU 55 may adhere to the main CPU 55 and cause a malfunction. Further, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 is damaged due to an impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 is ruptured.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is disposed at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the sub control board 80.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 is ruptured due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and thus the main CPU 55 is prevented from malfunctioning. be able to. Further, the main CPU 55 can be prevented from being damaged by an impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 is ruptured.
If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is disposed at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, the main CPU 55 may malfunction due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. By disposing the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. Can do.

FIG. 23A shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating Example 1;
In FIG. 23A, a circle indicated by a broken line is a projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 on the main control board 50.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23A, the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, which is arranged above the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical direction, and main in the horizontal direction. It is arranged on the left side of the main CPU 55 on the control board 50.
In this way, by disposing the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 at a position different from the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, The position of the electrolytic capacitor 86 can be set to a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

<Modification of the seventh embodiment>
The seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one, and may be two, for example, as shown in FIG.
FIG. 23B shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing Example 2.

Also in FIG. 23B, as in FIG. 23A, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 projected onto the main control board 50 is indicated by a broken line.
In FIG. 23B, the upper left electrolytic capacitor 86 and the lower right electrolytic capacitor 86 are both arranged at different positions in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
Accordingly, also in Example 2 of FIG. 23B, the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 are arranged at positions other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(2) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 may be four as shown in FIG. 24C, for example.
FIG. 24C shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing Example 3.
The fact that the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is projected onto the main control board 50 and indicated by a broken circle is the same as in FIGS. 23A and 23B.

In FIG. 24C, the sub-control board 80 includes four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are at different positions in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. Has been placed. Further, the remaining one electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 although the horizontal direction is different.
Even in such an arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 are located at positions other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be disposed at a position away from the main control board 50, for example.
FIG. 24D shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing Example 4.
The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is projected and indicated by a broken-line circle, as in FIGS. 23A, 23B, and 24C.

In FIG. 24D, as in FIG. 23A, the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 is one, but unlike FIG. 23A, the electrolytic capacitors on the sub control board 80. 86 is disposed at a position away from the main control board 50.
Thus, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position away from the main control board 50, it is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. Will be.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 23A, 23 </ b> B, 24 </ b> C, and 24 </ b> D, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is located at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. Therefore, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 is ruptured due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55. As a result, the main CPU 55 malfunctions. You can prevent it from happening.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, a management information display LED 74 (also referred to as “role monitor”) is arranged on the main control board 50. The management information display LED 74 displays management information such as an advantageous section ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, and an accessory ratio.
The “favorable section ratio” means the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game section (normal section + standby section + advantageous section), and the “continuous character ratio” is the first to the total number of medals won. The ratio of the number of medals acquired when the seed special character (RB) is activated, and the “character ratio” means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the character is activated to the total number of medals.

The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be disposed at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and at a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74. Good.
Thereby, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 is ruptured due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74, and as a result, the management displayed on the management information display LED 74. Information can be prevented from becoming unverifiable.
Further, the management information display LED 74 can be prevented from being damaged by an impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 is ruptured.
(5) The various modifications shown in the first to seventh embodiments and the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Eighth Embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to a gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the lower part of the housing of the slot machine 10.
FIG. 25 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front portion of the housing (portion A in FIG. 22) of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 will be described. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 25, a first closing portion 13 c that protrudes toward the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed is provided at the lower portion of the cabinet 13.
In other words, the first closing portion 13c is a plate-like protruding portion that protrudes forward from the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and when the front door 12 is closed, the protruding direction of the first closing portion 13c. Is in the direction of the front door 12.
Moreover, the 1st obstruction | occlusion part 13c is formed horizontally long from the right end of the front end part of the baseplate 13a of the cabinet 13 to the left end.
Furthermore, the 1st obstruction | occlusion part 13c is formed with the sheet metal, and is being fixed to the front-end part of the baseplate 13a of the cabinet 13 with the bis | screw.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 25, at the lower position of the front door 12 below the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a protruding toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. Is provided.
That is, the second closing portion 12a is a plate-like protruding portion that protrudes rearward from the lower back of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the protruding direction of the second closing portion 12a is This is the direction of the cabinet 13.

Moreover, the 2nd obstruction | occlusion part 12a is arrange | positioned in the position below the 1st obstruction | occlusion part 13c.
Furthermore, the 2nd obstruction | occlusion part 12a is formed horizontally long from the right end of the back surface lower part of the front door 12 to the left end.
Further, the second closing portion 12a is also formed of a sheet metal, similarly to the first closing portion 13c, and is fixed to the lower portion of the back surface of the front door 12 with a screw.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 25, at the lower position of the front door 12 above the first closing portion 13c, the third closing portion 12b protruding toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. Is provided.
That is, the third closing portion 12b is a plate-like protruding portion that protrudes rearward from the lower back surface of the front door 12 in the same manner as the second closing portion 12a. When the front door 12 is closed, 3. The protruding direction of the closed portion 12b is the cabinet 13 direction.

Moreover, the 3rd obstruction | occlusion part 12b is formed horizontally long from the right end of the back surface lower part of the front door 12 to the left end similarly to the 2nd obstruction | occlusion part 12a.
Furthermore, unlike the 2nd obstruction | occlusion part 12a, the 3rd obstruction | occlusion part 12b is arrange | positioned in the position above the 1st obstruction | occlusion part 13c.
Further, the third closing portion 12b is also formed of a sheet metal, similarly to the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, and is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 by screws.

And in the state which closed the front door 12, it forms so that the 1st obstruction | occlusion part 13c may be arrange | positioned between the 2nd obstruction | occlusion part 12a and the 3rd obstruction | occlusion part 12b.
Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the lower part of the casing is bent as if the left and right sides of the “U” are reversed as shown in FIG. It becomes the shape. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an illegal act (going action) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing a wire through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 into the housing.

A door sensor that detects the opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. The door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light emitting / receiving unit, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Furthermore, a detection piece that can be moved in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. The detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed, and jumps forward by being biased by a spring when the front door 12 is opened.

Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, a door sensor will be in the state which is detecting the detection piece, and will be in an OFF state. That is, the door sensor is set to low active.
On the other hand, in a state where the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece jumps forward by being biased by the spring and goes out of the door sensor. At this time, a door sensor will be in the state which has not detected the detection piece, and will be in an ON state.

The main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is in a closed state when the door sensor is off, and determines that the front door 12 is in an open state when the door sensor is on.
As described above, the opening / closing of the front door 12 detects the opening / closing of the front door 12 when the detection piece moves in the front-rear direction and the door sensor is turned on / off.

When the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the detection piece moves forward from the pushed-in state, exits from the state in which it enters the door sensor, and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 is referred to as a “detection start position”.
Moreover, when the door sensor detects the opening of the front door 12 for the first time, it means the moment when the door sensor is turned on from the off state.

In the eighth embodiment, not only in the state where the front door 12 is closed, but also in the state where the front door 12 is in the detection start position, the first closing portion is interposed between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. 13c is arranged.
That is, the first closing part 13c is arranged between the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b even when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state and the door sensor is turned on from the off state. It is formed as follows.

For this reason, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the door sensor is first turned from the OFF state to the ON state, and then the first closing portion 13c is removed from between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. It will be.
When the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is in an open state, transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80, and the sub control board 80 receives the door opening command. , The speaker 22 and the image display device 23 notify that the front door 12 is open. Thereby, it is possible to notify the hall clerk that the front door 12 is open.

  Therefore, before the notification that the front door 12 is open is started, the first closing portion 13c does not come out between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b, and the front door 12 is opened. Since the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 has a bent shape even at the position where the notification that it is informed is started, a wire is inserted into the housing from the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent an illegal act (going action) to access the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing it through.

  In the sixth embodiment, the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, so that the gap between two adjacent holding units 102 in the hopper disk 101 is reduced. The corresponding portion can be positioned in front of the discharge unit 103, thereby preventing an illegal act of inserting a wire or the like from the medal payout port and accessing the holding unit 102 of the hopper disc 101. As described above, by providing both the configurations of the sixth and eighth embodiments, it is possible to more firmly prevent an illegal act of inserting a wire or the like and accessing the medal payout device 15.

Here, the distance between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a is “h1”, the distance between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b is “h2”, and the second closing portion 12a and the second closing portion 12a 3 The distance from the closed portion 12b is “h3”, and the protruding width (depth) of the second closed portion 12a is “w”.
The medal diameter is “d”, and the medal thickness is “t”.
The size of a general medal is 24.5 to 25.5 mm in diameter and 1.5 to 2.0 mm in thickness.
In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance “h2” between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness “t” of the medal is set to satisfy “h2> t”. ing.

Here, when the hall clerk opens the front door 12 and replenishes the hopper 35 with medals, the clerk may drop the medals on the bottom plate 13 a of the cabinet 13.
In particular, in order to replenish medals to the hopper 35 from the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13, there are cases where the medals are dropped near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, that is, near the first closing portion 13c.

  At this time, if it is set so that “h2> t” is satisfied, even if the front door 12 is closed while the medal has fallen in the vicinity of the first closing portion 13c, the medal that has dropped in the vicinity of the first closing portion 13c In between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Further, there is no case where a medal is sandwiched between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b and the front door 12 cannot be closed.

In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second blocking portion 12a and the diameter of the medal is set to satisfy “w <(d / 2)”. Has been.
By setting so as to satisfy “w <(d / 2)”, it is possible to prevent the medal from being placed on the second closing portion 12a.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed while a medal is placed on the second closing portion 12a. As a result, the medal placed on the second closing portion 12a causes the front door to close. It can prevent that 12 and the cabinet 13 break.

<Modification of Eighth Embodiment>
The eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light emitting / receiving unit, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured using, for example, a proximity sensor.
Even when the door sensor is configured using the proximity sensor, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not only in the state where the front door 12 is closed, but also in the state where the front door 12 is in the detection start position. The first closing part 13c is arranged between the two.

(2) In the eighth embodiment, a detection piece that can be moved in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. When the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece is biased by a spring and jumps forward. And it came out from the inside of the door sensor. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor that detects opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, and a detection piece may be provided at a position corresponding to the door sensor in the front door 12. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 exits from the door sensor. It may be.

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side. However, the door sensor is not limited to this. For example, the door sensor may be provided on the front door 12 side.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is turned off when the detection piece is detected, and is turned on when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor was set to low active. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the door sensor may be turned on in a state where the detection piece is detected, and may be turned off in a state where the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor may be set to high active.
In this case, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is on, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is off. Configure as follows.

(5) In 8th Embodiment, the 1st obstruction | occlusion part 13c was formed horizontally long from the right end of the front end part of the baseplate 13a of the cabinet 13 to the left end. Further, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the lower surface of the front door 12. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the first closing portion 13c may be composed of two members, a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a and a second member extending from the center of the bottom plate 13a to the left end, or divided into three parts. You may comprise from the three members.
Similarly to the first closing part 13c, the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b may be constituted by two members or may be constituted by three members.
Thus, the 1st closure part 13c, the 2nd closure part 12a, and the 3rd closure part 12b are not restricted to being comprised from one member, and may comprise from a plurality of members.

Further, the first closing portion 13c does not reach from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. For example, the first closing portion 13c is provided near the right end or near the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. You may have a part which is not.
Similarly, the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 may have a part where the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b are not provided.
Thus, even if it has a part in which the 1st closure part 13c, the 2nd closure part 12a, and the 3rd closure part 12b are not provided, it is inside the case from the gap of cabinet 13 and front door 12. An illegal act of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing a wire or the like can be prevented.
The first closing portion 13c may be a part of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 or may be a separate member from the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Similarly, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be part of the front door 12 or may be separate members from the front door 12.

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is disposed between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, or the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b, or the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b may be in contact with each other.
Further, the entire first blocking portion 13c may be disposed between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b, or a part of the first blocking portion 13c may be disposed. Also good.

Still further, with the front door 12 closed, the first closing portion 13c may come into contact with a position corresponding to the space between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b on the back surface of the front door 12. .
Furthermore, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side, and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, the 1st closed part 13c which protrudes toward the cabinet 13 direction from the back surface lower part of the front door 12 is provided, and it is toward the front door 12 direction from the position below the 1st closed part 13c in the front-end part of the baseplate 13a of the cabinet 13. A protruding second closing portion 12a may be provided, and a third closing portion 12b protruding toward the front door 12 from a position above the first closing portion 13c at the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 may be provided.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance “h2” between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b and the thickness “t” of the medal is set to satisfy “h2> t”. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy, for example, “h2 <t”.
If the setting is made so that “h2> t” is satisfied, when the front door 12 is closed in the state where the medal has fallen near the first closing portion 13c, the medal dropped near the first closing portion 13c It hits the rear end of 12b and is pushed into the cabinet 13. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Further, there is no case where a medal is sandwiched between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b and the front door 12 cannot be closed.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second blocking portion 12a and the diameter of the medal is set to satisfy “w <(d / 2)” with respect to “d”. did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy, for example, “(d / 2) <w <d”.
By satisfying “(d / 2) <w”, a medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying “w <d”, even if the front door 12 is closed with the medal placed on the second closing portion 12a, the front door 12 is closed on the second closing portion 12a before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medal hits the front end of the cabinet 13, the front door 12 does not close.
As a result, it is possible for the hall clerk to know that a medal is placed on the second closing portion 12a, and as a result, the medal placed on the second closing portion 12a is made available to the hall clerk. It can be removed and the front door 12 can be closed.

(9) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter of the medal “d”, and the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal The relationship with the thickness “t” may be set to satisfy “(d / 2) <w” and “h1 <t”.
As described above, when “(d / 2) <w” is satisfied, a medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying “h1 <t”, even if the front door 12 is closed with the medal placed on the second closing portion 12a, the front door 12 is closed on the second closing portion 12a before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medal hits the front end portion of the first closing portion 13c, the front door 12 does not close.
As a result, it is possible for the hall clerk to know that a medal is placed on the second closing portion 12a, and as a result, the medal placed on the second closing portion 12a is made available to the hall clerk. It can be removed and the front door 12 can be closed.

(10) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter “d”, and the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal The relationship with the thickness “t” may be set to satisfy “d <w” and “h1> t”.
By satisfying “d <w”, the entire medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. That is, the medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a without a part of the medal protruding from the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying “h1> t”, a medal can be inserted between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a.

For this reason, when the front door 12 is closed in a state where a medal is placed on the second closing portion 12a, the front door 12 is closed in a state where the medal is accommodated between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a. It will be. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Further, there is no case where the medal placed on the second closing portion 12a hits the first closing portion 13c or the front end portion of the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 cannot be closed.
(11) The various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments and the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in appropriate combination.

<Ninth Embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to stop control of the reel 31 on the main control board 50 side and control of production output on the sub control board 80 side.
FIG. 26A is a diagram showing the types of special combinations (combined items) and end conditions, and FIG. 26B is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the prescribed number of each gaming state. (C) is a figure which shows the number table of the internal lottery in the setting 1, and an advantageous area lottery.

As shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the ninth embodiment, BB (first-type accessory continuous actuating device; first-type big bonus), RB (first-type special-purpose item) are used as special-purpose items. ; Regular bonus), and MB (second-type accessory continuous operating device; second-type big bonus).
Here, BB is a device capable of operating RB continuously. That is, during the BB game, the RB game is continuously executed. In addition, during the RB game, the winning probability of the small role increases. Furthermore, when the payout number of medals in the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends.

  The MB is a device that can continuously operate a CB (second-type special agent). That is, during the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the winning lottery means 61, all the small roles are duplicated and the stop switch 42 is operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the moment when the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is one frame). Further, the CB game ends with one game, and the MB game ends when the payout number of medals during the MB game exceeds 14.

As shown in FIG. 26 (b), in the ninth embodiment, there are seven gaming states: non-RT, RT, inside RB, inside BB, RB game, BB game, and MB game. Yes. The main control board 50 controls the transition of these gaming states.
Here, the “specified number” means the number of inserted medals for which the start switch 41 can be operated (game can be started). In the ninth embodiment, the prescribed number in the MB is set to “1”, and the prescribed number in the gaming state other than in the MB is set to “3”.

In addition, “RT” means that the type (number) of condition devices (objects, replays, small roles) to be a lottery object and the winning probability are in a special lottery state.
Furthermore, “non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but means that the type of condition device to be selected and its winning probability are different from RT.
In any game state, if the RT start condition is satisfied, the next game is shifted to RT, and if the RT end condition is satisfied in RT, the next game is shifted to non-RT.

Also, when the special combination is won, the winning combination information of the special combination is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the selected special combination stops on the active line.
A game that has not been won for a special role is called “Non-Inside”, and when a special role is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the selected special role is not stopped on the active line, that is, the special role is won. A game carrying information is called "inside".

In addition, from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (the maximum number of moving frames), the probability that the desired symbol that is desired to be stopped and displayed on the active line can be stopped on the active line is “drawn” Rate (PB) ".
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the active line (effective The fact that the line cannot be drawn) is referred to as “PB ≠ 1”.
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (drawn) on the effective line. This is referred to as “PB = 1”.

Also, when BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the active line (BB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the BB game is started from the next game. During the BB game, the winning probability of the small combination is increased by continuously executing the RB game. When the number of paid-out medals during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game is terminated and the game state before the transition to the BB game is resumed from the next game.
Furthermore, if the symbol combination corresponding to BB is not stopped on the active line when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is not stopped, the winning information of BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the effective line. The gaming state carrying over the winning information of the BB is referred to as “BB inside”.
Note that the timing of shifting into the inside of the BB can be set as appropriate. For example, in the game won for BB, after all the reels 31 are stopped, the game may be transferred to the inside of the BB. In the game won for BB, the game is not transferred to the inside of the BB. It may be moved inside.

Further, when the RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on the active line (RB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the RB game is started from the next game. During the RB game, the probability of winning a small role increases. When the payout number of medals during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game is terminated, and the game state before the transition to the RB game is resumed from the next game.
Furthermore, if the symbol combination corresponding to RB is not stopped on the active line even though the symbol combination corresponding to RB is not stopped on the active line, the winning information on the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on the active line. The gaming state carrying over the RB winning information is referred to as “inside RB”.
It should be noted that the transition timing to the inside of the RB can be set as appropriate, similarly to the transition timing to the inside of the BB. For example, in the game won for RB, after all the reels 31 are stopped, the game may be transferred to the inside of the RB. In the game won for RB, the game is not transferred to the inside of the RB. It may be moved inside.

  If the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line (MB wins), the medal is not paid out in the current game, but the MB game is started from the next game. During the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. When the payout number of medals during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game is terminated, and the game state before the transition to the MB game is resumed from the next game.

Furthermore, if the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on the active line, the MB winning information is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line. A gaming state carrying over MB winning information is referred to as “MB inside”.
In the ninth embodiment, since the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is set to “PB = 1”, when the MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is always stopped on the active line in this game. , MB is never inside.

In addition, the condition device (combination) of the ninth embodiment is roughly divided into a special combination (combination), a replay (regame combination), and a small combination.
Furthermore, there are three types of special roles: BB, RB, and MB, and two types of replays: Replay 1 and Replay 2. , Right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1 and cherry 2.
The left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell are collectively referred to as “push order bell”.
Further, the “condition device” is operated corresponding to the winning number determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61. When one winning number is determined, one or more condition devices corresponding to the winning number are activated, and a winning flag corresponding to the activated condition device is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the ninth embodiment, one winning number is determined from “0” to “16” by lottery by the lottery means 61 and corresponds to the determined winning number. Any condition device from non-winning to MB is activated.
Each of the two types of replays is won by itself and is not won by another condition device (role).
In addition, there are four types of bells, a common bell, a left correct bell, a middle correct bell, and a right correct bell.

Furthermore, a watermelon has the case where it wins independently and the case where it overlaps with BB.
Further, Cherry 1 has a case of winning alone and a case of overlapping with BB. Cherry 2 has a case of winning alone, a case of overlapping with RB, and a case of overlapping with BB. .
In addition, BB has a case of winning alone and a case of overlapping with watermelon, cherry 1 or cherry 2, but RB does not win alone but only wins with cherry 2 and MB. Will be elected alone and will not be elected with other roles.

The “payout” means the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to each condition device is stopped (a winning combination is won).
In the ninth embodiment, for the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, and the right correct answer bell, the payout differs depending on the specified number 3 (game state other than during MB) and the specified number 1 (in MB). The payout is the same for the specified number 3 and the specified number 1.

The left correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the first left stop is in the correct push order and other than the left first stop is the incorrect answer push order. In the specified number 3, eight medals are paid out in the correct push order. In addition, one medal is paid out in the order of incorrect answer, and in the specified number 1, 14 medals are paid out in the order of correct answer, and 15 medals are paid out in the order of incorrect answer.
Similarly, the middle correct bell is a push order bell in which the middle first stop is in the correct push order, and other than the middle first stop is the wrong push order, and the right correct bell is the right first stop in the correct push order. , Except for the first stop on the right, is the push order bell that is the wrong answer push order.
The common bell is a bell that pays out eight medals regardless of the pressing order.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the role lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). The role lottery means 61 performs lottery of a winning number. When the winning number is determined by lottery by the lottery means 61, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Further, the lottery of the winning number by the role lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) may be referred to as “internal lottery”.
As shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the ninth embodiment, one of the winning numbers “0” to “15” is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61. The winning numbers “0” to “15” correspond to the condition devices “non-winning” to “MB”, respectively. When the winning number is determined, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.

For example, when the winning number “1” is determined, the condition device “Replay 1” corresponding to the winning number “1” is activated. When the winning number “8” is determined, the “watermelon + BB” condition device corresponding to the winning number “8” is activated.
As described in the first embodiment, the role lottery means 61 is based on the random number generating means, the random number extracting means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and the random value extracted by the random number extracting means. A winning number determining means for determining a winning number; when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
For example, the random number extracted by the random number extraction means is the same in the non-inside and the inside, and the condition device that operates may be the same, or even if the random number extracted by the random number extraction means is the same The condition equipment to be used may be different.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the winning flag control means 62. The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of winning flags corresponding to each combination based on the lottery result of the winning number by the combination lottery means 61.
In the ninth embodiment, for every combination, a winning flag is provided for each combination. Then, when the winning number is determined by lottery by the winning lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets a winning flag). .

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number “1” is determined by lottery by the winning lottery means 61, the winning flag “Replay 1” included in the condition device “Replay 1” corresponding to the winning number “1” is set. It is turned on and the other winning flags are turned off.
Similarly, when the winning number “10” is determined by lottery by the lottery means 61 in the non-RT, “cherry 1” and “BB” included in the condition device “cherry 1 + BB” corresponding to the winning number “10”. ”Two winning flags are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

Also, since winning information for roles other than special roles (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, even if a winning role is not carried over in this game and the winning flag for that role is turned on, that role Regardless of whether or not is won, the winning flag is turned off at the end of the current game.
On the other hand, the winning information of special roles (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, so when the special role is won in the game this time and the winning flag of the selected special role is once turned on, The winning flag is kept on until winning, and when the special combination wins, the winning flag is turned off.

  For example, in a non-RT, when the winning number “10” is determined by lottery by the lottery means 61, “cherry 1” and “BB” included in the condition device of “cherry 1 + BB” corresponding to the winning number “10”. However, if “BB” is not won in this game, regardless of whether “Cherry 1” is won or not in this game, “Cherry” will be displayed at the end of this game. The winning flag “1” is turned off, and the winning flag “BB” is kept on. In this case, the game moves to the inside of the BB from the next game.

Also, for example, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number “9” is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61, the “cherry” corresponding to the winning number “9” is added in addition to the winning flag “BB” carried over. The winning flag of “Cherry 1” included in the condition device of “1” is turned on. That is, the two winning flags “Cherry 1” and “BB” are turned on.
For this reason, in the non-RT, when the winning number “10” is determined by lottery by the lottery means 61 (double winning “Cherry 1 + BB”), the winning number “9” is determined by the lottery means 61 in the BB. "Is determined (" Cherry 1 "is won by itself)), the ON / OFF state of the winning flag is the same.

In addition, during the MB game, the winning flag control means 62 displays the winning flags of all the small roles (common bell, left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1 and cherry 2). turn on. For this reason, although it is not what was won by the lottery by the part lottery means 61, it will be in the same state as having won all the small roles.
For example, in the MB game, when the winning number “0” is determined by lottery by the winning lottery means 61, the “non-winning” corresponding to the winning number “0” does not include any of the winning combinations. The winning flag of the small combination (the above seven small combinations) is turned on.
Further, for example, when the winning number “1” is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61 during the MB game, “replay 1” included in the condition device of “replay 1” corresponding to the winning number “1”. In addition to the winning flag, the winning flags of all the small combinations (the above seven small combinations) are turned on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the reel control means 65, and the reel control means 65 has a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to ON / OFF of the winning flag. Is provided. Each stop position determination table defines a stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.
When the winning number is determined by the lottery by the winning lottery means 61, and the winning flag control means 62 performs on / off control of the winning flag included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number, the reel control means 65 selects a stop position determination table corresponding to ON / OFF of the winning flag.

When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.
The stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of Replay 1 is on and the winning flag other than Replay 1 is off is such that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 1 stops on the active line, and The stop position of each reel 31 is determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the combinations other than the replay 1 do not stop on the effective line.

  Furthermore, the stop position determination table that is selected when the winning flag for the left correct bell is on and the winning flags other than the left correct bell are off is when the stop switch 42 is operated in the first left stop. When the symbol combination for paying out 8 medals stops on the effective line, and the stop switch 42 is operated except for the first stop on the left, the symbol combination for paying out 1 medal stops on the effective line. Thus, the stop position of each reel 31 is determined.

Further, the column of “number of internal lottery” in FIG. 26C shows the number of each winning number in each gaming state. Dividing the internal lottery number by “65536” gives the winning probability.
For example, since the number of the winning number “4” in the non-RT is “3000”, the winning number “4” is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 in the non-RT, and the “left” corresponding to the winning number “4” is determined. The probability that the condition device of “correct answer bell” will be “3000/65536”.

In addition, in the “internal lottery number” column of FIG. 26C, “*” marks indicate that advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Here, the “advantageous section” means a gaming section having performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated).
The “instruction function” means a function of displaying (notifying) the “advantageous operation mode” to the player.
Furthermore, “operation of the instruction function” includes displaying the correct answer push order when the push order bell is won.

Further, the “favorable section lottery” means a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section.
And if it wins by advantageous area lottery and it transfers to an advantageous area, it will become possible to operate an instruction | indication function and it will become possible to alert | report the correct pushing order at the time of pushing order bell winning.
For example, the symbol “*” is attached to the number “8000” of the winning number “3” (“common bell”) in the non-RT. This is because the role lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) in the non-RT. When the winning number “3” (“common bell”) is determined in the lottery, it means that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26C, in the non-RT, when the winning number “0” (non-winning) is determined, and the winning numbers “4” to “6” (“left correct answer bell”, “ If it is determined as “medium correct answer bell” or “right correct answer bell”), the advantageous section lottery is not executed, but otherwise, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Further, in RT, RB inside, and BB inside, when the winning numbers “4” to “6” (“left correct bell”, “middle correct bell”, or “right correct bell”) are determined. Except, when the same winning number is determined for the non-RT and the number, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, because the BB winning information is carried over inside the BB, when the winning number “9” (single winning of “Cherry 1”) is decided inside the BB, and in the non-RT (non-inside) When the winning number is “10” (“Cherry 1 + BB” overlapping winning), the ON / OFF state of the winning flag is the same.
Further, the number of winning numbers “10” (non-internal) and the number of winning numbers “9” (single winning of “Cherry 1”) inside BB Is set to the same “200”.
For this reason, when the winning number “9” (single winning of “Cherry 1”) is determined inside the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

When the winning number “9” (single winning of “Cherry 1”) is determined inside the RB, the winning flag of “Cherry 1” and the winning flag of “RB” carried over are turned on. .
In addition, “BB” and “RB” coincide with each other in that they are special roles (instruments), and the winning number “10” (non-internal inside) of the winning number “10” (“Cherry 1 + BB” double winning) The placement number and the placement number of the winning number “9” (single winning of “Cherry 1”) inside the RB are set to the same “200”.
Therefore, even when the winning number “9” (single winning of “Cherry 1”) is determined inside the RB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number is “12” (“Cherry 2 + RB” overlapping winning) or the winning number “13” (“Cherry 2 + BB” overlapping winning) is determined in the non-RT, the winning is performed inside the RB or inside the BB. The case where the number “11” (single winning of “Cherry 2”) is determined coincides with the fact that the winning flag of “Cherry 2” and the winning flag of the special role (actual item) are turned on.
Furthermore, when the winning numbers “12” (overlap winning of “Cherry 2 + RB”) and the winning numbers “13” (overlap winning of “Cherry 2 + BB”) in the non-RT are added together, it becomes “300”. It matches the number “300” of the winning number “11” in the inside (single winning of “Cherry 2”).
Therefore, even when the winning number “11” (single winning of “Cherry 2”) is determined inside the RB and inside the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Further, the column “Number of advantageous section lottery” in FIG. 26C shows the number of each winning number. Dividing the advantageous section lottery number by “16384” gives the winning probability.
For example, in the non-RT, inside the RB or inside the BB, when the winning number “1” (single winning of “Replay 1”) is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery “20/16384”.
In addition, for example, in the non-RT or RT, when the winning number “8” (duplicate winning of “watermelon + BB”) is determined by the lottery by the lottery means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is “10000/16384” "

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is set to “PB = 1”.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), MB lottery is performed in non-RT and RT, but when MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is always stopped on the active line in this game, so MB It shifts to MB game from the next game without becoming inside.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), during the MB game, the replay 1 or the replay 2 lottery is performed, and regardless of the lottery result by the role lottery means 61, all the small roles are won in a duplicated state. Become.

Therefore, when the winning number “1” (single winning of “Replay 1”) is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of “Replay 1” and all the small roles (common bell, left correct bell, middle The winning flags of the correct answer bell, right answer bell, watermelon, cherry 1 and cherry 2) are turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number “2” (single winning of “Replay 2”) is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of “Replay 2” and the winning flags of all small roles are turned on.

When the winning number “1” (single winning of “Replay 1”) is determined during the MB game, that is, when the winning flag of “Replay 1” and the winning flags of all small roles are turned on. Is the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on. However, during the MB game, the specified number is 1 (one inserted), and the payout is different from non-RT etc., and 14 or 15 payouts are made.
As a result, when the winning number “1” (single winning of “Replay 1”) is determined during the MB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the first left stop (in the correct push order), 14 When the symbol combination that pays out medals stops on the active line and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the first stop on the left (when the pressing order is incorrect), the symbol combination that pays out 15 medals is Stop at the active line.

Similarly, when the winning number “2” (single winning of “Replay 2”) is determined during the MB game, the same stop position determination table is selected as when only the winning flag of the right correct bell is ON, At the time of the first stop (in the correct push order), 14 sheets are paid out, and at the time other than the first stop at the right (in the incorrect push order answer), 15 sheets are paid out.
Then, in the first game during the MB game, the push order for 14 payouts is notified, and in the second game during the MB game, the push order for 15 payouts is notified.
As described above, the MB game end condition is set such that the number of medals to be paid out exceeds 14. Therefore, by giving such notification, 29 medals are paid out during the MB game. Can be. Further, since the prescribed number is set to “1” during the MB game, it is possible to cause the player to acquire 27 medals obtained by subtracting the inserted number “2” from the paid-out number “29”.

In order to notify the pushing order that is advantageous to the player during the MB game, it is necessary to shift to the advantageous section.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the non-RT or RT, the winning of the advantageous section lottery when the winning number “15” (single winning of “MB”) is determined by the lottery by the winning lottery means 61. The probability is set to “16384/16384”, that is, “100%”.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the production group number selection means 64. The effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the winning number, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As shown in FIG. 26 (c), an effect group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. Specifically, the production group numbers “0” to “3” are determined corresponding to the winning numbers “0” to “3”, and the production group number “4” corresponding to the winning numbers “4” to “6”. ”And production group numbers“ 5 ”to“ 13 ”corresponding to the winning numbers“ 7 ”to“ 15 ”.
When the winning number is determined by lottery by the lottery means 61, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

  Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the pressing order instruction number selection unit 63. The push order instruction number selection means 63 is selected when the winning number corresponding to the push order bell (left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, right correct answer bell) is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61. This is for selecting the pressing order instruction number corresponding to (number corresponding to the correct pressing order).

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the control command transmission unit 71. The control command transmission means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output from the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmission means 71 uses, as control commands, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a pressing order instruction number (during AT and correct answer pressing) In addition to the presentation group number, the information when the stop switch 42 is operated, the information on the winning combination, etc., in addition to the game state (non-RT, RT , RB inside, BB inside, RB inside, BB inside, MB inside) information, production group number, etc. are transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Thereby, on the sub control board 80 side, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side and the condition devices (except for the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, and the right correct answer bell) operating in the role lottery means 61 are determined. be able to.
On the sub-control board 80 side, it can be determined that the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell is selected according to the effect group number, but the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell. It is not possible to determine which of the winners (in the correct answer push order).
Further, during AT, the correct answer pressing order can be notified by the pressing order instruction number.

The sub control board 80 controls selection and output of effects during the game and during the game standby.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected to each other, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectional with respect to the sub control board 80 and information necessary for production output ( Control command).
Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
In addition, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like are electrically connected to the sub control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82.

Furthermore, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect output control means 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect determination table and the like.
Furthermore, the effect determination table defines the output to be output, and a plurality of effects are provided. The effect output control means 91 determines the effect to be output using any effect determination table, and the determined effect is determined. Is controlled to output.
That is, the effect output control means 91 determines what kind of effect is output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and any effect determination table, and the determination Accordingly, the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 is controlled.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an effect determination table used in common for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and FIG. 28 is an effect determination table used in both RB and BB. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 27, in the ninth embodiment, there are 18 types of production patterns from “no production” to “continuous production”. In addition, each production pattern from “character production (liveness)” to “continuous production” defines production with different contents.
For example, the “determined effect” is an effect whose content indicates that the player has won the special role, and the “post-stop notification effect” is after the first stop (after the first stop switch 42 is operated). The “left first stop effect” is an effect that indicates that the left stop switch 42 should be operated first, and the “continuous effect” is continuous over a plurality of games. It is an effect that is output.

In addition, the column “number of effect pattern assignments” in FIG. 27 indicates the number of assignments of each effect pattern when each effect group number is received. Dividing the number of effect pattern distribution by “256” gives the selection probability of each effect pattern. In FIG. 27, the name of the corresponding condition device is described under each production group number.
For example, in the non-RT, when the winning number “1” (single winning of “Replay 1”) is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the production group number “1” is transmitted, the selection probability of “no production” is “128/256”, the selection probability of “character production (liveness)” is “20/256”, the selection probability of “conversation production (liveness)” is also “20/256”, and “cut-in production” The selection probability of “(Strong production)” is “0/256”.

As described above, the control command transmission means 71 provides information indicating the gaming state (non-RT, RT, inside RB, inside BB, inside RB, inside BB, inside MB) to the sub-control board 80, and Send the production group number.
Then, the effect output control means 91 of the sub control board 80 selects the effect determination table corresponding to the game state based on the information indicating the game state received from the main control board 50, the selected effect determination table, and the main Based on the effect group number received from the control board 50, it is determined which effect pattern output is to be output, and the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 is controlled according to the determination.

  Here, in non-RT (non-inside), when the winning number “14” (single winning of “BB”) is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the production group number “12” is transmitted, the production output The control means 91 selects an effect determination table used in common for non-RT and RT (non-AT) shown in FIG. 27, and sets the column of the effect group number “12” (single winning of “BB”) in this effect determination table. Using the number, it is determined which effect pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when “BB” alone is won in non-RT, for example, “continuous production” is selected with a probability of “40/256”.

On the other hand, when the winning number “0” (“non-winning”) is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61 and the production group number “0” is transmitted, the production output control means 91 An effect determination table used in common within RB and BB shown in FIG. 28 is selected, and any of the effects is determined by using the number in the column of the effect group number “0” (“non-winning”) in this effect determination table. Decide whether to output the effect of the pattern. As shown in FIG. 28, at the time of “non-winning” inside the BB, for example, “determined effect” is selected with a probability of “80/256”.
In this way, the production output control means 91 is a game in which “BB” is won by the role lottery means 61 in the non-RT (non-internal) state, and “non-winning” by the role lottery means 61 in the BB inside. An effect to be output is determined using a different effect determination table for the game. For this reason, the selection probability of each production pattern is different.

  When the winning number “14” (single winning of “BB”) is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side receives the winning number “14”. “BB” winning flag included in the “BB” condition device corresponding to “” is turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag “BB” is on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a “BB single stop position determination table”.

The “BB single stop position determination table” is used to stop each reel 31 so that the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the effective line and the symbol combination corresponding to a role other than BB does not stop on the effective line. The position is determined.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 determines the stop switch 42 based on the “BB single stop position determination table” and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

Further, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number is “0” (“non-winning”) by the lottery by the winning lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 carries over “BB” carried over on the main control board 50 side. The other winning flags are kept on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag “BB” is on and the other winning flags are off. That is, the same “BB single stop position determination table” is selected as when the “BB” is independently won by the role lottery means 61 in the non-RT.
For this reason, when the winning lottery means 61 is “non-winning” in the inside of the BB, the same reel 31 stop control is performed as when the winning lottery means 61 is “Win” alone in the non-RT. Also, “the same reel 31 is controlled to stop” means that when each stop switch 42 is operated in the same mode (pushing order and operation timing), each reel 31 stops at the same position and is the same. This means that a stop roll is displayed.

In this way, when the winning lottery means 61 alone wins “BB” in the non-RT, and when the winning lottery means 61 becomes “non-winning” inside the BB, it is the same on the main control board 50 side. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined using this stop position determination table, but on the sub-control board 80 side, the effect to be output is determined using a different effect determination table. For this reason, the selection probability of each production pattern is different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reel 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub-control board 80 side, and the effects can be diversified.
Also, even if the same reel 31 is controlled to stop on the main control board 50 side and the same stop event is displayed, a different effect is output on the sub control board 80 side, so that the special role is won. It is possible to make it possible for the player to guess that the player is inside (inside).

Furthermore, by selecting different presentation determination tables on the side of the sub-control board 80 when the non-RT “BB” alone is selected and when the “non-win” in the BB is selected, the “BB” alone in the non-RT is selected. At the time of winning, an effect determination table with a low selection probability of a confirmed effect (an effect that the player knows that BB has been won) is selected. A decision table can be selected.
As a result, in the game won for “BB”, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that “BB” has been won. By making it easy for the player to understand, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by making it possible for the player to aim for winning the “BB” and not to continue inside the BB indefinitely.

  In addition, in the non-RT, when the winning number “8” (duplicate winning of “watermelon + BB”) is determined by lottery by the winning lottery means 61 and the effect group number “6” is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 An effect determination table used in common for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal) shown in FIG. 27 is selected, and the effect group number “6” (“watermelon + BB”) in the effect determination table is selected. ) Column is used to determine which effect pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when “Watermelon + BB” is won in the non-RT, for example, the probability of “50/256” is “Character effect (lively)”, “Conversation effect (lively)”, or “Cut-in effect ( “Strong production)” is selected, and “Continuous production” is selected with a probability of “30/256”.

On the other hand, when the winning number “7” (single winning of “watermelon”) is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61 in the inside of the BB and the effect group number “5” is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 28 selects an effect determination table that is commonly used in the RB and in the BB shown in FIG. 28, and uses the number in the column of the effect group number “5” (single winning of “watermelon”) in this effect determination table. Which effect pattern to output is determined. As shown in FIG. 28, when “watermelon” alone in the BB is elected, for example, “Character effect (lively)” or “Conversation effect (lively)” is selected with a probability of “73/256”, and “20 A continuous effect is selected with a probability of “/ 256”.
In this way, the effect output control means 91 is a single winning prize for “watermelon” by the role lottery means 61 in the inside of the BB and the game in which the “watermelon + BB” is won in the role lottery means 61 in the non-RT (non-inside) An effect to be output is determined using a different effect determination table depending on the game played. For this reason, the selection probability of each production pattern is different.

In addition, during non-interior, by showing the player a continuous performance across multiple games, the player's expectation for winning the “BB” will be maintained for a long time. The probability is set high.
On the other hand, inside the BB, if you show the player to the continuous performance over multiple games, the “BB” prize will be delayed and the player's medal will decrease accordingly. At the same time, the selection probability of the continuous effect at the time is set low, and the selection probability of the final effect at the time of “non-winning” is set high so that the player can aim for the “BB” win at an early stage.
It should be noted that, within the BB, after setting the winning probability of each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning so that the player's medal does not decrease, the selection probability of the continuous effect may be set high.

  In addition, when the winning number “8” (duplicate winning of “watermelon + BB”) is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-inside), the winning flag control means 62 is set on the main control board 50 side. Then, two winning flags “watermelon” and “BB” included in the condition device “watermelon + BB” corresponding to the winning number “8” are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags “watermelon” and “BB” are on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a “watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table”.

“Watermelon + BB overlapping stop position determination table” is provided so that a symbol combination corresponding to watermelon or BB can be stopped on an effective line, and a symbol combination corresponding to a role other than watermelon and BB is not stopped on an effective line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 determines the stop switch based on the “watermelon + BB overlapping stop position determination table” and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

  Further, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number “7” (single winning of “watermelon”) is determined by lottery by the winning lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 is carried over on the main control board 50 side. In addition to maintaining the winning flag of “BB” on, the winning flag of “watermelon” included in the “watermelon” condition device corresponding to the winning number “7” is turned on, and “watermelon” and “BB” The winning flags other than "" are turned off. As a result, the two winning flags “watermelon” and “BB” are turned on. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags “watermelon” and “BB” are on and the other winning flags are off. That is, the same “watermelon + BB duplication stop position determination table” is selected that is the same as when “watermelon + BB” is won by the combination lottery means 61 in the non-RT.

For this reason, when the “watermelon” is won by the role lottery means 61 in the inside of the BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when the “watermelon + BB” is won by the role lottery means 61 in the non-RT. .
As described above, in the non-RT, the main lottery means 61 double-wins “watermelon + BB”, and when the main lottery means 61 alone wins “watermelon” inside the BB, on the main control board 50 side, Although the stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table, the output to be output is determined using a different effect determination table on the sub-control board 80 side. For this reason, the selection probability of each production pattern is different.

  In addition, when “Cherry 1 + BB” is won in non-RT and when “Cherry 1” is won in BB alone, when “Watermelon + BB” is won in non-RT, and in BB Similarly to the case where “watermelon” is selected alone, the main control board 50 side determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, but the sub control board 80 side uses a different effect determination table. Use to determine the effect to be output. For this reason, the selection probability of each production pattern is different.

In addition, when “Cherry 2 + BB” or “Cherry 2 + RB” is elected redundantly in non-RT, and when “Cherry 2” is elected alone in BB or RB, it is changed to “Watermelon + BB” in non-RT. As in the case of overlapping winning and when “watermelon” is won independently in the BB, the main control board 50 side determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table. On the board 80 side, an effect to be output is determined using a different effect determination table. For this reason, the selection probability of each production pattern is different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reel 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub-control board 80 side, so the effects can be diversified.

As shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, when the “watermelon” is independently won in non-RT and when the “watermelon” is independently won inside the BB, the number of distribution patterns of each effect pattern is the same. For this reason, the selection probabilities of the production patterns are the same.
However, when “Watermelon” is selected alone in non-RT, the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the winning flag of “Watermelon” is on and the other winning flags are off, When “Watermelon” is selected in the BB alone, the two stop flags “Watermelon” and “BB” are on, and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off. To do. For this reason, the stop control of the reel 31 is different between when the “watermelon” is independently won in non-RT and when the “watermelon” is independently won inside the BB.
As described above, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same on the sub-control board 80 side when the “watermelon” is independently selected in non-RT and when the “watermelon” is independently selected inside the BB. The stop control of the reel 31 is different on the main control board 50 side.

  As described above, in a plurality of gaming states, the random number values extracted by the random number extraction means of the role lottery means 61 are the same, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determination means of the role lottery means 61 are the same. When the same condition device is activated, the reel 31 stop control (the selected stop position determination table) for each gaming state is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (the selected effect determination table). ) May be different.

  Further, in a plurality of gaming states, the random number values extracted by the random number extraction means of the role lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determination means of the role lottery means 61 are the same, and the same condition When the device is activated, the stop control (the selected stop position determination table) of the reels 31 for each gaming state is the same, but the selection probability (the selected effect determination table) of each effect pattern may be different. .

  Furthermore, in a plurality of gaming states, the same condition device has different random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the winning lottery means 61 and different winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning lottery means 61 When the is activated, the stop control (selected stop position determination table) of the reel 31 for each gaming state is the same, but the selection probability (selected effect determination table) of each effect pattern may be different.

<Modification of Ninth Embodiment>
Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) Type of combination, type of condition device, type of gaming state, specified number in each gaming state, dividend at the time of winning each combination, allocation of number of internal lottery, advantageous section lottery shown in the ninth embodiment The allocation of numbers, the types of production patterns, the allocation of the number of distribution patterns for each production pattern are merely examples, and can be appropriately set according to the game content.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the number table of the internal lottery and the advantageous section lottery in the setting 1 is shown, but six stages from the setting 1 to the setting 6 are provided as setting values, and different internal values are set for the respective setting values. A table of numbers for the lottery and the advantageous section lottery can be provided.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmission means 71 transmits information indicating a gaming state and an effect group number to the sub-control board 80. Thereby, on the sub control board 80 side, the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side are judged, and the effect pattern is selected with a probability corresponding to the game state and the condition device. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmission means 71 may transmit the winning number determined by the internal lottery to the sub-control board 80, or send information indicating the condition device corresponding to the winning number determined by the internal lottery. Also good. Then, on the sub control board 80 side, the condition device on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the received winning number and information indicating the condition device.

Further, for example, the control command transmission means 71 transmits information indicating the condition device determined by the internal lottery and information on the winning combination to the sub-control board 80. Then, on the side of the sub control board 80, the gaming state on the side of the main control board 50 may be determined based on the information indicating the condition device and the information on the winning combination.
Furthermore, for example, if the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating that “BB” has been won, but does not receive information indicating that “BB” has won, the game state on the main control board 50 side is changed. It can be determined that the BB is inside.
Then, based on the gaming state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub control board 80 side and the information indicating the effect group number, winning number, and condition device received from the main control board 50, on the sub control board 80 side. An effect pattern may be selected.

(4) For example, the control command transmission means 71 transmits information indicating ON / OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each combination and information on the winning combination to the sub-control board 80. Then, on the side of the sub-control board 80, the game state and the condition device on the side of the main control board 50 may be determined based on information indicating ON / OFF of the winning flag and information on the winning combination.
For example, if information indicating that the winning flag of “BB” is on is received, but information indicating that “BB” has won is not received, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side is in the BB. It can be judged.

In addition, since “BB” lottery is not performed inside the BB, when information indicating that only the winning flag “BB” is on is received inside the BB, an internal lottery on the main control board 50 side is not performed. It can be determined that the winning number is “0” (“non-winning”).
Then, based on the gaming state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub control board 80 side and the condition device on the main control board 50 side similarly determined on the sub control board 80 side, the effect pattern on the sub control board 80 side May be selected.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, “single winning” is used to mean that only a role other than the special role is won, and that the special role is not won at the same time. It is used in the sense that a special role and other roles other than the special role are elected at the same time.
For example, the “Watermelon + Control 1” winning in the BB is a double win in the sense that multiple types of roles are won at the same time. Since it is not won at the same time, in the sense of the ninth embodiment, it is a single winner.

In addition, when the “watermelon + control combination 1 + BB” in the non-inside is won (overlap win) and the “watermelon + control combination 1” in the inside of the BB is selected (single win), on the main control board 50 side, Since the ON / OFF state of the winning flag is the same, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table. However, since the winning number and the effect group number are different, on the sub control board 80 side, An effect to be output is determined using a different effect determination table.
The “control combination” is a combination for changing the stop position determination table to be selected by changing the ON / OFF state of the winning flag, thereby making the stop control of the reel 31 different. Not a role for

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number “11” (single winning of “Cherry 2”) is determined inside the RB and inside the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed. The advantageous section lottery may not be executed at the time of winning a combination that is selected as a special combination.
(7) The various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments and the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combination.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to display control of the management information display LED 74.
The main CPU 55 is in a setting change state (setting change mode, changing settings), and a setting confirmation state for 5 seconds from a predetermined timing (for example, when the power is turned on, when the first interrupt process is started, when a program is started). (Setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress) In the RWM abnormality error state, control is performed so that all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
As described in the second embodiment, since the management information display LED 74 is composed of four-digit LEDs, “8888” is displayed when all the LEDs are lit. Thereby, it can be made possible to confirm whether or not the LED of the management information display LED 74 is defective.

Further, when the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on, the state shifts to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed. Furthermore, when shifting to the setting change state, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
And 5 seconds from the predetermined timing based on power-on is set to a time longer than the time required to shift from the power-on to the setting change state when the setting key switch is on at the time of power-on. Yes.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to a time shorter than the time required to shift from power-on to the setting change state. In this case, first, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on, then the management information is temporarily displayed on the management information display LED 74, and then all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on again. For this reason, there is a possibility that an administrator (a hall clerk) may suspect that there is a problem with the gaming machine.

Therefore, the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to 5 seconds.
Note that the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, but any time as long as it is longer than the time required to shift from power-on to the setting change state. May be set.

Hereinafter, the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be described.
In the tenth embodiment, the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are referred to as “digit 6”, “digit 7”, “digit 8”, and “digit 9” in order from the left side.
In addition, among the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74, the left two LEDs (digits 6 and 7) are called “identification segments”, and the right two LEDs (digits 8 and 9) are “ratio”. This is called “Seg”.

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Identification segment upper digit Digit 7: Identification segment lower digit Digit 8: Ratio segment upper digit Digit 9: Ratio segment lower digit
Further, in the tenth embodiment, each of the management information display LEDs 74 (digits) is an 8-segment LED including segments A to G and a segment DP.

The test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 is performed in order to confirm whether all the segments (segments A to G and DP) are turned on and off correctly. Therefore, during the period (time) during which the test pattern is displayed, all segments are set to have a lighting state and a light-off state.
When the test pattern is displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is displayed at any of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds from predetermined timing based on power-on (2) Within 5 seconds from setting change start processing (3) During setting change (mode) (4) During setting confirmation (mode) (5) During RWM error

As a test pattern, first, a predetermined display is switched every second and displayed for 5 seconds. The time for maintaining one display is not limited to 1 second, and the display time for the test pattern is not limited to 5 seconds (other than 5 seconds may be used).
Then, the test pattern is set so that all the segments of all the LEDs have a lighted state and a lighted state during 5 seconds, which is the test pattern display time.
Second, as a test pattern, blinking all segments of all LEDs can be mentioned. Even in such a setting, all the segments of all the LEDs can be turned on and off by one blink (turned on and off).

FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a first example of test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
Note that in the test pattern display of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 described later, the lit segments are indicated by solid lines, and the unlit segments are indicated by dotted lines. In the segment DP, the lighting state is indicated by a black circle, and the light-off response is indicated by a white circle.
In the following description, “.” Indicates that the segment DP is in a lighting state, and “.” Indicates that the segment DP is in a light-off state.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display of each LED of the test pattern are provided.
One of them is a pattern displaying “0.”. More specifically, this is a pattern in which the segments A to F and DP are turned on and the segment G is turned off.
The other is a pattern displaying “-.”. More specifically, this is a pattern in which the segment G is turned on and the segments A to F and DP are turned off.
Therefore, “0.” and “−.” Have the opposite relationship between the segments that are turned on and off.

In the state shown in FIG. 29A, “0” is displayed in the identification segment upper digit and the ratio segment upper digit, and “-.” Is displayed in the identification segment lower digit and the ratio segment lower digit.
Furthermore, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, the display state shown in FIG. 29A is maintained for 1 second. Note that the one-second count is measured by the number of interrupt processing. For example, when the display of FIG. 29 (a) is started, “447 (D)” is set in the counter, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt process. For example, the display of a) is terminated. Accordingly, the display of FIG. 29A can be maintained for “2.235 × 447 = 999.045 ms”.

When the display for about 1 second in FIG. 29A is finished, the display shifts to the display in FIG.
In addition, the display of FIG. 29B is obtained by replacing the LED that displays “0.” and the LED that displays “−.” With respect to the display of FIG. That is, the display of FIG. 29 (b), contrary to the display of FIG. 29 (a), displays “−.” In the identification segment upper digit and the ratio segment upper digit, and the identification segment lower digit and the ratio segment lower digit. “0.” is displayed.
Further, as in the case of FIG. 29A, the display state shown in FIG. 29B is continued for one second (447 interrupts).

The display contents of FIG. 29A and FIG. 29B are switched and displayed every second, and are executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 29, (c) and (e) have the same display contents as (a), and (d) has the same display contents as (b).
When the test pattern display (5 seconds) is completed, the display shifts to a normal ratio display.
In FIG. 29, (f) shows an example in which the advantageous section ratio is displayed as “7.U.5.0.”. Moreover, you may display an accessory ratio instead of an advantageous area ratio.

As described above, when “0.” and “−.” Are displayed on the LED, it is possible to create a lighting state and a light-off state for all the segments (A to G and DP). Cannot be turned off or cannot be extinguished).
In the case of displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment displays “0.-.” Or “-.0.”. Therefore, there is no possibility of confusion between the test pattern and the original ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a second example of test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
In Example 1 of FIG. 29, the display content was changed every second, and the test pattern was displayed for 5 seconds. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for displaying within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on or within 5 seconds from the setting change start process.
On the other hand, Example 2 of the test pattern display shown in FIG. 30 is suitable for displaying a test pattern until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, such as during setting change, during setting confirmation, or during an RWM abnormality error. .
Of course, the test pattern display of FIG. 29 may be used to display until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
Similarly, it is needless to say that the test pattern display of FIG. 30 may be used when displaying within a predetermined period from when the test pattern display start condition is satisfied.

In Example 2 of FIG. 30, “8.8.8.8.”, Which is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned on, and “*,” which is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned off. *. *. * ”(“ * ”Indicates that the segments A to G are unlit) are alternately repeated. In other words, “8.8.8.8.” Is displayed in a blinking pattern.
In Example 2 of FIG. 30, the lighting state of all segments shown in FIG. 30A is maintained for 0.3 seconds, and then the extinguishing state of all segments shown in FIG. 30B is maintained for 0.3 seconds. Then, by repeating the lighting state shown in FIG. 30A and the extinguishing state shown in FIG.

  In the tenth embodiment, the blinking interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, “134 (D)” is set as the initial value of the timer, the timer value is subtracted by “1” every 2.235 ms of interrupt processing, and when the timer value becomes “0”, the lighting time or It is determined that the turn-off time has elapsed. Accordingly, by counting the number of interruptions “134”, “299.49” ms can be counted.

Also in Example 2 of the test pattern display of FIG. 30, “8.” and “*.” Can create a lighting state and a light-off state for all segments. Therefore, a segment defect (cannot be turned on or turned off) can be easily determined visually.
In the case of displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as “8.8.”. For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the display blinks at any ratio, but in this case, “8.8.” Is displayed and the segment DP is not lit. On the other hand, the display of “8.8.” Does not confuse the segment DP because the segment DP is also lit.

  Each ratio displayed on the management information display LED 74 is updated (calculated) at the end of the game (after all reels 31 are stopped and the payout process is completed). In the subsequent interrupt processing, the updated ratio is displayed. Here, when a power failure occurs immediately before the ratio update, and when a test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the power failure is restored, the ratio update (calculation) processing is performed during the 5 seconds during which the test pattern is displayed. Execute. Then, when the display of the test pattern is finished and the ratio display is started, the updated ratio is displayed after returning from the power-off.

<Eleventh embodiment>
FIG. 31A is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 31B is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 6C is a diagram showing the set value display LED 73 in the eleventh embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 31A, the credit display LED 76 includes a digit 1a (upper digit) and a digit 2a (lower digit). The acquired number display LED 78 includes a digit 3a (upper digit) and a digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, it is composed of seven segment LEDs (so-called 7-segment).
These digits 1a to 4a are all 7-segment displays including dot segments (segment P). In particular, the segment P of the digit 4a (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) functions as the advantageous section display LED 77.

The digit 5a is composed of six dot LEDs, and these six dot LEDs are collectively referred to as a status display LED 79. In FIG. 1, the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 are illustrated, but the status display LED 79 is not illustrated. However, actually, as shown in FIG. 31A, a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 are mounted on the display substrate 75.
In the status display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs for displaying the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is bet, only the 1-bet display LED 79a is lit. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are lit. When three medals are bet, all of the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c are lit.

The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 can be operated. Therefore, it does not light up when no medal is bet (or when replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. In other words, it lights up before the game is finished and a medal for shifting to the next game is inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. Even after the replay is activated, it lights up when a bet can be made according to the number of credits. When the number of bets is maximum (when no more bets can be placed), the insertion display LED 79e is turned off.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that is lit when a replay is won. When an automatic bet is made based on a replay win, the replay display LED 79f is lit to notify the player that the bet is in an automatic bet.
In addition, as the status display LED 79 not illustrated in FIG. 31A, for example, a settlement display LED (an LED that is lit during the settlement process) can be given, but the illustration is omitted in FIG.

In FIG. 31B, the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 10, 29 and 30, and is composed of four digits 1b to 4b. These digits 1b-4b are 7 segment displays provided with a dot segment (segment P) like the above-mentioned digits 1a-4a. The digits 1b to 4b display the upper information type, the lower information type, the upper numerical value, and the lower numerical value, respectively.
The segment P of the digit 2b (lower information type) functions as a digit separator LED. The digit separator LED is used to clarify the separator between the information type and the numerical value.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the segments P of the digits 1b to 4b can be lit when displaying a test pattern.
Furthermore, in FIG. 31C, a set value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG. 10, and is an LED that displays the current set value during setting change and setting confirmation. ) Digit 5b.
Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b and the segments A to G and P in the present embodiment.
The digit composed of 7 segments is 7 segments composed of 7 rod-shaped segments A to G and 1 dot-shaped segment P. In addition, although LED which consists of segment AG which does not have segment P may be called "7 segment", and LED which consists of eight segments including segment P may be called "8 segment", this specification In the book, “7 segments” including LEDs composed of 8 segments are also referred to.

As shown in FIG. 32, for example, in the digit 1a, the segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and the segment P is unused. Similarly, the segments A to G of the digits 2a and 3a constitute 7 segments of the lower digit of the credit number display LED and the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.
In addition, the segments A to G of the digit 4a constitute 7 segments of the lower digits of the acquired number display LED 78, and the segment P constitutes an advantageous section display LED 77.

  The digit 5 a is an LED constituting the status display LED 79. 32, the segment A of the digit 5a corresponds to the 1-bet display LED 79a, the segment B corresponds to the 2-bet display LED 79b,..., The segment F corresponds to the replay display LED 79f. Also, the segments G and P of the digit 5a are not provided.

  The digits 1b to 4b constitute a management information display LED 74, and the segments 1b and 2b display the information type of the management information. The segments 3b and 4b display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in the segments 1b and 2b in the management information. The segments P of the digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally turned off, but are turned on when a test pattern is displayed as shown in FIGS. Further, the segment P of the digit 2b functions as a digit separator LED for clarifying the boundary between the digits 1b and 2b indicating the information type and the digits 3b and 4b indicating the numerical values and facilitating the confirmation. It should be noted that the digit separator LED may be turned on and off repeatedly during the display of the above-described test pattern as in the case of the other digit segment P, but may be turned on all the time.

  In addition, among the digits 5b, the segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the set value display LED 73, and the segment P is an LED that is lit during the setting change. That is, among the set value display LEDs 73, when the segment P is turned off, setting is being confirmed, and when the segment P is turned on, setting is being changed. The segment P of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment P of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is confirmed during the setting change.

FIG. 32 shows the configuration of segment data. The segment data is 1-byte data, the D0 bit corresponds to the segment A, the D1 bit corresponds to the segment B,..., The D7 bit corresponds to the segment P.
For example, when “0” is displayed on the digit 1a, the segments A to F are turned on and the segments G and P are turned off, so that the segment data is “00111111 (B)”.

Further, when “1” is displayed on the digit 4a and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the segments B, C, and P are turned on, so that the segment data is “1000010 (B)”.
Furthermore, when three medals are bet before the game starts and the game can be started, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, and the game start display LED 79d are turned on. The segment data of 5a is “00001111 (B)”.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the output port 52 in the eleventh embodiment. The type of output port is not limited to that shown in FIG.
As the output port 52 of the eleventh embodiment, one output port for transmitting a digit signal (output port 2) and two output ports for transmitting segment signals (output ports 3 and 4) are provided. .
The output port 3 is an output port that transmits segment signals of the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79 (digits 1a to 5a).
The output port 4 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73.

  In the output port 2, the digits 1 to 5 are assigned to the bits D0 to D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digits 2 to 5 signal. Therefore, for example, when a “1” signal is output from the D0 bit of the output port 2, both the digit 1a (credit number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and the digit 1b (management information display LED 74 (information type upper)) are displayed. A drive signal is supplied.

In the output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are unused.
The output port 3 is an output port for the segments A to P signals of the digits 1a to 5a, and the segment A to P signals are assigned to the D0 to D7 bits, respectively.
Similarly, the output port 4 is an output port for the segments A to P signals of the digits 1b to 5b, and the segment A to P signals are assigned to the D0 to D7 bits, respectively.
Further, the output port 5 outputs external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal.

  Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external concentration terminal board 100. Specifically, for example, an external signal 4 indicating an advantageous section, an AT, a specific RT, an external signal 1 to 3 indicating that an accessory is operating, an error occurring in the slot machine 10 or a power failure, etc. An external signal 5 indicating opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 is provided.

The data strobe signal is a signal transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When receiving the data strobe signal, the sub control board 80 controls to acquire the sub control data signal from the buffer provided in the sub control board 80 based on the rising edge of the data strobe signal.
33. From output ports (not shown) other than the output ports 2 to 5 shown in FIG. 33, for example, a signal of the motor 32, a signal of the blocker 45, a drive signal of the hopper motor 36, a condition device signal (so-called winning number) Sub-control data signal, test signal, etc. are output.

FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the relationship among interrupts, LED display counter values, digit signals, and segment signals in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 5B shows an LED display request flag.
In the present embodiment, as a process of the main control board 50, a main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41 described later) performed for each game and an interrupt process (once every 2.235 ms in parallel with the main process) I_INTR) (FIG. 53 described later) is executed.

  The LED display counter is 1-byte data and is a counter that is continuously updated for each interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter for determining which digit is to be lit among the digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b). For each bit of the LED display counter, the D0 bit is assigned to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit to the digit 2 signal,..., The D4 bit to the digit 5 signal. In one interrupt process, the digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) are dynamically lit so that the digit corresponding to the bit that is “1” in the LED display counter is lit.

  The LED display counter of this embodiment takes a value of “00010000 (B)” as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter updates the bit “1” of the LED display counter value so that it shifts to the right by one digit as it proceeds from the interruption “1” → “2” →. In FIG. 34, in the interrupt next to the interrupt “5”, the LED display counter becomes “00000000 (B)” by shifting one digit to the right. At the time of the interrupt, the LED display counter is initialized. The LED display counter is set to “00010000 (B)”. As a result, the LED display counter repeats the values “5” → “4” →... → “1” → “5” → “4” →. That is, one cycle is made up of 5 interrupts.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt eyes: 00010000 (B)
“N + 1” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
“N + 2” interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N + 3" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
“N + 4” interrupt: 00000001 (B)
“N + 5” interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as “N” interrupt)
"N + 6" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
It becomes.

  In the eleventh embodiment, five interrupts are one cycle, and the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b are turned on. Specifically, in FIG. 34A, for example, when the interrupt is “1”, that is, when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”, the digit 5 signal is output. By outputting the digit 5 signal, the digits 5a and 5b can be turned on. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the set value display LED 73 can be turned on. At the next interrupt “2”, the LED display counter becomes “00001000 (B)”, the digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digit of the acquired number display LED D78 and the numerical lower digit of the management information display LED 74 can be turned on. .

FIG. 34B shows the data structure of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating digits that are permitted to be turned on. As shown in FIG. 34B, the LED display request flag is 8-bit data corresponding to the digit 1 signal in the D0 bit, the digit 2 signal in the D1 bit,..., And the D4 bit in the digit 5 signal. is there. Each bit of the LED display request flag matches the bit of the output port 2.
As shown in FIG. 34 (B), digits 1 to 5 can be lit during normal operation, digits 3 to 5 can be lit during setting change, and digits 1 to 5 can be lit during setting confirmation. is there. Note that. “Normally” refers to waiting for a game and being played.

In the interrupt processing, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter and the LED display request flag, and the digit corresponding to the bit that is “1” becomes the digit that is turned on in the current interrupt processing.
For example, if the LED display counter is “00010000 (B)” and the LED display request flag is “00011111 (B) (normal)”, the AND operation of the two results in “00010000 (B)” and the digit 5 Only the signal becomes “1”. However, while normal (during game waiting and gaming), the segment signal can be output from the output port 3 and the status display LED 79 can be turned on, but the segment signal is not output from the output port 4, and the set value display LED 73 Control is performed so as not to light (digit 5b).

On the other hand, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is “00010000 (B)”), the segment signal is output from the output port 4 and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is displayed. It can be lit.
Further, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 or 4 signal is turned on (LED display counter is “00000100 (B)” or “00001000 (B)”), the digit 3 signal (acquisition number display LED 78 The upper digit) and the digit 4 signal (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) are output, and “88” (content indicating that the setting is being changed) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

  Furthermore, when the segment signal of the output port 3 is generated at the interrupt timing (interrupt “2” in FIG. 34) when the LED display counter is “00001000 (B)”, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is referred to. By doing. When the advantageous section display LED flag is ON, a value obtained by ORing the generated segment signal and “10000000 (B)” is output from the output port 3 as a segment signal. Thereby, the segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a can be turned on.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, name, and content of data stored in the RWM 53.
Note that the data shown in FIG. 35 is for use in the description of the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The address “F000 (H)” is a storage area for setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the set value is “N”, “N−1” is stored as the set value data. In this embodiment, it has setting values “1” to “6”. Therefore, any value from “0 (H)” to “5 (H)” is stored as the set value data.
Then, “N” obtained by adding “1” to the set value data is displayed as a set value on the set value display LED 73.

The address “F010 (H)” is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit amount data is data to be displayed on the credit amount display LED 76. In the present embodiment, any value from “0” to “50 (D)” is stored as the credit amount data.
Here, in this embodiment, a value obtained by converting the credit number into a decimal number is stored as the credit number data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is “29”, a value “29 (H)” is stored. In other words, “00101001 (B)” is stored in the address “F010 (H)”. Accordingly, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address “F010 (H)” are data for displaying the lower digit of the credit number (“9” in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are , Data for displaying the upper digit (“2” in this example) of the number of credits. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit value of the number of credits is “50 (D)”, the stored data value is in the range of “0” to “50”.
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 that stores the credit number data itself is not provided, and the credit number data is provided as display data of the credit number display LED 76.

The address “F011 (H)” is a storage area for acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquired number data is data to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In the acquired number data, similarly to the credit number data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digit, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are for displaying the upper digit. It is data.
In this embodiment, when a small combination is won, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small combination is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, so that the number-of-payout data corresponding to the winning small combination is stored as acquired number data. Specifically, when the small role is won and the medal is paid out, the acquired number data is added with the payout of the medal, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when “1 (H)” is stored as acquired number data, “01” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address “F040 (H)” to be described later, for example, “8 (H)” is stored when the 8 winning combination wins, and the payout number data is at the time of medal payout ( (Including addition to credit), “1” is decremented by “1” according to the number of payouts, such as “8” → “7” →.
On the other hand, the acquired number data stored in the address “F011 (H)” is, for example, “0” → “1” → “2” →. Thus, “1” is added every time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 also counts up as “0” → “1” → “2” →.

  In the present embodiment, “88” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during setting change, setting change display data for displaying “88” is stored as acquired number data. This is because “88” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 so that it can be identified from the front side of the gaming machine that the setting is being changed. Further, by lighting all the segments as “88”, it is possible to confirm that there is no segment defect (there is no segment that cannot be lit). Since the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out is 15, it can be understood that when “88” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is not a display of the number of payouts.

  Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment to be described later, when a condition for designating a specified number (the number of medals to be bet in the current game) is satisfied, before the game is started (before the bet is made possible or the start switch 41 is operated). Before the display), the specified number is instructed (displayed and notified) to the acquisition number display LED 78. In the present embodiment, “0A” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 in order to indicate the specified number “2”. Therefore, when the specified number is instructed, specified specified number display data for displaying “0A” is stored as acquired number data. Although details will be described later, the specified instruction number display data for displaying “0A” is “0B (H)”.

  Further, when winning such as a push order bell during AT, the push order indication information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. The pressing order instruction information corresponding to the winning numbers “3” to “8” shown in FIG. 58 described later is “= 1” to “= 6”, respectively. Therefore, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the obtained number data. Although details will be described later, the push order designation numbers corresponding to the push order designation information “= 1” to “= 6” are “A1 (H)” to “A6 (H)”, respectively. For example, in the game won for the winning number “3”, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed, the pressing order instruction number “A1 (H)” is stored as the acquired number data. As a result, the push order instruction information “= 1” corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

  When a predetermined error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. For this reason, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying an error number is stored as acquired number data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is “HP”, error number display data for displaying “HP” is stored as acquired number data.

The address “F030 (H)” is a storage area for an operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not the replay and the accessory are activated. For example, during the operation of 1BB, the D2 bit of the operation state flag is set to “1”.
This operating state flag is updated by a game start set process described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 of FIG. 42, when a D0 bit of a symbol combination display flag, which will be described later, is read and it is determined that the D0 bit is “1”, it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed. Set the D0 bit of the flag to “1”.
The replay operation flag (D0 bit) is cleared in step S413 in FIG. 50 (game end check process) described later.
Further, the operating state flag of the accessory is also cleared by the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 50).

The address “F031 (H)” is a storage area for a symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for determining a symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D2 bit. Therefore, the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag are assigned to the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned by the operation state flag, respectively.
In the main process of FIG. 41, in step S291, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination has been stopped, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to “1”.
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, specifically in step S279 (start switch accepting process) during the main process of FIG.

  The address “F040 (H)” is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The number-of-payout data is data indicating a value corresponding to the number of payouts when a small role is won in the game and the number of payouts is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When the small combination wins, the payout amount data corresponding to the winning small combination is stored, and the medal payout process is executed. Here, the payout number data is decremented by “1” every time one medal is paid out (“1” is added to the credit number, or one actual medal is paid out (from the hopper 35)). That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout amount data becomes “0”.

  The address “F041 (H)” is a storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data buffer becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when the small role is won in the game and the payout number is determined, similarly to the payout number data. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted every time one medal payout process is performed, and the initially stored value is maintained. The value is maintained until the next game medal payout number update process (step S293 in FIG. 41). For example, when 8 small payouts are won in the game, “8 (H)” is stored as the payout number data buffer. When no win is won in the next game, the payout number data buffer is stored. “0” is overwritten.

The address “F042 (H)” is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals automatically bet at the time of replay winning. In this embodiment, “2” or “3” is stored.
The automatic bet number data is set in step S325 during the game start setting process of FIG.
The address “F043 (H)” is a storage area for bet amount data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of “0” to “3” is stored. The bet number data is performed in the medal management process in step S276 (detected medals are performed and a bet process and a credit addition process are performed) during the main process in FIG.

The address “F051 (H)” is a storage area of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is shown in FIG. 34A, and is updated each time an interrupt process is performed as described above.
The address “F052 (H)” is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is shown in FIG. 34B, and takes a value according to normal, setting change, or setting confirmation.

The address “F061 (H)” is a storage area for an advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous segment type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game segment is a normal segment or an advantageous segment.
The advantageous section type flag stores “00000000 (B)” when it is a normal section, and the D0 bit becomes “1” when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section.
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The address “F062 (H)” is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag is “0”, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”.
The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on any time after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be lit simultaneously with the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, it is not necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 even after the transition to the advantageous section.
Specifically, first, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but may be turned on thereafter (in the advantageous section).
Secondly, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is once turned on when the ending condition of the advantageous section is satisfied before the condition for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 is satisfied. The advantageous section may be terminated without lighting.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (when the correct answer pressing order is notified) in a gaming state where the section Sim play rate exceeds “1” in the advantageous section, the advantageous section display is performed. The LED 77 is turned on.
Furthermore, after the advantageous section display LED 77 is once lit, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.
Further, a process for turning off the advantageous section display LED 77 is executed during the game end check process in the final game of the advantageous section. Specifically, when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED flag storage area initialization process (favorable section display LED flag clearing process) is executed. Thereby, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in a game that activates the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reel 31 starts rotating, Until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state, and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted.
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and the other at least one reel 31 is rotating,
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 are stopped (the game is finished), before the settlement switch 43 can be operated before the next game is started.

However, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in a game that activates the instruction function, it is necessary to determine the winning combination in the game, so that the operation before the start switch 41 (before the combination lottery) is excluded. .
When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in a game in which the instruction function is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery of the combination is executed. Therefore, after the reel 31 starts rotating, the reel 31 rotates. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit until the constant speed state is reached is the shortest timing.

  The address “F063 (H)” is a storage area of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous section clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games in the advantageous section. The advantageous section clear counter is “0” during the normal section, and “1500 (D)” is set as an initial value when shifting to the advantageous section. Further, the advantageous section clear counter is set so that “1” is subtracted per game not only in the advantageous section but also in the normal section. However, the minimum value is “0”. For this reason, when the advantageous interval clear counter (before subtraction) is “0” in the normal interval, a counter is used in which the value after subtraction becomes “0” even if “1” is subtracted. Accordingly, during the normal section, “1” is subtracted for each game, but “0” is maintained. In other words, when “0” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-favorable section).

In addition, when shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to “1500 (D)” as an initial value, so that the advantageous section clear counter becomes “1499 (D)” in the next game.
The advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value “1500 (D)” at the maximum, and is therefore composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than “0” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is an advantageous section.

The address “F065 (H)” is a storage area of the difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the accumulated value of the difference number in the advantageous section, and is also referred to as “MY counter”.
The difference counter does not simply store the accumulated value itself of the difference number, but stores a “corresponding value” for the accumulated value of the difference number. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to minus, the value is corrected to “0 (H)”. Therefore, “cumulative value of difference sheets ≠ difference counter value”.
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the accumulated value of the difference number in the advantageous section exceeds “2400 (D)”. For this reason, the difference counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

The difference counter only needs to count at least the accumulated value of the difference sheets in the advantageous section, and does not have to count in the non-favorable section (normal section).
Here, when the difference counter value is updated on the condition that it is an advantageous section, it is necessary to determine every game and whether or not the game is an advantageous section. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the difference counter value is updated even during the non-favorable interval (normal interval). In this way, since the difference counter value can be updated without determining every game and whether or not the game is an advantageous section, the processing can be simplified.

  Furthermore, even when the difference number becomes negative in the current game and the value corresponding to the accumulated value of the difference number becomes the carry-down data, the difference counter value is updated. However, when the difference counter is the carry-down data as a result of the calculation, the difference counter value is corrected to “0”.

To give a specific example (the difference counter value at the start of the first game is “0 (H)”),
Game 1: When the bet number is “3” and the payout number is “0”, the calculated difference counter is “FFFD (H)”, and the corrected difference counter is “0 (H)”.
2nd game: bet number “3”, payout number “9”, difference counter after calculation “0006 (H)” (no correction)
Third game: bet number “3”, payout number “0”, difference counter after operation “0003 (H)” (no correction)
4th game: bet number “3”, payout number “1”, difference counter “0001 (H)” after calculation (no correction)
Game 5: bet number “3”, payout number “0”, calculated difference counter “FFFE (H)”, corrected difference counter “0 (H)”
It is updated as follows.
Even if the difference counter of the previous game is “0 (H)” and the difference counter of the current game is “0 (H)”, the difference counter value reflecting the difference number of the game is changed. Since this is the calculated result, such a case also corresponds to “update” of the difference counter.

As described above, when the difference counter value after the calculation is a value causing a carry-down, the difference counter value is corrected to “0” (initial value “0” is set). A method for determining whether or not a carry has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value as described above, for example, when the payout number is larger than the bet number, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, in a game during the normal section, the difference counter value increases by the number of payouts when there is a payout based on the small role winning, but then the number of payouts If becomes less than the number of bets, it eventually becomes “0”.

FIG. 36 is a diagram (slump graph) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value, where (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis represents the number of games, and the vertical axis represents the difference number.
Example 1 shows an example in which the difference number first advances in the negative direction as the game progresses, but the difference number starts to increase along with the start of the AT, for example. The difference counter is counted as “0” when the difference number reaches the lowest value in the progress of the game. Therefore, the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference counter as an increase amount of the difference number. Is done. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, the advantageous section ends (the next game is controlled to be a game in the normal section).

Note that when the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)”, the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. For example, when the difference counter is “2400 (D)” at the end of the current game, the current game Then, the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied.
In the next game, if it is assumed that the maximum difference number in the gaming machine is acquired, the bet number is “1” and the payout number is “15”, so the difference number in the next game is “+14”. The difference counter value at the end of the next game is “2414 (D)”. When the difference counter is “2414 (D)”, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is “2414 (D)”.

The determination of whether or not the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)” is not limited to reading and determining the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53, but temporarily storing it in a register for updating or the like. It is also included to determine the difference number counter value (hereinafter the same).
Further, when it is determined whether or not “2400 (D)” is exceeded based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, when it is determined that “2400 (D)” is not exceeded, The register difference counter value is stored (saved) in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when it is determined that “2400 (D)” is exceeded, control is performed so that the difference counter value is not stored in the RWM 53 and the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 is cleared. It is also possible.

  In addition, as in Example 1, Example 2 shows an example in which the difference number progresses in the negative direction as the game progresses, but the difference number starts to increase from the middle, for example, as AT starts. . In Example 2, even when the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)”, the cumulative value of the difference is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous interval is terminated. That is, if the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” from the time when the difference number becomes the minimum value, regardless of the cumulative value of the difference number with the progress of the game so far, the advantageous interval (The next game is controlled so as to be a game in the normal section).

When the difference counter is updated during the normal interval, the difference counter may exceed “2400 (D)” even during the normal interval. For example, such a situation may occur when a special role is won many times and a special game is repeated. In such a case,
1) A method of updating the difference counter value as it is until an advantageous section is started;
2) When “2400 (D)” is exceeded, there is a method of resetting the difference counter value to “0” at that time.
For example, when the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)” during the advantageous interval, when the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the advantageous interval, whether the process is in the advantageous interval or not. However, if the process is executed regardless of whether the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)” during the normal interval, it is cleared.

On the other hand, if the process of clearing the difference counter is a process peculiar to the advantageous section, the difference counter is not cleared even if the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)” during the normal section.
When the advantageous section is started (first game in the advantageous section), the difference counter is cleared (initial value “0” is set. Step S354 in FIG. 45 described later). Therefore, there is no problem regardless of the number of difference counters before the start of the advantageous section.
And
1) When the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)” during the advantageous period,
2) When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games,
Satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section.
When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the difference counter is cleared (initialized). The reason why the difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section is to prevent data (value) relating to the advantageous section from being carried over to the normal section when the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is shifted to. The difference counter is cleared in step S435 in FIG.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous interval, where (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the number of differences decreases with the progress of the game, and the number of differences further decreases from the time when the advantageous section starts (“A” in the figure) to the time “B” in the figure. An example is shown. Note that AT does not start at the same time as the beginning of the advantageous section, and at the beginning of the advantageous section, CZ, precursor, and AT preparation are in progress. In the case of a specification that starts in the middle of waiting for a replay to be performed, the difference may decrease even after starting the advantageous section. Even when AT is started, the difference number may decrease if the push order bell does not win in the middle.

Since the difference counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it is “0” at the time “A” in the figure. Further, as described above, under the situation where the difference number is decreasing, the difference counter value maintains “0”. Therefore, the difference counter value remains “0” from the point “A” to the point “B” in the figure.
Further, an example is shown in which the difference number starts to increase from the “B” point. As a result, the difference counter value also increases. When it is determined that the difference counter value has exceeded “2400 (D)” (when the point “C” is reached in the figure), it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the advantageous section is terminated. (Move to normal section).

  Thus, not the difference from the start of the advantageous section, but the positive count by the difference counter is started at the time when the difference number reaches the minimum value (“B”) after the start of the advantageous section. It is no longer possible to give medals to the player beyond the range where the number of balls has increased (the range from “B” to “C” in FIG. 37A). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being excited.

The above point will be described more specifically by taking numerical values as examples.
For example, if the specification is such that AT is started by lottery after starting an advantageous section, the difference may decrease as the game progresses when the advantageous section is non-AT.
For example, it is assumed that the player X wins the advantageous section and the advantageous section is started, but the AT is not started and the game is stopped when the difference number becomes “−200”.

Next, it is assumed that when the player Y starts playing with the gaming machine, the player wins the AT when the difference number becomes “−50”, and the AT is started. Then, after starting the advantageous section, when the advantageous section (AT) is continued until the difference exceeds “+2400”, the player Y can acquire “2400 + 250 = 2650 medals”. .
Therefore, after starting the advantageous section as described above, by setting an end condition such as “from the time when the difference number reaches the minimum value until it exceeds“ +2400 ”, for example, another player's margin To prevent them from being acquired, so as not to provoke gambling.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 37B shows an example in which the difference number decreases in the normal section, turns to positive from the “D” point in the middle, and further starts the advantageous section from the “E” point. In such a case, as described above, when the difference counter value is updated including the normal interval, the difference counter value is positive at the time “E” in the drawing. However, the difference counter value is initialized (cleared, that is, updated to “0”) at the start of the advantageous section (“E” in the figure).
Therefore, the increase before the advantageous section (the increase from “D” to “E”) is not counted by the difference counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to be positively counted from the “E” point, and the advantageous section is ended when “2400 (D)” is exceeded.

The description returns to FIG.
The address “F067 (H)” is a storage area of the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not AT is in progress, and is set to “0” during non-AT and set to “1” during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to “1” is when the AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 of FIG. 46 described later. The AT flag is turned off at the end of the game in the final game of the AT, and is executed, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50) described later. In addition, the AT flag is included in the data that is cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section.

The address “F068 (H)” is a storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games in the AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous section clear counter, the AT game frequency counter stops counting (subtraction) thereafter when it becomes “0”.
The AT game number counter is updated (subtracted) during the AT after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (step S281 in FIG. 41 described later).

In this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed “255 (D)”, the AT game number counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the maximum number of AT games is “255 (D)” or less, the AT game number counter may be constituted by a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when shifting to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT game number counter. The initial value may be a fixed value or may be determined by lottery or the like when winning the AT. Further, after determining the initial value, the number of AT games may be updated to “0” without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, the number of AT games may be increased when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT, and the number of AT games may be increased when the player wins in the extra lottery. In this case, the increment is added to the AT game number counter.
This AT game number counter is also included in the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

  In this embodiment, since the game number management AT is illustrated, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of AT, an initial value of the difference number that can be acquired is set. Also, if the winning combination is won, the additional difference number is added. Then, every time there is a payout, the difference number of the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes “0”, the AT is terminated.

Next, each process during the game will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50. When the power is turned on, the program starting process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.
In FIG. 38, when the program is started in step S201, the main control board 50 initializes the register in the next step S202. Specific processing includes, for example, setting of the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, setting of the interrupt type (for example, setting to maskable interrupt), and parity bits to be given to the control command to be transmitted (For example, setting to even parity). In other words, initial values necessary for normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.

  Next, proceeding to step S203, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, a power-off process completion flag is stored at the time of power-off (step S484 in FIG. 54 described later). This power-off processing completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power was turned on. Then, when it is determined that the power-off process completed flag is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S204, and when it is determined that the power-off process completed flag is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S204, the checksum of the RWM 53 is calculated. Specifically, a checksum calculation is performed in the same range (for example, a work area used in the program, an unused area, and a stack area) as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed during the power-off process.
In step S205, it is determined whether or not the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is designated from the address of the RWM 53 that calculated the current checksum, and it is determined whether or not the next address is an address for calculating the checksum. When it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S204 to continue the processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S206.

In the subsequent processing, when data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 is initialized, the same processing is executed in the range of the specified RWM 53 in this embodiment.
If it is determined in step S203 that the power-off processing completed flag is not a normal value, the abnormal value is set as the power-off recovery data without executing the checksum calculation of the RWM 53.

  In step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation (all range) of the RWM 53 is normally completed, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, if the power-off processing flag is an abnormal value (“No” in step S203), or if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RWM 53 checksum calculation (entire range) in step S204, An abnormal value is stored as return data.

  In the next step S207, the level data of the predetermined input port 51 is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). In step S208, it is determined whether the designated switch is on based on the level data of the predetermined input port 51. In this embodiment, the “designated switch” is a signal of a door switch (a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 (housing) is opened) among the predetermined input ports 51, a setting door switch. (The door provided on the setting key switch. Note that the setting door may not be provided), the signal of the setting key switch (the switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in a predetermined direction) There are three.

The door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is open), the setting door switch signal is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch signal is on. Allow setting changes only at certain times. When all three designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change process in step S212. However, when at least one designated switch is not on, it is not permitted to move to the setting change process in step S212. .
That is, even when the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed) or the setting door switch signal is off (the setting door is closed), the setting key switch signal Cannot be turned on, and since there is a high possibility of fraud, the transition to the setting change process is not permitted.

Accordingly, when it is determined in step S208 that all the designated switches are on, the process proceeds to step S209. When it is determined that all the designated switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data is abnormal. The power-off recovery data is data stored in the register in step S206.

When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212, and when it is determined that there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether the setting change impossibility flag is on. Here, the setting change impossibility flag is one of data stored in the RWM 53, and cannot be set between a start switch acceptance process (step S279) and a game end check process (step S301) in FIG. Flag to be When the setting change impossibility flag is on, the process proceeds to step S211, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212.
In the present embodiment, the setting change impossibility flag is provided. However, when the setting change is always possible, the setting change impossibility flag may not be provided. In that case, the process corresponding to step S210 is unnecessary.

  In step S211, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S209. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S213, and a power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, an “E1” error is generated, and the process proceeds to step S214 to perform an unrecoverable error process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 of FIG.
First, in step S221, “predetermined range” is stored in the register as an initialization range in the use area of the RWM 53. Here, “in use area” refers to an area for storing data related to the progress of the game in the storage area of the RWM 53. All the ranges shown in FIG. 35 are within the use area. On the other hand, “outside use area” to be described later refers to an area for storing data not related to the progress of the game in the storage area of the RWM 53. Specifically, a storage area that stores data related to the display of the management information display LED 74 (role monitor) can be mentioned.

In addition, the “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been normally executed, and the set value data (address “F000 (H)”), gaming state (for example, RT state), winning An initializing range in which the flag of a special role having a character is not initialized is defined as a “predetermined range”.
Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment to be described later, when the BB2 is inside before the power is turned off (when the winning flag of BB2 is on), the setting change process is executed if the power is turned off normally. Even so, the winning flag of BB2 is maintained.
On the other hand, the “predetermined range” does not include data relating to advantageous sections and ATs. Therefore, in FIG. 35, addresses “F061 (H)” to “F068 (H)” are the targets of initialization here.

Next, proceeding to step S222, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S224, and the “predetermined range” stored in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S222 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S223.
In step S <b> 223, the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range in the usage area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power interruption is not normal, and is the entire range in the use area including the set value data (address “F000 (H)”).

  In step S224, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 (within the use area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S225, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S224 has ended. When it is determined that the initialization is complete, the process proceeds to step S226.

  In step S226, the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved. The reason for saving the AF register is that the F (flag) register is originally saved here, but the AF register is saved for convenience of instructions. Then, the process proceeds to step S227, and a predetermined range outside the use area is stored as the initialization range of the RWM 53. The “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been normally executed.

In the next step S228, as in step S222, it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S230, and the “predetermined range” stored in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S228 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S229.
In step S229, the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power interruption is not normal, and is an entire range including a ring buffer that stores the number of games and the number of payouts for performing ratio display.
In step S230, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S230 has ended. When it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S232.
In step S232, the AF register saved in step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, a setting for starting interrupt processing is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing designated in step S202 are set. Since the timer interrupt process is used as the interrupt process in the present embodiment, a process for setting a timer interrupt cycle (“2.235 ms” in the present embodiment) is included. Then, interrupt processing is executed after the processing of step S233. In other words, interrupt processing is not executed before “interrupt activation”.
In the next step S234, an output request set at the start of setting change is performed. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in a register in order to notify the sub control board 80 that the setting change process is started.

The “output request set” means processing for setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. The control command here does not mean only a command that is actually transmitted, but also a command that is a source of a command that is actually transmitted.
Next, proceeding to step S235, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing a control command for transmission to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

  Next, proceeding to step S236, the main control board 50 executes a 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) for starting the setting change. In this embodiment, the process waits until the interrupt count “224” is counted (“1” is subtracted for each interrupt count, and the set interrupt count becomes “0”). This standby is also called delay processing or standby processing because the main processing does not proceed first. During this waiting time (during the 2-byte time waiting process), the main process is prevented from proceeding, but the interrupt process is executed.

  As described above, the 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) is executed in step S236 while the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side is completed in a relatively short time, whereas the sub-control board 80 side. Since the initialization process of the RWM 83 takes time, the main control board 50 side executes a 2-byte time waiting process. In particular, the main control board 50 cannot know whether or not the initialization process has been completed on the sub-control board 80 side.

Therefore, when the initialization process is still in progress on the sub control board 80 side, the initialization has already been completed on the main control board 50 side, and the process has further progressed. It is possible to prevent the progress of the control process 80 from becoming out of synchronization.
In addition, after execution of the output request set and control command set 1 at the start of setting change, the sub control board 80 starts initialization of the RWM 83, but sets a sufficient time as a wait time for completion of the initialization of the RWM 83. To do. Accordingly, after the initialization process of the RWM 83 is completed on the sub control board 80 side, the process proceeds to the processes after step S238 on the main control board 50 side.

  The control command at the start of setting change set in steps S234 and S235 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236. However, while the 2-byte time waiting process is being executed in step S236, the process does not proceed to step S237 and subsequent steps (the main process does not proceed).

  After the completion of the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236, the process proceeds to step S237, and setting change display data is stored as acquired number data. Next, proceeding to step S238, the value “00011100 (B)” corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag.

When the interrupt process is executed after these processes by the processes in steps S237 and S238, the digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (the acquired number display LED 78 and the set value display LED 73) can be turned on.
Specifically, in the interrupt process executed after the process of step S238, “8” can be displayed on the digits 3a and 4a (“88” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78), and the digit b5 (set value display) is displayed. The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
Since the acquired number data and the LED display request flag are initialized by the initialization process in the use area of the RWM 53 in step S224, the value before step S237 is “0”.

In step S239, an interrupt waiting process is executed. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. Then, after one interruption time elapses, the process proceeds to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether or not an operation of a setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) is detected. Here, it is determined whether or not the setting change switch is turned on by determining rising data of the input port 51 including the setting change switch. If it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S241. If it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the set value data (address “F000 (H)”) of the RWM 53 is stored (updated). When the interrupt process is executed after the set value data is updated, the set value display LED 73 displays the updated value.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether or not an operation of the start switch 41 is detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S243, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above processing, step S239 (waiting for interrupt) is provided for clearing the rising data of the setting change switch.
For example, when the process of step S239 is not provided, if it is determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is on, the set value data is updated in step S241, and the start switch 41 is turned on in the next step S242. If not, the process proceeds to step S240, and it is determined whether or not the rising data of the setting change switch is ON.

  If it is determined in step S240 that the switch is turned on, the rising data of the setting change switch is turned off if interrupt processing is executed even once. However, until the interruption process is executed, it is determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is on. As a result, the set value data continues to rise by “2” or more just by operating the setting change switch once. Therefore, in step S239, an interrupt waiting process is executed.

  In step S243, it is determined whether or not a setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) is turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S244, where the acquired number data is cleared (set to “0”). This is to delete the display of “88” indicating that the setting is being changed. Next, the process proceeds to step S245, and the value “00011111 (B)” corresponding to normal is stored in the LED display request flag.

By the interrupt process executed after the process of step S244, the display of the digits 3a and 4a (acquired number display LED 78) is changed from “88” to “00”.
Further, “0” is displayed on the digits 1a and 2a (“00” is displayed on the credit amount display LED 76) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S245. Further, since the bit corresponding to the digit 5 of the LED display request flag is “1”, the digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be turned on. On the other hand, the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) is not lit because it is not being changed or checked.

  Next, proceeding to step S246, as in step S234, an output request set at the end of setting change is performed. In this process, the setting change process is terminated, and the data corresponding to the determined setting value (specifically, the setting value data stored in the address “F000 (H)”) is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 side. This is a process for setting a control command to notify the user. Next, the process proceeds to step S247, and the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S235. Then, the process proceeds to step S248, and shifts to a main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, register values, instruction processing of the main process before interrupt processing, etc.) at the time of the occurrence of an electric interruption when an electric interruption occurs. Of these, it indicates an area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S252, the set value data is read and whether the range of the set value data is the normal range (whether it is within the range of the set value 1 to the set value 6), in other words, “F000 (H)”. It is determined whether or not the set value data is within the range of “0 (H)” to “5 (H)”. When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253. When it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an “E6” error occurs and the process proceeds to step S264, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process. .

In step S253, an unused area in the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register as an initialization range. In the next step S254, the RWM 53 in the range set in step S253 is initialized. Here, it is conceivable that a value is stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. In the unlikely event that values are stored in the unused area, it may lead to fraudulent acts such as fraud, so the unused area should be initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day). Yes.
In the next step S255, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (an unused area in the used area) has been completed.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as the process of step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. In the next step S258, initialization of the RWM 53 in the range set in step S257 is executed.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether or not initialization of the RWM 53 (an unused area outside the used area) has been completed. If it is determined that the process has been completed, the process proceeds to step S260. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This process is the same as the process of step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, the predetermined input port 51 is read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 51 before power-off to the latest data.
In step S262, an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process for setting a timer interruption period, and is the same process as step S233 described above.
In step S263, the power-off process completion flag is cleared, that is, set to “0”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the above program start process, setting change process, and power recovery process,
1) In the program start process of FIG. 38, if “No” is determined in step S203 (when the power-off process completed flag is an abnormal value), or if there is an abnormality in the checksum calculation in step S204, step In S206, an abnormal value is stored as return data after power-off. In this case, since “Yes” is determined in step S209, the process proceeds to the setting change process (FIG. 39) in step S212.
In the setting change process of FIG. 39, since “No” is determined in step S222 and step S228, initialization of all ranges within the use area and outside the use area of the RWM 53, that is, “F000 (H)” and thereafter. All data of is initialized.

  2) In the program start process, when it is determined that the power-off process completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation is performed normally, the process proceeds to the setting change process. Since “Yes” is determined in S228, the process proceeds to Step S224 and Step S230, respectively, and the designated range (inside the use area and outside the use area) of the RWM 53 is initialized.

  3) In the program start process, when it is determined that the power-off process completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation is performed normally, if the setting change process is not performed, the power-return process (step S213) 40). In this case, in FIG. 40, if the set value is normal in step S252, the RWM 53 is normally initialized (within the use area and outside the use area) when the power is turned on. As described above, this initialization is a process of initializing unused areas of the RWM 53.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the present embodiment. The main process is one game process. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated every game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. As described above, the stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, register values, instruction processing of the main process before interrupt processing, etc.) at the time of the occurrence of an electrical interruption when an electrical interruption occurs. The setting of the stack pointer is a process of setting a register value to an initial value in the RWM 53 area.

In the next step S272, game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 42 to be described later, and is a process such as generation, update, and storage of an operation state flag.
In the next step S273, a bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet at the present time, and reads bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, the presence / absence of a bet medal is determined based on the bet number read in step S273.

If it is determined in step S274 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S276. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process in step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on, and if it is on, a process such as shifting to the setting confirmation mode is performed.
In step S276, management processing of inserted medals is performed. This processing is processing for determining whether or not a medal has been maintained, determining whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated, and the like.

  In the next step S277, a soft random number update process is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding “1” by one) a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the role lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of “0” to “65535 (D)”. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to a value before update may be executed.

  In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the specified number of the game, “No” is determined in step S278.

In step S279, processing at the time of accepting the start switch is executed. This process is a process for setting a setting change impossibility flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reel 31, setting an output count for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer, and the like. .
In the next step S280, the acquired number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if instruction specified number display data and payout number data have been stored as acquired number data before that, it is cleared.
Here, although details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, a specified number may be indicated (displayed) on the acquired number display LED 78 before the game is started. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the specified instruction number display data may be stored as acquired number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared and a process of displaying “00” on the acquired number display LED 78 (or turning it off) is executed.
Also, at the time of step S280, if the previous game payout number data is stored as the acquired number data, the payout number data is cleared in this step S280.

Next, proceeding to step S281, the main control board 50 executes an AT game number update process. This process is a process shown in FIG. 43, which will be described later, and is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during an AT. Therefore, this processing is not executed during non-AT.
Whether or not to increase the number of AT games during AT is determined based on the result lottery result by the role lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare role is won, it is possible to determine the number of games added to the AT. Therefore, when adding the number of AT games and adding the added amount to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the processing of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 41).
Note that after the start switch is received (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but after the combination lottery process in step S282 or after all reels 31 are stopped (after step S290). The AT game number counter may be updated.
In the specification of the difference number management AT, when the AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is provided after all reels 31 are stopped and after the medal payout process by winning is completed (after step S300). Update.

  In step S282, the winning combination lottery means 61 executes the winning combination lottery (corresponding to the aforementioned “internal lottery”) at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. In addition, the random number value at the time of the lottery is acquired in step S279. In step S282, processing is performed to determine whether the acquired random number value is a random value corresponding to any winning combination using the combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section transition lottery process. This process is the process of FIG. 44 described later. In the present embodiment, the AT lottery is executed together with the advantageous section shift lottery. As shown in FIG. 44, which will be described later, when it is in the advantageous section but is not in AT (for example, when the main game state is CZ), AT lottery processing is executed in step S348 in FIG.
In step S284, a push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 48. When the instruction function is activated in the game during the AT (the push order instruction number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78), the push order instruction number is generated, This is a process of displaying the pressing order instruction information.

In the next step S285, a reel rotation start preparation process is executed. This process executes a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and proceeds to the next step S286 if the minimum game time has elapsed.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is “1834 (D) (2.235 ms × 1834≈4099 ms)”. It is. If it is determined in step S279 that the minimum game time is “0”, an initial value “1834 (D)” is set as the minimum game time (timer value). Then, “1” is subtracted from the minimum game time for each interrupt process. When proceeding to step S285 of the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 controls the drive of the motor 32 and starts the rotation of the reel 31. When the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, the operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, the stop acceptance of the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not an operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 based on the lottery result of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31. The stop position is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

  In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 are stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 31 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S290. When it is determined that all the reels 31 are not stopped, the process returns to step S287. .

In step S290, the acquired number data is cleared (set to “0”). For example, when the instruction function is activated during the AT, push order instruction information (for example, “= 1”) may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes “00” by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S290.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, “00010011 (B)” may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for extinction may be provided as segment data, and the data may be output.

In step S291, symbol display determination is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped on the active line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304. If it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is executed based on the stop position determination table, normally, the reel 31 does not stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the display determination of the symbol, when a symbol that should not be displayed (a kicked symbol) is displayed on the active line, it is determined to be abnormal (“E5” error), and the process proceeds to step S304. Perform non-recoverable error handling.

If it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred and the process proceeds to step S293, the payout number updating process is executed. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the above-mentioned payout number data and payout number data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination (M_WIN_PAY). This process is shown in FIG. 49 described later. In step S295, an interrupt waiting process is performed. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is prohibited. By the processing of these steps S295 and S296, interruption is prohibited immediately after interruption.

  In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as step S256 in FIG. In step S298, the ratio setting process is executed. The “ratio setting process” is a process of executing various counter value updates, ratio calculation, and the like in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). In step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and interrupt is permitted (restarted) in the next step S300. In this way, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited.

  In addition, interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the ratio setting process. The ratio setting process is a process using a program stored outside the use area, and when a program outside the use area is executed in the main process. This is because if the interrupt process is entered, the program in the use area and the program outside the use area are mixed and the process becomes complicated.

In step S301, a game end check process (_M_GAME_CHK) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 50 to be described later, and performs a condition device (winning combination) flag clear process and the like. In step S302, an output request set at the end of the game and a control command set 1 are performed in the next step S303. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has been completed.
When the process of step S303 is completed, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248) again.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start set process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG.
First, in step S311, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). Since the game standby display time of this embodiment is set to “26846” interrupt (≈60000 ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)), “26846” is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, the value is subtracted by “1” for each interrupt process from this point.

When the game standby display time becomes “0”, the acquired number data is cleared in step S275 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. As a result, “00” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out in the previous game is “8” and the player pays out by operating the checkout switch 43 and ends the game, “00” is displayed after about 1 minute. Is done. Thereby, it has the effect that a vacant stand can be reduced by being able to recognize a hall clerk and another player as a vacant stand.
The acquisition number display LED 78 is not limited to displaying “00”, but the acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digit and lower digit) may be turned off, or the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 is turned off and the lower digit is displayed. May display “0”. In any case, a display that can be recognized as a vacant stand by a hall clerk or another player may be executed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S312, and the push order instruction number initialization process is executed. This process is a process of clearing the push order instruction number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S313, data of the symbol combination display flag is acquired. In the next step S314, it is determined whether or not a 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB is “1” in the symbol combination display flag data, “Yes” is determined, and when it is “0”, “No” is determined. When it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315. When it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the acquirable number at the time of 1BB operation (at the time of 1BB game) is stored. This process is a process of storing the maximum number that can be acquired in 1BB game in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S316.
In step S316, an operating state flag is generated. This process is a process of generating the value of the operating state flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
In the next step S317, the operation state flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operation state flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operating state flag (stored in, for example, the A register at this time) at the address “F030 (H)” of the RWM 53. As a result, the information on the operation state flag up to that point is replaced with the information on the operation state flag updated in step S317.
For example, when the symbol combination of 1BB is displayed (at the time of 1BB winning), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is changed from “0” to “1”.

  In the next step S319, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has started. In this embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the 2 games (or at the time of the 2nd prize), but when the 1BB game end condition is not satisfied ( When the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is “1”), it is set to “1” in this game start set process. If it is determined in step S319 that the RB operation has started, the process proceeds to step S320. If it is determined that the RB operation has not started, the process proceeds to step S321.

  In step S320, the number of games and the number of winnings at the time of RB operation are stored. This process stores (stores) “2 (H)” in a game number counter (not shown in FIG. 35) at the time of RB operation provided in the RWM 53, and at the time of RB operation provided in the RWM 53. In this process, “2 (H)” is stored (stored) in a winning counter (not shown in FIG. 35). Then, the process proceeds to step S321.

  It should be noted that the game number counter at the time of RB operation and the winning number counter at the time of RB operation are both set to “2 (H)” as an initial value, and each time the number of games or the number of winnings increases by “1”, respectively. This counter is decremented by "1". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial value of these counter values is set to “0”, and is incremented by “1” each time the number of games or winnings increases by “1”. H) ”may be determined.

In the next step S321, it is determined whether or not a condition for specifying the specified number is satisfied. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no case where a prescribed number is instructed. However, in the twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, there is a case where a specified number is instructed at the start of the game, so this process is included in this flowchart. When it is determined that the condition for specifying the specified number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and when it is determined that the condition for specifying the specified number is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, the specified instruction number display data is stored as acquired number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the specified number “2” is indicated, and when the specified number “2” is indicated, “0A” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. The specified instruction number display data for displaying “0A” is defined as “0B (H)” (details will be described later). In this step S322, “0B (H)” is obtained as acquired number data. Remember.
The reason why “0A” is displayed instead of “02” when the specified number “2” is displayed is to avoid confusion with the number of payouts, the error number, and the pressing order instruction information.
The number of payouts is any one of “01” to “15”, and “A” is not displayed in the lower digit. Also, the error number is not displayed as “A” in the lower digits.

Here, the error numbers (numbers displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 when an error occurs) in the present embodiment are as follows.
HP: Medal jam error HE: Medal empty error (no hopper 35 medal)
H0: Discharge sensor 37 error CE: Medal retention error CP: Medal improper passage error CH: Passage sensor 46 error C0: Insert sensor 44 error C1: Medal error input error FE: Sub tank (not shown in FIG. 1) Full dE: Open front door E1: Power failure recovery error E5: Display judgment error E6: Setting value error E7: Random number error

Note that the types of errors are not limited to the above. An error whose upper digit of the error number is “E” means an unrecoverable error.
As described above, since “A” is not displayed in the lower digit of the error number, the error number and the specified number of instructions are not confused.
Further, the push order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is “= 1” to “= 6”. Therefore, the pressing order instruction information and the specified number of instructions are not confused.

  In addition, in step S322, before the specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data, the payout number data in the previous game may be stored as the acquired number data (in the case where the small role is won in the previous game). ). The number-of-payout data is stored in step S399 of a medal payout process by winning (FIG. 49 to be described later). Therefore, when storing the specified prescribed number display data, it may be overwritten on the previous payout number data. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process of clearing the acquired number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

  In the next step S323, based on the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S313, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination for replay has been stopped. When it is determined that the replay symbol combination has been stopped, the process proceeds to step S324. When it is determined that the replay symbol combination has not been stopped, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads a bet medal. This process is a process of reading the number of medals (betting number data) bet in the previous game. In step S325, automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of storing the bet number read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S326, and the output request for the operation state is set. In the next step S327, the control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that the replay has been activated, 1BB has been activated, or the like is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

It should be noted that the previous (meaning before the filing of the present application, not “known”, the same shall apply hereinafter) is the time of adding the number of bets, specifically, during the main process of FIG. In the medal management process, a clear process for the acquired number data was executed. As a result, even if the small role was won in the previous game and the payout number data at the time of small role winning was stored as the acquired number data, the acquired number data was cleared during the bet number addition process.
However, in this embodiment, when the condition for specifying the specified number is satisfied before the medal management process is executed, the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data.
When the specified number is instructed, it is necessary to prevent the specified specified number display data from being cleared during the betting process. In the present embodiment, when the specified number is instructed, the state in which the specified number is instructed is maintained at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the acquired number data is not cleared in the medal management process, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared in the process of step S280 in FIG.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the specified number is instructed, the specified instruction number display data is cleared after the start switch 41 is operated. However, when the specified number is not instructed, the bet number adding process is performed as before. The acquired number data may be cleared (by medal management processing). In this case, for example, in the bet number addition process, before executing the clear process of the acquired number data, it is determined whether or not the specified number has been instructed in the current game, and it is determined that the specified number has been instructed. Does not clear the acquired number data, and clears the acquired number data when it is determined that the specified number is not instructed.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the AT game number counter update processing in step S281 in FIG.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is on (“1”). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S332, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, the AT game number counter is not updated unless the AT is in progress.

In step S332, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is “3”. This process reads the bet number data or automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 and determines whether or not the bet number of the game is “3”. When the bet number is “3”, the process proceeds to step S333, and when the bet number is not “3”, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In the present embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated only when a game is played with the bet number (specified number) “3” during AT (execution of the instruction function). In other words, even during an AT, when a game is started with a bet number (specified number) “2”, the AT game number counter is not updated.
On the other hand, as will be described later, the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter are updated regardless of the bet number.

In step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts “1” from the value of the AT game number counter. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
In the case of the difference number management AT, when the AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not subtracted (updated) when the bet number is not “3” even during the AT.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transition lottery process in step S283 in FIG.
In this embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous section transition lottery process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section transition lottery process and the AT lottery process are executed independently. May be. For example, in FIG. 41, step S283 may be limited to the advantageous section transition lottery process, and the AT lottery process may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether or not the bet number (specified number) of the current game is “3”. When it is determined that the bet number is “3”, the process proceeds to step S342, and when it is determined that the bet number is not “3”, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
Therefore, when the bet number (specified number) is “3”, the advantageous section transition lottery in step S345 described later and the advantageous section transition processing in step S347 (processing relating to the advantageous section) can be executed, and step S348 is performed. The AT lottery process (process related to the instruction function) can be executed. However, when the number of bets (specified number) is not “3”, these processes are not executed.

  In step S342, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section type flag is “0”. When it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is “0” (non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is “1” (advantageous section), step S348 is performed. Proceed to When the advantageous section type flag is “1” (when it is already in the advantageous section), the advantageous section shift lottery is not performed, but the AT lottery is performed.

In step S343, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery result in the current game is the target lottery result, that is, whether or not the winning combination for the advantageous section has been won. Here, although detailed explanation is omitted, for example, when a special role is elected alone, when a special role and a small role are duplicated, or when a small role (rare small role) is won, the result is a target lottery result. to decide. Further, the target lottery result does not include non-winning. This is because, in a game in which the winning combination is not won (a game in which the condition device is not activated), the process related to the advantageous section is not executed.
If it is determined in step S343 that the result is the target lottery result, the process proceeds to step S344. If it is determined that the result is not the target lottery result, the process according to this flowchart is terminated (that is, the advantageous section lottery is not performed or the advantageous section is not selected). Will be elected).

In step S344, it is judged whether it is a specific lottery result among object lottery results. Here, although detailed explanation is omitted, for example, among the winning lots, the middle cherries (single winning or overlapping winning with a special winning role) are set as the final winning role (the winning role) When the middle cherries are won, it may be determined that the result is a specific lottery result.
When it is determined in step S344 that the result is a specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that the result is not a specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, if the result is not the specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and if the result is the specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition process (step S347) is executed without performing the advantageous section transition lottery (always shift to the advantageous section). To do). Even if the result is a specific lottery, it is possible to execute the advantageous section transition lottery and set the winning section transition lottery with a probability of 100%.

In step S345, an advantageous section shift lottery is performed. As an advantageous section shift lottery, for example, using a lottery table in which a number corresponding to a role lottery result is determined in advance, a lottery is performed in the same manner as in the role lottery. For example, when the winning number is “A”, the winning section is won with a probability of 35%, when the winning number is “B”, the winning section is won with a probability of 60%, and so on. Is mentioned.
In addition, when the lottery result is not a lottery target for the advantageous section, “No” is obtained in step S343. Therefore, in the case of “Yes” in step S343, that is, the lottery result that is the subject of the advantageous segment shift lottery. In such a case, in the advantageous section transition lottery, a lottery is performed using a lottery table having a number of “1” or more at least. However, the winning probability of the advantageous section shift lottery is set to “1/17500” or more.

Next, proceeding to step S346, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has been won in the lottery at step S345. When it is determined that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S347. When it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S347, an advantageous section transition process is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 45, and is a process for setting a flag and a counter based on the winning of the advantageous section.
In the next step S348, an AT lottery is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
Note that the AT is not limited to the example of the present embodiment, and AT may always be started (without performing AT lottery) when shifting to an advantageous section. Alternatively, it may be determined that a non-AT is always used when shifting to the advantageous section, and whether or not AT is executed after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, after a predetermined number of games have been consumed).

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transition processing in step S347 of FIG.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on the advantageous section type flag (“1”). Next, proceeding to step S352, the main control board 50 sets the game zone initial value “1500 (D)” of the advantageous section in the advantageous section clear counter.

In the next step S353, “0” is set in the difference counter. The difference counter is continuously updated during the normal section (non-advantageous section), and when it is not the advantageous section, the process of step S353 is not necessary when “0” is always set at the end of the game. However, the initial value “0” may be set for noise prevention or the like.
Since the initialization process including the difference counter is executed at the end of the advantageous section, the difference counter is “0” at the start of the normal section. Therefore, in the case of the specification in which the difference counter is updated only in the advantageous section, the difference counter at the start of the advantageous section is “0”, so that the processing in step S353 can be omitted. .
On the other hand, when the difference counter is continuously updated even during the non-favorable interval as in the present embodiment, the difference counter may be positive even immediately before the advantageous interval transition. For this reason, “0” is set to the difference counter in step S353. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in step S348 of FIG.
First, in step S361, an AT lottery is executed based on the result lottery result. This lottery may include performing an AT lottery using a lottery table in which the number of wins is determined for each combination lottery result, as in step S345.
The AT lottery does not necessarily need to be executed. For example, a role lottery result that is not determined by the AT and a role lottery result that is always determined by the AT may be provided.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the AT is won in the AT lottery in step S361. If it is determined that the AT has been won, the process proceeds to step S363. If it is determined that the AT has not been won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes AT initial game number determination processing. This process is shown in FIG. 47 described later. Next, proceeding to step S364, the main control board 50 sets the main gaming state to AT and turns on the AT flag. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
Here, the main gaming state of the present embodiment includes normal (non-advantageous section), CZ (advantageous area and non-AT), AT, and 1BB operation. Although it is possible to provide a precursor as the main gaming state after winning the AT and before starting the AT, in this embodiment, for simplification of explanation, when the AT is won, the AT is started immediately. And Further, the information on the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S362 that the AT has not been won and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main gaming state to CZ. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the AT initial game number determination processing in step S363 in FIG.
In FIG. 47, in step S371, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery result in the current game is a winning winning combination. As described above, the rare combination such as the middle cherry is set as the final combination. When it is determined that the confirmed combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S372. When it is determined that the confirmed combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the AT initial game number is set to “100 (D)” and stored in the AT game number counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of AT games is set to “30 (D)” and stored in the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is finished.

In the example of FIG. 47, the specification is that the initial number of games of the AT is distributed according to whether or not the confirmed combination is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games can be calculated using the lottery table based on the combination lottery result. A lottery may be executed. In other words, even if it is one winning lottery result, any one of the plurality of game times may be selected.
Also during the AT, the AT game number determination process shown in FIG. 47 may be executed as an AT game number addition lottery. When the winning lottery for the AT game number is won, the determined additional number is added to the AT game number counter.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether or not an instruction condition (condition for operating the instruction function) is satisfied. When the game is an AT and a winning combination such as a pushing order bell is won, it is determined that the instruction condition is satisfied.
In addition, when the advantageous game is won in this game (“Yes” in step S346 in FIG. 44) and the AT is won (“Yes” in step S362 in FIG. 46), the advantageous zone from the next game is played. This time, the game is not an advantageous section. Therefore, since the instruction function cannot be activated in this game, “No” is determined in the step S381.
If it is determined in step S381 that the instruction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S382. If it is determined that the instruction condition is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is “3”. This process determines whether the bet number is “3” by reading the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM 53.
When it is determined that the bet number is “3”, the process proceeds to step S383, and when it is determined that the bet number is not “3”, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for operating the instruction function (execution of processing related to the instruction function) is set to be the number of bets “3” (one specified number). For this reason, for example, even when the game is started with the number of bets “2” during AT and a winning combination (for example, push order bell) is won, the instruction function is not activated (the correct push order is Not notified).

In the next step S383, a winning number (condition device number) is set. The winning number (condition device number) determined in the role lottery process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. In step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
In step S384, a push order instruction number table (not shown) is set. Here, the head address of the push order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to next Step S385.

In step S385, designated address data is set. In this process, a value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is used as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (condition device number) is used as an offset value, and data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the head address of the push order instruction number table is acquired. As a result, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is stored in the A register.
In step S386, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area (an area for storing the push order instruction number, not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
In the next step S387, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored as the acquisition number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, the winning combination is assumed to be the same as FIG. 58 (the twelfth embodiment) described later. Then, when winning numbers “3” to “8” are won during AT, a push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the acquired number data is as follows.
Winning number “3”: Push order instruction number “A1 (H)”
Winning number “4”: Push order instruction number “A2 (H)”
Winning number “5”: Push order instruction number “A3 (H)”
Winning number “6”: Push order instruction number “A4 (H)”
Winning number “7”: Push order instruction number “A5 (H)”
Winning number “8”: Push order instruction number “A6 (H)”

  For example, when the winning number “3” is won during the AT, the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” is stored as acquired number data by the push order instruction number setting process of FIG. Accordingly, the push order instruction information “= 1” corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 55 described later.

After step S387, the process proceeds to step S388, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section display LED flag is on (lit). When it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether or not the game state (RT or main game state) of the current game is a game state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”. Note that whether or not the game state in which the section Sim appearance rate exceeds “1” is set in advance, and here, it is determined whether or not the game state is set in advance. Specifically, the current RT and main game state data is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and when this data is read, the game state in which the game state of the current game exceeds the section Sim appearance rate “1” It is determined whether or not. When it is determined that the game state in which the section Sim play rate exceeds “1” is determined, the process proceeds to step S390, and when it is determined that the game state in which the section Sim play rate exceeds “1” is not determined, the processing according to this flowchart ends. To do. In step S390, the advantageous section display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit by the interrupt processing executed after step S390. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

As described above, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is not yet lit and the game state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is displayed. Since the condition that must be turned on is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when winning in the advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be lit before the game of the next game is started. Or, after moving to the advantageous section, before operating the instruction function, or even if the section Sim play rate is not in a gaming state exceeding “1”, at any timing (when the arbitrarily set lighting condition is satisfied The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S294 in FIG.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires payout number data. This process is a process of storing the value of the payout number data in the A register.
In step S392, it is determined whether or not a medal has been paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the payout number data (A register value) is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0”, that is, when it is determined that no medal has been paid out, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, that is, when it is determined that there is a medal payout, the process proceeds to step S393.

In step S393, the value of the credit amount data is acquired.
Next, proceeding to step S394, it is determined whether the number of credits is a limit value. Specifically, when the credit number data acquired in step S393 is “50 (D)”, it is determined that the credit number has reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S398, where the acquired credit number data is “50”. If it is less than (D) ", it is determined that the number of credits has not reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S395.

In step S395, a standby time for adding credits is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 100 ms as the standby time, the number of interrupt processing times “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 100 ms) is set. Specifically, “00000000 (B)” is set as the B register value, and “00101110 (B)” is set as the C register value.
In step S396, a 2-byte time waiting process is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt process and waiting until it becomes “0”.

  When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S396 ends, the process proceeds to step S397, and “1” is added to the value of the credit amount data. Thereby, the display of the credit number display LED 76 becomes “+1” by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S397. For example, the display of the credit number display LED 76 is changed from “08” to “09”. After the process of step S397, the process proceeds to step S399.

When the process proceeds from step S394 to step S398, a single medal payout process (a process of paying out an actual medal from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. In this process, when the hopper motor 36 is driven and the on / off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is detected at a predetermined timing as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, one medal is correctly paid out. to decide.
By the above process, the credit number is added until the credit number reaches the limit value, and when the credit number is the limit value, a process of paying out an actual medal from the hopper 35 is executed.

In step S399, “1” is added to the acquired number data. As a result, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes “+1”. For example, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is changed from “02” to “03”.
In the next step S400, “1” is subtracted from the payout amount data. In this step S400, only the payout number data is updated, and the value of the payout number data buffer is not updated.

  In step S401, it is determined whether or not the medal payout has been completed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the updated payout number data is “0”. When it is determined that the number-of-payout data is “0”, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. When it is determined that the number-of-payout data is not “0”, the process returns to step S393 to continue the process.

In the above payout process, when the payout process for adding “1” to the number of credits is performed, a waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the processes in steps S395 and S396. Thereby, it can be shown to a player so that the display of credit number display LED76 may count up. For example, when the display of the credit number display LED 76 before credit addition is “08” and eight medals are added to this, “display“ 08 ”→ 100 ms standby processing → display“ 09 ”→ 100 ms Standby processing →... → 100 ms standby processing → display “16” On the other hand, if the standby time is not provided when adding “1” to the number of credits, it appears that the display “08” is instantaneously changed to the display “16”.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of credits, a payout sound (“Plululu ... It is also possible to synchronize the credit count up.

On the other hand, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number “50 (D)” and the medals are actually paid out in the process of step S398, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out, and it takes about 100 ms to pay out one piece of medal. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize with the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG.
First, in step S411, processing is performed to clear a condition device flag (also referred to as winning information; stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). This process is a process of clearing other than the special condition machine, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special game has stopped on the active line, the special condition machine is also cleared. In the next step S412, the replay display LED 79f is turned off. This process is a process for setting the bit corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to “0”. In step S413, the replay operation flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the operating state flag to “0”.

In the next step S414, it is determined whether or not the AT game number counter has become “0”. Here, as described above, the AT game number counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main process of FIG. As described above, in this embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated after the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 41). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, step S301 (game end) in FIG. It may be executed before the check process) or in the process of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example of a game number management type AT for updating the AT game number counter is shown. However, in the case of a difference number management type AT, in step S414, the AT difference number counter is set to “0”. Judge whether or not. The AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process by winning (step S294 in FIG. 41).
When it is determined that the AT game number counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S415. When it is determined that the AT game number counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S416. In step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
In step S416, advantageous section counter management is executed. This process is a process for updating the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, and is a process shown in FIG. 51 or 52 described later. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

51 and 52 are flowcharts showing advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 51 shows Example 1 and FIG. 52 shows Example 2.
In the advantageous section counter management, the following processing is executed.
1) Updating the advantageous section clear counter 2) Updating the difference counter 3) Determining whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied 4) When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, initialization (clearing) of data related to the advantageous section )
Further, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of the number of bets (specified number).
In the present embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or a non-favorable section (normal section). However, it may be configured to determine whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous zone and execute the advantageous zone counter management only during the advantageous zone.

In example 1 of FIG. 51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, “F063 (H)” is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, “1” is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register. The subtraction here is, for example, as follows.
"0010 (H)"->"1"subtraction->"000F(H)"
“0001 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “0000 (H)” (zero flag = 1)
“0000 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “0000 (H)” (carry flag = 1)

  As described above, even when “1” is subtracted from “0000 (H)”, no carry occurs, and “0000 (H)” is maintained. In this way, no matter what the value before subtraction is, it is one instruction (one step) that only subtracts “1”, so it is determined whether or not the count value before updating is “0”. Is not necessary, and the process of adding the value of the carry flag after subtraction is also unnecessary. Therefore, the time required for updating the count value can be greatly shortened. Further, by configuring in this way, it is determined from the value of the advantageous section clear counter whether or not it is in the advantageous section, and whether or not the ending condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, the game of the advantageous section is set to 1500). It is also unnecessary to determine whether or not the game has been executed or whether or not any end condition has been satisfied.

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction is “0”. This process is determined based on whether or not the carry flag is “1” in the subtraction process in step S422.
When the carry flag becomes “1” (when the value before subtraction is “0”), the process proceeds to step S436, and when the carry flag is not “1” (when the value before subtraction is not “0”). The process proceeds to step S424. Note that when the carry flag is “1” (when the value before subtraction is “0”), the current game is not a game in the advantageous zone (the game in the current game is a non-advantageous zone (normal zone)). Is).

In step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the subtraction result (after subtraction) in step S422 is “0”. This process is determined based on whether or not the zero flag has become “1” in the subtraction process in step S422. That is, it is determined whether or not the value before subtraction was “1”.
When the zero flag is “1”, the process proceeds to step S435, and when the zero flag is not “1” (when the subtraction result is not “0”), the process proceeds to step S425. When the zero flag becomes “1” (when the subtraction result is “0”), the game in the advantageous section ends in the current game (the next game is a game in the non-advantageous section (normal section)). ) Means.

In step S425, the value of the difference counter is acquired. In this process, the value of the difference counter is read and stored in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S426, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a re-game action symbol is displayed in the current game (whether or not the replay has won a prize). In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is displayed. When it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S434. When it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S427.

In step S427, a payout number data buffer is acquired. This process is a process of reading the payout number data buffer and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, a process of adding the payout number to the difference counter is executed. In this process, the A register value (payout number data buffer value) is added to the HL register value (difference counter), and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register.

In step S429, the value of the bet number data is acquired. This process is a process of reading the bet amount data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the subtraction result in the HL register. Here, when the HL register value becomes less than “0”, the carry flag becomes “1”.

  In the next step S431, it is determined whether or not the subtraction result in step S430 is less than “0”. In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is “1” by subtraction in step S430. If the carry flag is “1”, it is determined that the subtraction result is less than “0” and the process proceeds to step S432. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not “1” (when the subtraction result is not less than “0”), the process proceeds to step S433.

In step S432, a process of clearing the HL register value ("0") is executed. In the next step S433, the difference counter value is stored. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference counter. Accordingly, when the process proceeds to step S433 via step S432, the difference counter becomes “0”.
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value. The upper limit value of the difference counter is set to “2400 (D)”. In this process, a comparison operation between the HL register value and “2401 (D)” is performed. In this comparison operation, when the HL register value is larger, the carry flag is “0”, and when the HL register value is smaller, the carry flag is “1”. Therefore, when the carry flag is “1” (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit value has not been exceeded, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded (when the carry flag is “0”), the process proceeds to step S435. When the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
In step S435, the RWM 53 initializes the storage area related to the advantageous section (clears the data related to the advantageous section). Examples of the data relating to the advantageous section include an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section type flag, a difference counter, an advantageous section display LED flag, an AT flag, an AT game number counter, and the like. Furthermore, information on the main game state can be mentioned. Note that the information regarding the advantageous section does not include the RT state number, the LED display counter, and the like. Specifically, “F000 (H)” to “F052 (H)” are not included in FIG.

For example, the data that is cleared in step S435 does not include an LED display counter.
Here, it is assumed that the LED display counter is cleared. In that case, the LED display counter becomes “0” when the advantageous section ends. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized when it is “00000010 (B)”, the LED display counter is updated to “00000001 (B)” in the next interrupt process. Although the LED corresponding to the display counter (specifically, the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be turned on, the LED display counter becomes “00010000 (B)”. Therefore, the display of the LED corresponding to “00000001 (B)” in the LED display counter is delayed, so that the LED display counter may appear to turn off for a moment.

Further, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data.
1) Excitation information of motor 32 2) Error information when error occurs 3) Data for displaying management information display LED 74 (role monitor) (total game counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value of minimum game time (4.1 seconds) (set in step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Information of input port 51 6) Data of control command buffer 7) Data of stack area 8) Information of external signal Note that the above is an example of typical data, and the data that is not cleared is limited to the above data. It does not mean that you can be.

  Next, proceeding to step S436, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section type flag is “0” (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is “0”, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not “0”, particularly when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is “1” (advantageous section) in this embodiment, the process proceeds to step S437. It should be noted that the advantageous section type flag is “1” at this time because the advantageous section transition lottery is won in this game, and the advantageous section type flag is set to “1” in step S351 in FIG. There is a case where “Yes” is determined in step S423 and the process proceeds to step S436. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S436 via step S435, the advantageous section type flag is cleared in step S435, so that “No” is not determined in step S436.

  In step S437, an initial value is set in the advantageous section clear counter. This process is a process of setting “1500 (D)” to the advantageous section clear counter. Here, “1500 (D)” is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that “F063 (H)” is set in the HL register in step S421. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the advantageous section counter management described above, when the difference counter is updated, the payout number is first added (step S428), and then the bet number is subtracted (step S430). This processing is performed for the following reason.
For example, when the difference counter is “2 (D)”, it is assumed that the bet number is “3 (D)” and the payout number is “9 (D)”.
Here, when the bet number is first subtracted from the difference counter, “−1 (D) (actually“ FFFF (H) ”)” is obtained, and the carry flag is “1”. When the number of payouts is added, “9 (D)” is added to “−1 (D)”, so that “8 (D)” and the carry flag is “1” (the carry is increased). Will be generated).

  Since the difference number of the game is “+6” this time, the carry flag becomes “1” simply by adding the difference number “+6” to the difference counter “2 (D)” before the update. A situation occurs. In other words, the process of step S431 (whether the subtraction result is less than “0”) cannot be determined by whether the carry flag is “1”. If it is determined whether or not the carry flag is “1”, “Yes” is determined in step S 431 even though no carry occurs, and the difference counter is initialized in step S 432. The value will be set. The carry flag is a flag that is “1” in any case when a carry or a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference counter is “2 (D)”, when the payout number “9 (D)” is first added, the difference counter becomes “11 (D)” at that time, and then the bet When the number is subtracted, “8 (D)” is obtained. In this case, no carry occurs, so the carry flag is “0”.
For the above reason, when the difference counter is updated, if the payout number is first added and then the bet number is subtracted, the determination process of step S431 can be executed by a simple process using the carry flag.

  Further, in the advantageous section counter management of the present embodiment, the advantageous section counter is first subtracted (step S422), and when the value before the subtraction is “0” (“Yes” in step S423), that is, If it is a non-favorable section), the process proceeds to step S436 without executing the difference counter updating process (steps S425 to S430). Therefore, in this embodiment, it is configured to execute the advantageous interval counter management regardless of whether it is an advantageous interval or a non-advantageous interval. The processing efficiency is improved by not executing. For this reason, the processing sequence is such that the advantageous interval clear counter is first subtracted and then the difference counter is updated. Of course, it is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section, and if it is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted if the specification is such that the advantageous section clear counter subtraction process and the difference counter update process are executed. It is also possible to execute the difference counter update process prior to the process.

  Further, even when “Yes” is determined in the determination of step S426 (at the time of replay winning), the process of step S434 is executed. By doing so, even if a situation occurs in which an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference counter due to noise or the like at the end of the game, “Yes” is obtained in step S434. , The advantageous section can be terminated. On the other hand, if such confirmation is unnecessary, the processing of this flowchart may be terminated when “Yes” is obtained in step S426.

In the example of FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed in step S426. When it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed, the difference counter updating process (steps S427 to S427) is performed. The process is speeded up by skipping S430).
In particular, in a game in which the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed, the difference counter may be updated by regarding the number of payouts of the game as “0” (deemed payout number) and the bet number of the next game as “0”. . However, for example, an SB (single bonus) is provided as a winning combination during an advantageous section, and when SB is won, one SB game with a bet number of “1” is executed in the next game. In some cases, replay is won and the re-game action symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, since the next game is not an SB game, the bet number is “3” (except for the SB game, the game cannot be performed with the bet number “1”). In this case, however, the number of payouts only in the SB game does not match the number of bets in the next game, and therefore, how to count the difference counter becomes a problem.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference counter in the game in which the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. In FIG. 52, processes similar to those in FIG. 51 are denoted by the same step numbers.
In Example 1 of FIG. 51, the payout number is first added to the difference counter, and then the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the bet number is first subtracted from the difference number counter, and then the payout number is added to the difference number counter.

In the example of FIG. 51, if the payout number is added after the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter, the carry flag may be “1” even if no carry occurs in the end. It has been explained that whether or not it is “0” cannot be determined by whether or not the carry flag is “1”.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter (step S430), and then the payout number is added (step S428). In step S441, the value of the carry flag is not referred to. It is determined whether or not the calculation result is less than “0”.
Specifically, in step S441 in FIG. 52, step S441 is performed depending on whether or not the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register for storing the upper digit) value among the HL register values is “1”. It is determined whether or not the result of the calculation is less than “0”.

For example,
Difference counter value (HL register value) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
Bet count data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
Suppose that
In this case, the difference counter value after the calculation is
0000 (H) -3 (H) = FFFD (H)
It becomes.
Therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
It becomes.
Note that “/” indicates a delimiter every 4 bits in binary notation.

The above example is a case where the HL register value before the calculation is “0000 (H)”, but the HL register value before the calculation is not “0000 (H)” and “the difference number of games of this time> HL register Value ", for example,
Number of games difference this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before operation)
, The HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = FFFE (H)
It becomes.
Therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FE (H) (1111/1110 (B))
It becomes.

Furthermore, when the HL register value is not “0000 (H)” and “the difference number of games this time <HL register value”, for example, first,
Number of games difference this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before operation)
, The HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
It becomes.
Therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
It becomes.

Secondly,
Number of games difference this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before operation)
, The HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FC (H)
It becomes.
Therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC (H) (1111/1100 (B))
It becomes.

Third,
Number of games difference this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before operation)
, The HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 095D (H) (after calculation)
It becomes.
Therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
It becomes.

On the other hand, the upper limit value of the difference counter is “2400 (D)”. Here, when “2400 (D)” is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/0000 (B)"
It becomes.
Since the upper limit value of the difference counter is “2400 (D)”, when a value exceeding “2400 (D)” is stored in the difference counter, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number The counter is cleared (step S435 in FIGS. 51 and 52).
At the end of the current game, the difference counter value was “2400 (D)”, but it did not exceed “2400 (D)”. Suppose you migrate. In the next game, the difference number increases most when the bet number is “1” and the payout number is “15 (D)”. Therefore, the difference number in the game is “14 (D)”. It becomes.
Therefore, the difference counter value in this case is “2414 (D)”.
Here, when “2414 (D)” is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)"
It becomes.

Further, when the difference counter value reaches “2414 (D)”, it exceeds “2400 (D)”, so the difference counter is cleared to “0 (D)” in the game.
As described above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take during the game is “2414 (D)”, that is, “0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)”.

Therefore, when the HL register value is “2414 (D)”,
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
The D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is “0”.
Therefore, when the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of “0 (D)” to “2414 (D)”, the D7 bit of the H register value is always “0”.

From the above, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is always “0” and never “1” except when a carry is caused.
In order for the D7 bit of the H register value to be “1”, the difference counter value needs to be “32768 (D)”, and the difference number reaches such a value except for a carry. The advantageous section is not continued until.

On the other hand, as mentioned above,
Bet count data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after the calculation is “FFFD (H)”.
Here, “FFFD (H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1101 (B)"
It is.

Therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is “1”.
Similarly, before computation,
Bet count data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0002 (H)
When the difference counter is updated, the HL register value becomes “FFFF (H)”.

Here, “FFFF (H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
It is.
Therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is “1”.
In this way, when a carry occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes “1”.

As described above, as a result of updating the difference counter, when no carry occurs, the D7 bit of the H register value is “0”, and when a carry occurs, the D7 bit of the H register value is “ 1 ”.
Therefore, in step S441 in FIG. 52, when it is determined whether or not the calculation result is less than “0”, it is determined whether or not the D7 bit of the H register value is “1”. When the D7 bit of the H register value is “1”, it is determined that the operation result is less than “0”.
In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation result is “0” without determining whether or not the carry flag is “1” as a result of the operation.
Then, since it is determined whether or not the calculation result is “0” without using the carry flag, there is no problem even if the payout number is added after the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter value.

Further, as apparent from the above, even if the maximum value “2414 (D)” that the difference counter can take is not limited to the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, the D6 bit, the D5 bit, and The D4 bit is also “0”.
On the other hand, when the difference counter value is lowered, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, but also the D6 bit, the D5 bit, and the D4 bit are set to “1”.

Therefore, in FIG. 52, in step S441, instead of determining whether the D7 bit of the H register value is “1”, it may be determined whether the D6 bit is “1”. , It may be determined whether the D5 bit is “1”, or it may be determined whether the D4 bit is “1”. In any case, when the bit is “1”, the operation result is less than “0”, and when the bit is not “1”, the operation result is not less than “0”.
As apparent from the above, even in Example 1 (step S431) of FIG. 51, the calculation result is less than “0” with reference to the D7 bit (or D6, D5, or D4 bit) of the H register value. It is also possible to determine whether or not there is.

  As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, whether or not the advantageous interval clear counter is “0”, the advantageous interval clear counter is updated (step S422), the difference counter is updated (steps S428 and S430). The determination (step S424), the determination of whether or not the difference counter exceeds the upper limit (step S434), and the initialization of information relating to the advantageous section (step S435) are performed regardless of the bet number (specified number) in the current game. Executed. Therefore, even if the advantageous section clear counter becomes “0” or the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value as a result of the game being played with the bet number (specified number) “2”, the advantageous section ends. To do.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 at a period of 2.235 ms (but not limited to this time period) in parallel with the main process.
When the process proceeds to the interrupt process in step S451, in step S452, a register value save process and a duplicate interrupt prohibition process are performed as an initial process. Here, since the register of the main CPU 55 used in the main process is used in the interrupt process, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Further, the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is because, for example, an interrupt process execution request may be made during the power-off process.

In the next step S453, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 54 described later, and is a process for detecting whether or not a power-off detection signal has been input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. The interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
In the next step S455, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed is mentioned.

Next, it progresses to step S456 and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 55 described later, and is a process for lighting the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) in accordance with the state of the slot machine 10.
Note that errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include an unrecoverable error and an unrecoverable error. In the unrecoverable error, an error display is output by the main process (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41), but can be recovered. An error is displayed by this LED display control every time interrupt processing is performed.

  In step S457, the input port 51 is read. As a result, whether or not the operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, etc. has been performed, the switch signals and the input signals of various sensors are read, and the data (level data, rising data, (Falling data) is generated and stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.

  In the next step S458, it is determined whether or not the set value is in a normal range. Here, the set value data stored in the address “F000 (H)” is read, and the range of the set value data is in the normal range (whether the set value data is in the range of “0” to “5”). ) Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the set value data is in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459. If it is determined that the set value is not in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470, and the process returns to the unrecoverable error process. In this embodiment, the error in this case is referred to as an “E6” error, and “E6” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

In step S459, a built-in random number check process is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the internal random number is provided, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random numbers for the lottery (for example, when the random number update is late), the error flag is turned on.
The process proceeds to step S460, where it is determined whether an error has occurred in the internal random number (whether the error flag is on). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S461, where an error is detected. If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S470, and the process proceeds to a non-recoverable error process. The error display content at this time is “E7”.

  In step S461, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in units of 31 reels (left, middle, and right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby according to the operation state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S462, and port output processing is performed. In this process, the excitation output of the motor 32 (for reel) and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S463, an input error check process is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not various sensors are abnormal.
In the next step S464, control command transmission processing is performed. This process is a process of transmitting the set control command (untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) to the sub-control board 80.
Specifically, when the control command is set in the command buffer, in the interrupt processing after that time (if the command buffer is empty, in principle, the interrupt processing that comes next after that time), this step S464. As a result, the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

In the next step S465, the data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in the register. In the next step S466, an external signal is output from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33) (signal transmission to the external concentrated terminal board 100).
In step S467, a ratio display preparation process is performed. This processing is processing for updating a timer related to the ratio display of the management information display LED 74, outputting segment data, and the like.

  In the next step S468, random number update processing is performed. In step S469, the register value saved in step S452 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

As shown in the above processing, the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, the status display LEDs 79 (79a to 79f), the set value display LED 73, and the management information display LED 74 are turned on / off by interruption processing every 2.235 ms. Be controlled.
Furthermore, when an untransmitted control command is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt process, the transmission process is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed during non-recoverable error processing (interrupt processing is interrupted until normal recovery).
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and performs processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 53 based on data from the input port, transmission of a control command to the sub-control board 80), etc. To prevent it from happening, interrupts themselves are prohibited.
If an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer when an unrecoverable error occurs, the command is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG.
In step S481, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off detection signal was on in the previous interrupt process. Here, when the voltage becomes lower than a predetermined value (V1 or lower in the example of FIG. 3) by a voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50, a predetermined input is made. Since a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit of the port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal has been input. Further, when the power-off detection signal is turned on, it is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
When it is determined that the power interruption detection signal is on in the previous interruption process, the process proceeds to step S482, and when it is determined that the power interruption detection signal is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S482, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off detection signal is on in the current interrupt process. When it is determined that it is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be on, the process proceeds to step S483.
When it is determined as “Yes” in both steps S481 and S482 (when the power interruption detection signal is input continuously for two interruptions), it is determined that the power interruption has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all output ports 52 are turned off. By this process, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (during rotation of the reel 31) or when the hopper motor 36 is being driven (during payout of medals), the driving is stopped.
Next, the process proceeds to step S484, and the power-off process completion flag is stored in the RWM 53. This process is a process of storing in the RWM 53 data indicating that a normal power-off process has been executed.

In the next step S485, checksum data of the RWM 53 is calculated. This process calculates a checksum including a work area (RWM 53) used in the program. Examples of the program use area to be processed include a program work area, an unused area, a stack area, and the like.
In the next step S486, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has been completed. If it is determined that the calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S485 to continue calculating the checksum. On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculation has been completed, the process proceeds to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Here, the data stored in the RWM 53 is 1-byte data (also referred to as complement data) that becomes “0” when all the data in the program use area and the value stored in the predetermined address are added during the checksum of the RWM 53. ).
When executing the checksum of the RWM 53 at the start of the program, all the data in the program use area of the RWM 53 in the same range as above and the checksum data are added. If the checksum data calculated thereby is “0”, it is determined as a normal value, and if it is not “0”, it is determined as an abnormal value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S488 to enter a reset wait state. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50. Therefore, in step S488, the output of the reset signal is awaited.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG.
First, in step S491, the output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process is a process of outputting “00000000 (B)” from the output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S492, the output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. This process is also a process of outputting “00000000 (B)” from the output port 4 as in the above process.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated. In this process, the bit “1” of the LED display counter is updated to the right by one digit.
In the next step S494, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is “0”. If it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S495. If it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S496. .
In step S495, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, a process of setting the LED display counter “00000000 (B)” to “00010000 (B)” is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the E register.

In step S497, error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data are acquired. Here, the storage area of the RWM 53 stores a storage area for storing error number display data when an error occurs, and LED display data indicating on / off of the game start display LED 79d to the replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79. A storage area and (1-3) a storage area for storing bet display data indicating ON / OFF of the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are provided.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Not used D1: Not used D2: Not used D3: “1” when the game can be started, “0” when the game cannot be started
D4: “1” when a medal can be inserted, “0” when a medal cannot be inserted
D5: “1” when winning a replay, “0” when not winning a replay
D6: Not used D7: Not used Note that the D3 to D5 bits of the LED display data correspond to the segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.

The bet display data is configured as follows.
0 bets: 00000000
1 bet: 00000001
2 bets: 00000011
3 bets: 00000111
The D0 to D2 bits of the bet display data correspond to the segments A to C of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.
In step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in the B register. The LED display data is read and stored in the A register, and the bet display data is read and stored in the C register.

In the next step S498, the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed (combined), and the calculation result is set as segment data for the output port 3. When an OR operation is performed on the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data), the data indicates whether the status display LED 79 is turned on / off. When there is a display request for the digit 5 (“Yes” in step S 516), this segment data is output from the output port 3.
In step S499, the register for setting the segment data for the output port 4 is cleared.

  In the next step S500, a value obtained by ANDing the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) is stored in the D register, and whether or not the value is “0”. Judging. When it is determined that it is “0”, it is determined that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S516. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, it is determined that there is a display request, and the process proceeds to step S501.

  In step S501, the LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table of the present embodiment includes an LED segment table 1 that defines segment data for displaying an error number, and other than the error number (credit number, payout number, setting value, setting change display, push order) An LED segment table 2 that defines segment data for displaying instruction information and a specified number of instructions) is provided and stored in a use area of the ROM 54. In step S501, the head address of the LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501, offset and segment data are defined as follows.
Offset “0”: Segment data displaying “0” Offset “1”: Segment data displaying “1” Offset “2”: Segment data displaying “2” Offset “3”: Displaying “3” Segment data Offset “4”: Segment data displaying “4” Offset “5”: Segment data displaying “5” Offset “6”: Segment data displaying “6” Offset “7”: “7” Segment data to be displayed Offset “8”: Segment data to display “8” Offset “9”: Segment data to display “9” Offset “A”: Segment data to display “=” Offset “B”: “A Segment data to display

For example, first, when the payout number data “10 (H)” is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset of the payout number data is “1” and the lower digit offset is “0”. It becomes. Thereby, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data indicating “1” is acquired, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data indicating “0” is acquired.
Also, for example, secondly, when the display data “88 (H)” during setting change is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset of the display data during setting change is “8”, and the lower digit is displayed. The offset of “8” is “8”. Thereby, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data indicating "8" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data indicating "8" is acquired.

Furthermore, for example, thirdly, when the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset of the push order instruction number is “A”, and the lower digit The offset is “1”. Thereby, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data indicating “=” is acquired, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data indicating “1” is acquired.
Further, fourthly, for example, when the specified specified number display data “0B (H)” is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset is “0” and the lower digit offset is “B”. It becomes. Thereby, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data indicating "0" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data indicating "A" is acquired.

In step S502, set value data is acquired. Here, the set value data stored in the address “F000 (H)” is read and stored in the A register. Next, “1” is added to the A register value to generate set value display data, which is stored in the A register. This set value display data serves as an offset value when the set value is displayed.
As will be described later, the segment data stored at the address (in the LED segment table 1 or 2) obtained by adding the offset value to the head address value in the LED segment table 1 or 2 is acquired.
In step S503, it is determined whether there is a setting value display request. Here, when the D register value is “00010000 (B)” and the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, it is determined that there is a display request for the setting value. If it is determined that there is a display request for the set value, the process proceeds to step S514. If it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, the credit amount data is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, an upper digit offset is acquired. In this process, the credit number data (A register value) acquired in step S504 is divided by “10 (D)”, the quotient value is stored in the A register, and the remainder value is stored in the E register. It is processing.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether or not there is a request for displaying the upper digits of the credit amount. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 1a) of the D register value is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined “Yes”. When it is determined that there is a request for displaying the upper digit of the credit number, the process proceeds to step S514.

  In step S507, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the lower digits of the credit amount. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to the digit 2a) of the D register value is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined “Yes”, and the process proceeds to step S513. . On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display request for the lower digits of the credit amount, the process proceeds to step S508.

  In step S508, the acquired number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, the number-of-acquisition data stores the number-of-payout data at the timing when medals are paid out based on the winning of the small role. In addition, setting change display data “88 (H)” is stored at the timing of setting change. Furthermore, when it is time to designate a prescribed number, designated prescribed number display data “0B (H)” is stored. Furthermore, the push order instruction number “= x (x = 1 to 6)” is stored at the timing when the instruction function is activated (the push order is notified). Any one of these data is acquired and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether or not the error display is applicable. In this process, the B register value (error number display data stored in step S497) is read to determine whether it is “0”. If it is not “0”, it is determined that an error is being displayed, and step S510 If “0”, it is determined that it is not an error display time, and the process proceeds to step S511.
In step S510, the LED segment table 1 for error display is set. Note that a description of the specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 is omitted. In step S510, a process of storing the head address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register is executed. Therefore, in this case, instead of the head address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501, the head address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register).

  In the next step S511, an upper digit offset is acquired. In this process, when an error is displayed (when the B register value is not “0”), an operation to divide the B register value by “10 (D)” is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder Is stored in the E register. On the other hand, when it is not during error display (when the B register value is “0”), the A register value (payout number data, setting change display data, instruction specified number display data, or push order instruction number) is set to “10 ( D) "is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the E register.

  In the next step S512, it is determined whether or not there is a request for displaying the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78. This process determines whether or not the D2 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 3a) of the D register value is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request. If it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S514. If it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S513.

In step S513, an offset for the lower digit is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the E register in the A register. That is, the upper digit value and the lower digit value are switched between the A register and the E register. Then, the process proceeds to step S514.
In step S514, segment data is acquired. This process adds the data stored in the HL register (the head address of the LED segment table 1 or 2) and the data stored in the A register (offset value), and corresponds to the address after the addition (LED segment This is a process of storing the segment data (from Table 1 or 2) in the C register.

In the next step S515, segment data for the output port 4 is set. The data set here is segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Since the digits 1b to 4b are turned on in a ratio display process (step S522) described later, the segment data of the digits 1b to 4b are not set here.
Therefore, in step S515, “Yes” is set in step S503 (there is a set value display request), and when the segment data for setting value display is acquired and stored in the C register in step S514, the C register value is output. Set as segment data for port 4.

  In step S516, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the digit 5. Here, there is a display request for the digit 5 when the D register value is “00010000 (B)”. If it is determined that there is a digit 5 display request, the process proceeds to step S520. If it is determined that there is no digit 5 display request, the process proceeds to step S517.

  In step S517, segment data for output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as segment data for the output port 3. If “Yes” in step S516 (when the display request for digit 5 is present), the data set in step S498 becomes the segment data for output port 3.

  In the next step S518, the data of the advantageous section display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value is “0”. When the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is not “0”, it is determined whether or not the digit to be lit in the current interrupt process is the digit 4a. When the D3 bit of the D register value is “1”, it is determined that it is the lighting timing of the digit 4a. In this case, the segment data set in step S517 and the data obtained by ORing “10000000” are set as segment data for the output port 3. Thereby, the data which can light the segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a is set.

In step S519, the segment data for the output port 4 set in step S515 is cleared. This is to prevent the digit 5b (the set value display LED 73) from being lit when there is no display request for the digit 5 (when "No" in step S516).
In step S520, the digit signal is output from the output port 2, and the segment signal is output from the output port 3. Here, the D register value is set as the digit data of the output port 2 and is output from the output port 2.
The segment signal data output from the output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when digit 5 is lit) or the data set in step S517 (when digits 1 to 4 are lit).

In step S521, a segment signal is output from the output port 4. The segment signal data output from the output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when there is a set value display request) or the data cleared in step S519 (when there is no set value display request). In other words, when the segment data for the output port 4 is cleared in step S519, “00000000 (B)” is output from the output port 4.
Next, the process proceeds to step S522, and shifts to a ratio display process (a process for turning on the management information display LED 74). In the present embodiment, the description of the ratio display process is omitted. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous section display LED 77 and the power interruption (when the power interruption occurs while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit) will be described.
In the interrupt processing, when the power interruption is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to the processing after step S483. In this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained even after the power is turned off.
Then, after the power is turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 38, when the setting key switch is off, it is determined “No” in step S208. The process proceeds to the power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) in S213.

  40, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set in step S253, but this range is an unused area of the RWM 53 as described above. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the advantageous section display LED flag of the address “F062 (H)” is not subject to initialization. The same applies to the LED display counter of the address “F051 (H)”.

In the power-off recovery process of FIG. 40, when initialization of the RWM 53 is completed, an interrupt is activated in step S262. Therefore, after step S262, the interrupt process of FIG. 53 is executed at intervals of 2.235 ms. When the interrupt process is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. In addition, when “No” in step S512, there is a display request for the digit 4a. In this case, when the error is not displayed (“No” in step S509) and the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, the D7 bit of the segment data is set to “1” in step S518, and the segment Data is output (step S520). Thereby, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
As described above, when the power is cut off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit again when the interruption process is executed in the power-off recovery process.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on after the power is turned off and the setting key switch is on, the following occurs.
In the program start process of FIG. 38, when the setting key switch is on, “Yes” is set in step S208, and the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) of step S212.
In FIG. 39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is designated in step S221, and this initialization range includes the advantageous section display LED flag of the address “F062 (H)”. If it is determined that the power-off recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM 53 (including the address “F062 (H)”) is initialized.

Therefore, even if “1” indicating lighting is stored by the initialization of the advantageous section display LED flag, it becomes “0” indicating extinction.
Thereafter, an interrupt is activated in step S233 of FIG. When the interruption is activated, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 when the set value display LED 73 is turned on in the LED display control (FIG. 55). Then, in step S240 in FIG. 39, the setting value can be changed (the setting value can be changed by turning on the setting change switch).

In FIG. 39, when the interrupt process is activated in step S233 and the LED display control (FIG. 55) is executed, even when the digit 4a is turned on, the advantageous section display LED flag value is already “ Since it is “0”, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on and the process shifts to the setting change process, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up. Even when the setting change process is terminated and the process proceeds to the main process, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.

Further, in the main process of FIG. 41, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, and when the power is cut off during the loop from step S286 to step S289, that is, during the rotation of the reel 31, the following occurs. .
When power interruption is detected in the interrupt process, in step S483 in FIG. 54, all the output ports 52 are turned off, so that the drive signal of the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is also turned off. As a result, the rotating reel 31 (motor 32) also stops when the power is turned off.

  Next, when power is supplied, it returns to the state before power-off through the power-recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. As a result, the same drive signal of the motor 32 as that before the power is cut off is output from the output port 52. Here, the drive signal of the motor 32 before power-off is a signal for maintaining a constant speed state. In this embodiment, when the motor 32 (reel 31) is in a constant speed state, it is assumed that one step drive is performed with one interrupt (2.235 ms). However, even if a drive signal in a constant speed state is output from the beginning to the motor 32 after stopping driving, the motor 32 cannot be driven because the rotational torque is weak.

  Accordingly, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (the index is not cut). When it is determined that the index is not detected for a certain time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating, and the motor 32 is re-accelerated (re-started). The acceleration of the motor 32 is, for example, at first 20 interrupts (20 × 2.235 = 44.7 ms), 1 step drive, next 16 interrupts, 1 step drive, next 12 interrupts, 1 step drive,. This is a method of driving one step gradually in less time. The acceleration state takes about 100 steps, for example. Thereby, the rotation of the reel 31 can be started.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on and an interrupt is started in step S262 in FIG. 40, digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter, but the first LED display counter after the interrupt is started is a digit. When the value is the value that lights 3a ("00000100 (B)" in FIG. 34), the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)" after 4 interruptions from that time, and the digit 4a (favorable zone display LED 77) lights. Timing comes.

On the other hand, the power is cut off before the index of the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 (for example, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 in the remaining “1” to several steps), and after the power is turned on. Even if it is determined that the index of the reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33 and re-acceleration is performed, at least several tens of interruptions are required until the reel 31 (motor 32) reaches the constant speed state as described above. Cost.
Accordingly, after the power is turned on, the reel 31 is in a constant speed state after the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. That is, when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

When the reel 31 stops at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively far from the reel sensor 33, several to several tens of interrupts are generated until the reel sensor 33 determines that the index of the reel 31 is not detected after the interrupt is activated. Cost. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit before the motor 32 is reaccelerated.
As described above, the advantageous section display LED 77 is set to be lit until the reel 31 re-rotates and returns to the constant speed state after returning from the power interruption.

Further, in the main process of FIG. 41, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, and in the medal payout process by winning in step S294, when the power interruption occurs while the hopper motor 36 is driven, the following is performed. . As described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
In the medal payout process by winning shown in FIG. 49, in step S398, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and as shown in FIG. 7, when each of the payout sensors 37a and 37b normally detects the movable piece 39a (in FIG. 8). , S31 to S34), it is determined that one medal is normally paid out. The hopper motor 36 continues to be driven until it is determined that a medal corresponding to the number of payouts has been paid out.
If a power interruption is detected in the interrupt process before all medals are paid out during the payout of medals, all output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. The drive signal is also turned off. Thereby, the medal payout process is interrupted.

Next, when power is supplied, the process returns to step S294 (medal payout process by winning) in the main process (FIG. 41) through the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. As a result, a drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the output port 52 in the same manner as before the power is turned off. As shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the payout process by winning in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when the power is restored from the power interruption, the lighting timing of the digit 4a (advantageous section display LED 77) comes within 4 interrupts as described above.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required to pay out one medal cannot be generally specified, but approximately 100 ms is required. Therefore, before returning to the medal payout process by winning after the power is cut off, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit before the remaining medals are paid out. In other words, when the medal payout process by winning is completed after the return from the power interruption, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at that time.

Moreover, the following method is mentioned as a method of preventing that the advantageous area display LED 77 is extinguished for a moment when the power supply is momentarily interrupted.
As shown in FIG. 54, when the power-off is detected, the output of all the ports 52 is turned off in step S483. Therefore, the digit signal from the output port 2 and the segment signal from the output port 3 are thereafter processed. Is not output. Thereby, the advantageous section display LED 77 which is the segment P of the digit 4a is turned off.

Therefore, the process proceeds to step S488 in FIG. 54, and after waiting for reset, when the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, an ON signal of the D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from the output port 2, and The output port 3 outputs a D7 bit (segment P) ON signal. In FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S488, and the interrupt process does not occur in the loop process after waiting for resetting. In this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 is always lit (static lighting). Thereby, even if a momentary interruption occurs, the advantageous section display LED 77 can be prevented from being extinguished.
Alternatively, in the process of step S483 in FIG. 54, the output ports 2 and 3 are not turned off, but the process of turning off the other output ports may be executed. Even if it controls in this way, it can prevent the advantageous area display LED77 not turning off by instantaneous interruption.

  In this embodiment, the segment P of the digit 4a is set to the advantageous section display LED 77, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by dynamic lighting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section display LED 77 may be composed of separate and independent LEDs. Then, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is statically lit and the power port is detected and the output port corresponding to the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned off, the advantageous section display LED 77 is prevented from turning off at the moment of interruption. can do.

Next, the difference number display on the sub-control board 80 side will be described. The sub control board 80 displays the difference number on the image display device 23 during AT. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the following storage areas are provided in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80.
Comprises the following:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number counter 3) Retraction flag 4) Retraction game number counter

The main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to ON / OFF of each game and the AT flag to the sub control board 80. Note that the command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 side is changed from off to on, and only when the AT flag is turned off.
The sub control board 80 receives information on the ON / OFF of the AT flag from the main control board 50, and turns on / off the AT flag provided on the sub control board 80 side. Further, the sub-control board 80 stores that the AT flag on the sub-control board 80 side is turned off (ON flag rising data) and that it is turned off (AT flag falling data). .

Further, as described above, the main control board 50 updates the counter for each game and the AT game number during the AT, and ends the AT when the AT game number counter becomes “0”. Further, when the difference counter becomes “2400 (D)” or when the advantageous section clear counter becomes “0”, AT (and the advantageous section) is terminated.
When the main control board 50 ends the AT and the advantageous interval, the difference counter is initialized, so that when the next game is shifted to the normal interval, the difference counter becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, the sub control board 80 includes a sub difference number counter for counting the difference number during AT. The sub difference number counter is “0” at the start of the AT (except when the AT is won and the AT is started during a pull-back period to be described later), and thereafter, each game and the difference number are updated. When a carry occurs, unlike the difference counter of the main control board 50, the carry is not corrected to “0” and the carry remains.

For example, when starting AT,
Game 1: Non-winning role (Difference number “-3”)
2nd game: Non-winning role (difference: “-3”)
3rd game: Winning order bell (Difference number +5)
4th game: Non-winning role (difference number “-3”)
Game 5: Winning push bell (Difference number “+5”)
Suppose that
In this case, the sub difference number counter (2-byte counter)
1st game: 0 (H) -3 (H) = FFFD (H)
2nd game: FFFD (H) -3 (H) = FFFA (H)
3rd game: FFFA (H) +5 (H) = FFFF (H)
4th game: FFFF (H) -3 (H) = FFFC (H)
Game 5: FFFC (H) + 5 (H) = 0001 (H)
And will be updated.

Note that, when the replay is won, the sub difference number counter is not updated in the same manner as the difference number counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the game at the time of the replay winning, the number of payouts may be set to “0” and the number of bets for the next game (at the time of replaying) may be set to “0”.
Further, as described above, the difference counter of the main control board 50 executes the initialization process when the advantageous section ends, while the sub difference number counter of the sub-control means 80 sets AT (advantageous section). Even when the process is finished, there is a case where the initialization process is not immediately executed and the count is not stopped. The sub-control board 80 turns on the pull-back flag (“1”) when ending AT and continuing the count of the sub difference counter.

  The sub control board 80 determines the sub difference counter value at the end of the AT, and when the sub difference counter value is less than (or less than) a predetermined value (for example, “2000 (D)”), the sub difference counter Continue counting. On the other hand, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds a predetermined value (or exceeds a predetermined value), the sub difference number counter is cleared. In the case where the sub difference sheet counter is close to the upper limit value and the AT is terminated, when the AT is pulled back, the sub difference sheet number counter value may reach the upper limit value immediately. The next AT will not take over the difference number.

The pullback flag is a flag for determining whether the AT is pulled back within a predetermined number of games (in the present embodiment, “50” games) after the AT is finished (whether or not the player has won again).
At the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on and “50 (D)” is set in the pullback game number counter. The withdrawal game number counter is for counting the number of games after the end of AT (during the withdrawal period). At the end of the AT, “50 (D)” is set in the withdrawal game number counter, and thereafter, if the AT is not won, “1” is continuously subtracted for each game. When the withdrawal game number counter becomes “0”, AT withdrawal has failed, the withdrawal flag is turned off, and the sub difference number counter is cleared (initialized).
Then, the sub control board 80 updates the sub difference counter when the pull-back flag is on after the AT ends.

Also, during a withdrawal period (when the withdrawal flag is on), when a special role such as BB is won and a special game such as a BB game is executed, the withdrawal game number counter is subtracted (updated) during the special game. )do not do.
On the other hand, when the AT is won before the withdrawal game number counter becomes “0”, the AT is successfully pulled back, and in the subsequent AT, the number of images obtained by taking over the difference number of the previous AT is displayed as an image.
For example,
Difference number at the first AT: +1000 After the first AT, the difference from the winning of the second AT: –100 When the difference at the start of the second AT is “+900” An image is displayed.

An upper limit value that can be counted by the sub difference counter is set. In the present embodiment, the setting is as follows.
1) Upper limit value during AT: 2414 (D)
2) The upper limit value when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped during the AT and the obtainable number (expected difference number) of the special game related to the special role is “250 (D)”: “2414 (D ) −250 (D) = 2164 (D) ”
3) Upper limit value during withdrawal period: 2000 (D)

As shown in the above 1), when the sub difference number counter value exceeds “2414 (D)” during AT, the counting of the sub difference number is stopped and the sub difference number counter is cleared.
In the present embodiment, the sub difference number counter value and the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 are linked (matched). For example, when the sub difference counter becomes “1000 (D)” during AT, an image is displayed on the image display device 23 as “acquired number during AT: 1000”.

As described above, when the difference counter of the main control board 50 exceeds “2400 (D)”, the AT (and the advantageous section) is terminated. Therefore, as described above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is “2414 (D)”.
Accordingly, the sub-difference counter on the sub-control board 80 side is set to “2414 (D)” as the maximum value that can be counted in accordance with the difference counter of the main control board 50.
Since the maximum value of the sub difference number counter is “2414 (D)”, the maximum difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is “2414 sheets”. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive difference in the number of images from being displayed, and to prevent an image display that is extremely irritating.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (9th embodiment), when the number of BB games that can be acquired is 250, the BB is won during the AT and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is selected. When is stopped and displayed, the sub difference counter value at that time is determined. When the sub difference counter value exceeds “2164 (D)” described above, it exceeds “2414 (D)” at the end of the BB game, so when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, The number counter is cleared (2 above).

  In this case, the image display device 23 displays “congratulations”, “celebration”, or the like as an image display corresponding to the difference number. In this way, instead of displaying “congratulations” or the like already from the start of the BB game, the sub difference number counter is not cleared at the start of the BB game, and the sub difference number is exceeded until “2414 (D)” is exceeded. The counter may continue to be counted, and when “2414 (D)” is exceeded, the sub difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as “Congratulations” may be displayed.

Furthermore, the number of difference sheets may increase during the pullback period. For example, there may be a case where the difference counter value increases as a result of winning a special role during the withdrawal period and digesting the special game.
In particular, if the specification is such that an AT is won when a specific BB is won, after the end of the BB game, the game moves to the AT. On the other hand, if the sub difference counter is close to the upper limit at the end of the BB game, the upper limit is reached immediately even if the difference number is taken over at the AT after the end of the BB game. Therefore, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds “2000 (D)” during the withdrawal period, the sub difference number counter is cleared. For example, during the AT pull-back period, when the BB with AT is won and the BB game is consumed, when the sub difference counter value exceeds “2000 (D)” at the end of the final game of the BB game, Clear the sub difference number counter. Thereby, in the AT after the end of the BB, the display of the difference number is started from “0”.

  As described above, even if the special game is entered during the withdrawal period, the withdrawal game number counter is not subtracted during the special game. When the special combination is won during the withdrawal period, the sub-difference counter may be updated or interrupted during the special game. As an example of interrupting the update, for example, when the sub difference sheet counter value during the pullback period is “1000 (D)” and the BB with AT is selected, the sub difference sheet counter value is set to “1000 (D)”. Stop at. Even if “250” is acquired in the subsequent BB game, the “250” is not added to the sub difference counter. Therefore, when shifting to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number starts from “1000”.

On the other hand, as an example of continuing to update the sub difference number counter, for example, when the sub difference number counter value during the pull-back period is “1000 (D)”, the BB with AT is won, and in the subsequent BB game, “ When “250” is acquired, the sub difference number counter at the end of the BB game is “1250 (D)”. Then, when the BB game is over and then the process shifts to AT, the difference number starts from “1250”.
Further, when the sub-difference counter is continuously updated, for example, when the sub-difference counter value during the pull-back period is “1800 (D)”, the BB with AT is won and “250” is obtained in the subsequent BB game. When the number is acquired, the sub difference counter at the end of the BB game is “2050 (D)”, which exceeds “2000 (D)”. Accordingly, the sub difference number counter is cleared by the end of the BB game, and the display of the difference number is started from “0” in the AT after the end of the BB.

The sub difference counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the bet number. However, in the present embodiment, the difference of the game is limited only when the game is started with a predetermined specified number. Update the number.
Here, the difference counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the bet number of the game.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the condition for updating the sub difference number counter is determined to be when the bet number (specified number) is “3”, and when the game is started with the bet number (specified number) “2”. Does not update the difference in the game.

Next, the sub difference number counter management process will be described with reference to a flowchart.
56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the sub difference number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart following FIG.
In step S531 in FIG. 56, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on (whether or not the AT is currently in progress). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S532.

  In step S532, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, when the non-AT and the pullback flag are OFF, the sub difference number counter is not updated.

  In the next step S533, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated and the bet number of the game is determined, the main control board 50 transmits a bet command that can determine the bet number of the game to the sub-control board 80. If it is determined that the bet command has been received, the process proceeds to step S534.

  In step S534, it is determined whether or not the bet number (specified number) is “3” based on the received bet command. When it is determined that the bet number is “3”, the process proceeds to step S535, and when it is determined that the bet number is not “3”, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub difference counter is updated only when the bet number is “3”. Therefore, even during the AT or the withdrawal period, if the bet number is other than “3”, the sub difference counter is not updated in the game. As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the difference counter on the main control board 50 side is updated regardless of the bet number (specified number) in the game.

When the process proceeds from step S534 to step S535, the sub control board 80 subtracts the bet number ("3") from the sub difference number counter. Next, proceeding to step S536, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a payout command has been received. In the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, after the display determination is made in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits a payout command capable of determining the number of payouts to the sub-control board 80.
If it is determined in step S536 that a payout command has been received, the process proceeds to step S537, and the sub control board 80 adds the payout number to the sub difference number counter.
In the next step S538, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on. When it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S539. When it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG.

  In step S539, it is determined whether or not the AT flag has been turned on in this game (whether or not the rise of the AT flag is on). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned on in the current game, the process proceeds to step S540, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned on (the rise of the AT flag is off) in the current game, the process proceeds to step S543. Therefore, the process proceeds from step S539 to step S543 when the AT is from before the previous game.

  In step S540, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S541. When it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. For example, when the AT flag is turned on in this game (“Yes” in step S539) and the pullback flag is off (“No” in step S540, that is, when the pullback period is not in progress), the sub difference number at this time Since the counter is “0”, there is no need to update the sub difference number counter, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

When the process proceeds from step S540 to step S541, the sub control board 80 turns off the pullback flag. In the next step S542, the sub-control board 80 clears the withdrawal game number counter. Here, “Yes” in step S539 and “Yes” in step S540 correspond to the case where the AT is won during the withdrawal period. Therefore, in this case, the withdrawal flag is turned off and the withdrawal game number counter is cleared.
Next, proceeding to step S543, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit “2414 (D)”. If it is determined that the sub difference counter exceeds “2414 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S546. In step S546, the sub difference number counter is cleared. This may occur when the difference number increases during the pull-back period after the AT ends and the sub difference number counter exceeds “2414 (D)”.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S543 that the sub difference number counter does not exceed “2414 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S544, and the sub control board 80 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to BB in the current game. Determine whether or not. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 50.
In this step S544, “Yes” is set when the BB with AT is won during the pullback period. In this flowchart, it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed in the game won for BB.
When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is not stopped and displayed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

  In step S545, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds “2164 (D)”. When it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds “2164 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S546, where the sub difference number counter is cleared as described above, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S545 that the sub difference sheet counter does not exceed “2164 (D)” (mainly maintaining the sub difference sheet counter value), the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

  As described above, when the BB game of the present embodiment ends with a payout exceeding 250 as shown in FIG. 26 (the ninth embodiment), the sub difference counter is “2164 (D)” at the start of the BB game. If it exceeds, “2414 (D)” (upper limit value) will be exceeded by the final game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of this flowchart, at the start (before the start) of the BB game, it is determined whether the sub difference counter exceeds the upper limit value during the BB game. The sub difference number counter is cleared before the start. Since the difference sheet number displayed on the image display device 23 is based on the sub difference sheet counter, in the BB game after the sub difference sheet counter is cleared, the difference sheet number itself is not displayed or the difference is not displayed. For example, “congratulations” or “celebration” is displayed instead of the number display.

  When it is determined in step S538 that the AT flag is not on and the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG. 57, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is turned off in this game (whether or not the AT flag falls on). That is, it is determined whether or not the AT is ended in the current game). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned off in the current game, the process proceeds to step S548, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned off (the trailing edge of the AT flag is off) in the current game, the process proceeds to step S551. .

  In step S548, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter is less than “2000 (D)”. When it is determined that the sub difference number counter is less than “2000 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S549. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not less than “2000 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S557.

In step S549, the sub-control board 80 turns on the pullback flag. Next, proceeding to step S550, the sub-control board 80 sets an initial value “50 (D)” in the pull-back game number counter. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
If the sub-difference counter is less than “2000 (D)” at the end of AT by the processing of steps S548 to S550 described above, the withdrawal flag is turned on and the initial value “50 (D)” of the number of withdrawal games is set. Set. The reason why “50 (D)” is set as the initial value of the number of withdrawal games is that AT withdrawal within 50 games is used as an AT continuous chain (conditions for taking over the sub difference number to the next AT). Accordingly, the number of withdrawal games can be variously set such as “30 (D)” or “100 (D)”, not limited to “50 (D)”, depending on the specification.
Further, when the sub difference number counter is equal to or greater than “2000 (D)” at the end of AT, there is a possibility that the sub difference number counter may exceed the upper limit value during AT after pulling back even if AT is pulled back thereafter. In such a case, the pullback flag is not set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S548 that the sub difference number counter is not less than “2000 (D)” and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished. In other words, if the sub difference number counter is equal to or greater than “2000 (D)” at the end of AT, the sub difference number counter starts from the initial value “0” even if the process proceeds to AT thereafter.

Further, when the process proceeds from step S547 to step S551, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is in BB operation (in BB game). 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
When it is determined in step S551 that the BB operation is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S552, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S553, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S553, "1" is subtracted from the withdrawal game number counter. In other words, during the pull-back period, when the BB is in operation (BB game is in progress), the pull-back game number counter is not updated (subtracted). Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the withdrawal game number counter may be subtracted even during the BB game during the withdrawal period.
In the next step S554, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the withdrawal game number counter has become “0”. When it is determined that the withdrawal game number counter is not “0”, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the withdrawal game number counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S555.

In step S555, the pullback flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the withdrawal game number counter is cleared. When “Yes” is determined in the step S554, the pull-back game number counter is “0”, so the clearing process of the pull-back game number counter in the step S556 may be omitted. However, when “No” is determined in step S560, which will be described later, the withdrawal game number counter is cleared via step S556.
In step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference counter. Thus, when the withdrawal flag is off and the withdrawal game number counter is “0” (cleared), the sub difference number counter is cleared (set to “0”), and thereafter, “0” is maintained until AT starts. maintain.

If it is determined in step S551 that the BB is in operation and the process proceeds to step S558, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is the final game in the BB operation (BB game). The determination as to whether or not the game is the final game of the BB game may be made by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game on the sub-control board 80 side, or may be transmitted from the main control board 50. You may judge based on the command which comes.
When it is determined that it is the final game of the BB game, the process proceeds to step S559, and when it is determined that it is not the final game, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S559, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S560, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S560, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter is less than “2000 (D)”. When it is determined that the sub difference number counter is less than “2000 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S561, and the withdrawal game number counter is reset to “50 (D)”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished. As a result, the BB game is executed when the withdrawal flag is on, and when the sub difference counter is less than “2000 (D)” in the final game of the BB game, the withdrawal period (50 games) is resumed from the next game. ) Will be newly set. That is, when the number of withdrawal games is set to the initial value “50” after the AT ends, the BB game is executed during the withdrawal period, and the difference counter is less than “2000 (D)” in the final game of the BB game. The number of withdrawal games is reset to “50”.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S560 that the sub difference number counter is not less than “2000 (D)”, the process proceeds to step S555. In step S555 and subsequent steps, the withdrawal flag is turned off, the withdrawal game number counter is cleared, and the sub difference number counter is cleared. Thereby, the pullback period ends. In this way, in the final game of the BB game, when the withdrawal period is in progress, the sub difference number at that time is determined, and when the sub difference number is “2000 (D)” or more, the withdrawal period ends. .

In the sub difference number counter management described above, the sub difference number counter is updated at the timing when the bet command is received. That is, the sub difference number is updated before all the reels 31 are stopped. On the other hand, the difference counter is executed by advantageous section counter management of the game end check process, so that the bet number is also subtracted after all reels 31 are stopped.
Accordingly, the sub difference counter may also execute the subtraction of the bet number and the addition of the payout number after the all reels 31 are stopped, similarly to the difference counter.

Also, the sub difference number counter stores the value (decreased value) even if the difference number at the end of the game becomes minus (even when a carry occurs). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Similarly to the difference counter, when the sub difference number counter is negative at the end of the game (when a carry is generated), it may be corrected to “0”.
Furthermore, even if the sub-difference number counter may be negative, the image display device 23 displays the difference number “0”.

In this case, processing is performed as follows.
As described above, the sub difference number counter is a 2-byte counter, and the upper limit value thereof is “2414 (D)”, that is, “096E (H)”. Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is “0 (H)”. Therefore, it can be determined whether or not a carry has occurred by determining whether or not the value of the most significant digit is “0 (H)”. When it is determined that a carry has occurred (the value of the most significant digit is not “0 (H)”), the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is set to “0”.

  In the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, BB is taken as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same can be applied to a sub-bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)). In the sub bonus, the number of games, the number of payouts, or the number of differences is set as an end condition. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether or not the sub bonus symbol is stopped and displayed. In step S551, it is determined whether or not a sub bonus game is in progress. Furthermore, in step S558, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the sub bonus game.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Subsequently, a twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specified number (the number of bets) is instructed before the game starts.
The display of the push order instruction information is the operation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). Here, the “instruction function” is a device that facilitates winning. Therefore, the specified number of instructions is not an operation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a prescribed number of instructions may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating the accessory condition device, the specified number for each RT, and the winning number in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58 (A), the accessory condition device (special role) includes BB1 and BB2. When BB1 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops, the game shifts to BB1 game. The BB1 game ends with payout exceeding 100 cards. After the end of the BB1 game, the game shifts to non-RT.
When BB2 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops, the game shifts to BB2 game. The BB2 game ends with payout exceeding 30 cards. After the end of the BB2 game, the game shifts to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), RT includes non-RT, inside BB1, inside BB2, during operation of BB1, and during operation of BB2.
Non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 wins. If BB1 is won in the non-RT, the process moves to the inside of BB1, and if BB2 is won, the process moves to the inside of BB2.
The inside of BB1 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops inside BB1, BB1 is in operation, that is, shifts to BB1 game. Similarly, the inside of BB2 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops inside BB2, BB2 is operating, that is, shifts to BB2 game.
There is only one special role that can carry over the winning. Therefore, BB2 is not won when it is inside BB1. Similarly, BB1 is not won when inside BB2.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the prescribed number is limited to “3” during BB1 operation and BB2 operation (during operation of the accessory). The game cannot be started with the bet number “1” or “2”.
On the other hand, the specified number in the non-RT, BB1 inside and BB2 inside when the accessory is not in operation is “2” or “3”. As a result, the game can be started if the specified number is “2” or “3”.
In FIG. 58C, the internal lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is “65536”. For example, the winning probability of winning number “1” (normal replay) in non-RT is “9000/65536”. Further, the advantageous section lottery placement number indicates the placement number when the denominator is “16384”. Therefore, when the advantageous section lottery number is “16384”, it means that the advantageous section is won with a probability of “16384/16384”.
As shown in FIG. 58 (C), in the non-RT, BB2 is lottery for the prescribed number “2”, but BB1 is not lottery. On the other hand, for the specified number “3”, BB1 is drawn, but BB2 is not drawn.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), when the specified number “3” of the non-RT or the specified number “3” in the inside of the BB 2 is set, the lottery of the advantageous section can be selected. In the lottery of the advantageous section, it is set so that the advantageous section is always won except when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the game section can be made an almost advantageous section. In other words, the twelfth embodiment is the above-mentioned “7P” type specification.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game progresses in the inside of the BB2 and with the specified number “3”. Then, an AT is drawn in the BB2, and when the AT is won, the AT is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that BB2 carrying over the winning will not win.
For example, in the case of non-RT at the present time, it is necessary to shift from non-RT to inside BB2 (win BB2 in non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play a game with the specified number “2”.
Therefore, if it is non-RT at the present time, a game is played with the specified number “2” to win BB2, and the next game is shifted to the inside of BB2. Furthermore, since it is when the prescribed number “3” is received in the advantageous section in the inside of BB2, the game proceeds with the prescribed number “3” in the inside of BB2.

In addition, the symbol combination BB2 won by the prescribed number “2” cannot stop and display the symbol combination unless the prescribed number “2”. Similarly, BB1 won with the specified number “3” cannot stop and display the symbol combination on the active line unless the specified number is “3”.
For this reason, when the BB2 is won with the prescribed number “2” in the non-RT, the game moves into the inside of the BB2, and the game is progressing with the prescribed number “3”, even if the winning combination is not won, the BB2 The symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped on the active line.
Thus, in the twelfth embodiment, the special combination is not a specification for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the selected special combination, shifting to the special game, and increasing the medal in the special game. In other words, for creating the inside of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 58 (C), in non-RT, BB2 can be won with a probability of about “1/5”, so that it is possible to shift from non-RT to the inside of BB2 at an early stage.
Further, in the inside of BB2, when winning a small role or a replay, the winning section is won with a probability of 100%. Therefore, most of the game periods are advantageous sections within the BB2. Of course, it is possible to set the winning probability of the advantageous section to less than 100%.

  In addition, the instruction function can be activated (the process related to the instruction function is executed) only when a game is played with one specified number, particularly, the specified number “3” in the present embodiment. Therefore, when the AT is won during the advantageous section in the BB2 and AT is executed, when the game is started with the prescribed number “3” and the pushing order bell is won, the instruction function is activated. The push order indication information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. On the other hand, when the game is started with the specified number (the number of bets) “2” during the AT, the instruction function is not activated even when the push order bell is won.

Similarly to the eleventh embodiment, even when a game is played with the specified number “2” during AT, the difference counter is updated based on the bet number and the payout number in the game, and Update the advantageous section clear counter. However, the AT game number counter (AT difference number counter in the case of the difference number management AT) is not updated. On the other hand, when a game is played with the specified number “3” during an AT, a difference counter, an advantageous section clear counter, and an AT game number counter (AT difference number counter in the case of a difference number management type AT) Update everything.
Regardless of the specified number, RT always shifts when the transition condition is satisfied (when the symbol combination that satisfies the transition condition is stopped and displayed). On the other hand, the main game state (usually, CZ, AT, etc.) may be set so as to be able to shift any specified number, or the game is played with one specified number (for example, “3”). It may be set so that migration is possible only when

  Inside BB2, when a player starts a game with the specified number “2” due to a mistake in the operation of the player, and the game is unwinned, the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 carrying over the winning can be stopped and displayed. It becomes. On the other hand, when a game is started with the prescribed number “2” due to a player's operation error and one of the winning combinations is won in the game, the winning of the winning combination in the game is given priority. The symbol combination corresponding to BB2 that has won is not stopped. However, when a replay is won in the game, the next game will also be played with the bet number “2”. Therefore, in the next game, the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 that has won is also displayed. there is a possibility.

  If the game starts with the prescribed number “2” inside the BB2 and at the AT, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB2 is stopped and displayed, the BB2 game is started. And when BB2 game is complete | finished, it transfers to non-RT (AT). In this non-RT, information corresponding to the specified number “2” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 to notify the player that the game should be played with the specified number “2” (specified number instruction). . This is because the game is played with the prescribed number “2”, BB2 is won, and the BB2 is moved inside. Therefore, in AT and non-RT, the specified number “2” is instructed until BB2 is won.

  As described above, when information corresponding to the specified number “2” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, “0A” is displayed. The specified number “2” is not limited to “0A”, but is not confused with any of the payout number, setting change display “88”, error number, and pressing order instruction information. It may be. For example, since the maximum medal number displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 is “15”, for example, “22” may be displayed as information corresponding to the specified number “2”.

In the present embodiment, the specified number is specified only during AT, and the specified number is not specified during non-AT. For example, after the end of the BB2 game, when a transition is made to non-RT, if the AT is not at that time, the specified number is not indicated. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary to play the game with the prescribed number “2” by the player's judgment and shift to the inside of the BB2.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the case of a non-RT and non-advantageous section, when a game is played with the specified number “3”, if a small role or replay is won, the advantageous section is also won. When the non-RT and advantageous section is reached, the specified number “2” may be indicated (even if it is non-AT).
Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the above, and when the transition is made to non-RT, the prescribed number “2” may be indicated regardless of AT / non-AT and advantageous / non-advantaged sections.

  In non-RT, when the player sets the bet number to “2”, the specified number may not be instructed, and when the player sets the bet number to “3”, the specified number may be specified. In the main process of FIG. 41, the bet number is determined in the medal management process in step S276. However, when it is determined that the current bet number is “2”, the specified number “2” is not indicated. (Execution number data clear processing is executed) When the current bet number is “3”, the specified number “2” is instructed (the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data). Can be mentioned.

  Further, when the BB2 game is finished and the process shifts to non-RT, a wait process may be executed at the end of the final game of the BB2 game. During this wait process, the game cannot proceed (the main process shown in FIG. 41). For this reason, after the wait process is completed, the process proceeds to the next game (non-RT) game start set process, where a prescribed number is designated.

In the non-RT during the AT, the instruction of the prescribed number “2” continues until BB2 is won. Therefore, the game may be completed in one game or may be performed in a plurality of games.
As shown in FIG. 58 (C), when a game is played with a specified number “2” in non-RT, there are cases where a replay (normal replay, watermelon play, cherry replay) is won. As a result of playing the game with the prescribed number “2”, when the replay is won, whether or not to designate the prescribed number “2” in the next game is arbitrary. In the non-RT and AT, until the BB2 is won, the specified number “2” may be instructed before the game starts regardless of whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped. Alternatively, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, in the next game (replay), the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (the number of bets), so that the specified number is not indicated in the game. It may be.

This is the same when, for example, a non-RT and AT game is played with the specified number “3”, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed. In the next game (re-game), the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (the number of bets). In this case, the specified number may not be specified. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in the game cannot be selected, the prescribed number “2” may be designated for the purpose of alerting.
In non-RT and AT, when a game is played with the specified number “2”, BB2 is won and the game moves to the inside of the BB2 from the next game, the specified number of instructions will be given unless the game is changed to non-RT again. Do not do.

  The timing for designating the specified number is after all the reels 31 are stopped, and when there is a payout based on the winning of the small role, after the payout process is finished, and the start switch 41 of the next game is operated. Before (for example, before medals can be betted (before receiving a bet)). Therefore, after the payout based on the winning of the small role is made in the final game of the BB2 game, the prescribed number “2” is instructed before the game of the next game (non-RT) is started. As shown in FIG. 42 (eleventh embodiment), in step S321 of the game start set process (MS_GAME_SET), the main control board 50 sets a specified number of instruction conditions when the game is non-RT and AT. Judging to meet.

When it is determined in step S321 in FIG. 42 that the specified number of instruction conditions is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and the acquired number data includes “0B” as the specified instruction number display data corresponding to the specified instruction number “2”. (H) "is stored.
As a result, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing of turning on the digit 3a (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78), among the specified specified number display data “0B (H)”, the upper digit is displayed in step S511. The offset “0 (H)” is acquired, and segment data displaying “0” is acquired based on the LED segment table 2 in step S514. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, “0” is displayed in the digit 3a (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

  In addition, at the timing when the digit 4a (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) is lit, the lower digit offset “B (H)” is acquired in step S513 out of the specified specified number display data “0B (H)”. In step S514, segment data indicating “A” is acquired based on the LED segment table 2. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, “A” is displayed in the digit 4a (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start set process in step S272 is a process before betting is possible and before the start switch 41 is operated. Before the switch 41 is operated, the specified number of instructions is displayed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 42, after the specified instruction number display data is stored as the acquired number data in step S322, automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when the specified number is instructed in the next game at the time of replay winning, the specified number is instructed before automatic betting. Thereby, it is possible to promptly specify the prescribed number to the player.
In FIG. 41, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the acquired number data (designated specified number display data) is cleared in step S280. Thereby, in the interrupt processing after step S280, “00” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

  Here, when the information “0A” corresponding to the specified prescribed number “2” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and the game is played with the prescribed number “2”, the instruction function is activated even during AT. Does not work. That is, even when the push order bell is won in the game, the push order indication information is not displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. This is because in the present embodiment, the processing related to the instruction function is limited to the specified number “3”. Accordingly, when the start switch 41 is operated after the information “0A” corresponding to the specified prescribed number “2” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, the acquisition number display LED 78 is at least until all reels 31 are stopped. Is displayed as “00”.

  On the other hand, in AT and non-RT, the information “0A” corresponding to the designated prescribed number “2” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, but the game is played with the prescribed number “3” and the winning order is won. When this is done, push order instruction information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. This process is executed in step S284 in FIG. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in this case displays information “0A” corresponding to the specified prescribed number “2” before the game starts, and when the start switch 41 is operated (with the prescribed number “3”), “ After “00” is displayed, when the push order bell is selected, push order instruction information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed.

Further, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is cleared in step S290 (after all reels are stopped) in FIG. Since the acquired number data is cleared in step S280 after the start switch 41 is operated, the process of step S290 may be skipped in a game in which the push order display information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Then, when the small role wins and the medal payout process by winning is executed in step S294, the number-of-acquisition data is incremented by “1”, and accordingly, the number-of-payout is displayed on the number-of-acquisition display LED 78. The

  Then, when proceeding to the game start set process in step S272 of the next game, as described above, when the condition for specifying the specified number is satisfied, information corresponding to the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. When displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions, the specified number of display data is stored as acquired number data, but at this time, the payout number data of the previous game may be stored as acquired number data. Therefore, the acquisition number data clear process may be executed before storing the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions. For example, in FIG. 42, before the step S311 is executed, a clear process for the acquired number data is executed.

In addition, in AT and non-RT, even though the prescribed number “2” is instructed, the game is executed with the prescribed number “3” ignoring it, and BB1 is won, and the inside of the BB1 is moved, Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute the BB1 game.
In order to suppress such an action, for example, the processing related to the instruction function is not executed inside the BB1. In addition, the BB1 game may be set so that the payout rate is less than “1” so that medals cannot be increased in the BB1 game.
Note that it is up to the player to decide which number of games to play, so even if a game with the prescribed number “3” is played in AT and non-RT, There will be no penalty for the person.

In the above example, when the specified number is indicated, the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified specified number is acquired. In addition to displaying on the number display LED 78, the specified number of instructions may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the sub-control board 80 side).
Here, the display start timing when the specified number of instructions is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is set to be substantially the same as the display start timing for displaying the specified number of instructions on the acquired number display LED 78 (before the game starts). It is done.
Furthermore, the display end timing after the specified number of instructions is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or different from the display end timing after the specified number of instructions is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
As the display end timing after the specified number of instructions is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like,
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated (2) When all the reels 31 are stopped (3) When the start switch 41 is operated in the prescribed number “2” game (4) All reels in the prescribed number “2” game (5) After winning BB2 in the specified number “2” games (6) Stopping all reels 31 in the specified number “2” games and games won in BB2
In addition, when the specified number of instructions is displayed on a dedicated display, it is possible to continue displaying the specified number of instructions on the image display device 23 or the like across a plurality of games.

<13th Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is three.
In contrast, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four.
FIG. 59 is a front view, a plan view, and a right side view showing the outline of the configuration including the reel 31 (31A to 31D) and the stop switch 42 (42A to 42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31 </ b> A to 31 </ b> D are shown so as not to be blocked by the front surface of the front door 12. Further, in the plan view, the reel 31 positioned rearward from the front surface of the front door 12 is shown. In the right side view, the medal slot 47 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 59, a front surface of the front door 12 is provided with a control panel 12c, and an operation button 24 and a medal slot 47 are disposed on the control panel 12c. The medal slot 47 is the same as that shown in FIG. Further, although not shown in FIG. 1, the operation button 24 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 so that bidirectional communication with the sub-control board 80 is possible. For example, at least a part of the operation button 24 can be turned on, and the lighting mode of the operation button 24 can be controlled by the control of the sub-control board 80. Further, when the operation button 24 is operated, the signal is input to the sub-control board 80.
A start switch 41 and four stop switches 42 </ b> A to 42 </ b> D are arranged below the control panel 12 c of the front door 12.

In the front view of FIG. 59, a line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint between the four reels 31A to 31D is defined as a line L1 (center line). The line L1 is at an intermediate position between the reels 31B and 31C. The distance between the reels 31A and 31B, the distance between the reels 31B and 31C, and the distance between the reels 31C and 31D are all W1 (uniform). Therefore, the reels 31A and 31B and the reels 31C and 31D are arranged at symmetrical positions with respect to the line L1.
Also, the four stop switches 42A to 42D are all W2 (uniform) between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D. And it arrange | positions so that the line L1 may pass through the intermediate position of stop switch 42B and 42C.

The gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2 = W1), may be larger than the gap W1 (W2> W1), or may be smaller than the gap W1 (W2 <W1).
Furthermore, in the front view, a vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is referred to as a line L2, and a vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is referred to as a line L3. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is arranged on the right side (center side) from the line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is arranged on the left side (center side) from the line L3.

Further, in the front view, if the interval (center distance) between the reels 31 is W3, the distance between the reels 31A and 31B, the reels 31B and 31C, and the reels 31C and 31D are all W3 (constant). It is.
Further, if the interval (center distance) between the stop switches 42 is W4, the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D is all W4 (constant). ).

Further, as shown in the front view of FIG. 59, a part of the spherical body (operation part) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged to intersect the line L2. However, not limited to this, the spherical body (operation part) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged on the left side (outward) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2, or the line L2 without intersecting the line L2. You may arrange | position on the right side (near center).
In the front view, the medal slot 47 is arranged so that the medal slot 47 and the line L4 intersect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the right side (outward) of the line L4 so as not to cross the line L4. Alternatively, the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the left side (closer to the center) than the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed horizontally long, and a line in contact with the left end of the operation button 24 is a line L4, and a line in contact with the right end of the operation button 24 is a line L5.
In this case, in the front view, the stop switch 42A is arranged so that a part of the leftmost stop switch 42A intersects the line L4. Further, the stop switch 42D is arranged so that a part of the rightmost stop switch 42D intersects the line L5.

  Further, as shown in the plan view, an index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed by engraving, printing, or the like, and in the example of FIG. 59, has an arrow shape facing the stop switch 42 side. Further, the left index 12d is disposed on the center line of the stop switch 42A (it may be slightly deviated from the center line). Further, the right index 12d is disposed on the center line of the stop switch 42D (it may be slightly shifted from the center line).

With the above arrangement, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A with the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, the rightmost stop switch 42D can be operated using the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A using the left index 12d as a guide. Similarly, the stop switch 42D can be operated using the index 12d on the right as a guide.

When there are three reels 31 and stop switches 42, as shown in FIG. 58 (a twelfth embodiment), a maximum “3! = 6” selection order can be provided. On the other hand, when there are four reels 31 and four stop switches 42, it is possible to provide a pressing order of “4! = 24” at the maximum.
The more the stop switch 42 is pressed, the higher the base during non-AT (the number of outs per 100 ins during non-AT operation and non-AT. For example, for 100 ins If the number of out sheets is 50, it becomes the base 50).

  When the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, as the push order bells to be selected, 1234 bells (stop switch 42A → 42B → 42C → 42D indicates the correct push order), 1243 bells,... -It can be made into 24 types of 4312 bell and 4321 bell. As shown in FIG. 58, if the winning number of each push order bell is the same, the winning number of each push order bell may be set to “1500”. Thus, since the number of wins for each push order bell can be reduced to [1/4], the probability that the push order operated by the player matches the correct push order at the time of push order bell win is reduced accordingly. can do.

Here, when the number of the reels 31 and the stop switches 42 is three, “123” or “left middle right” can be displayed during AT. Therefore, it is easy to intuitively understand the correct answer pressing order.
On the other hand, when the number of the reels 31 and the stop switches 42 is four, the following method can be given as to how to notify the correct answer pressing order during AT.

  For example, as a first method, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4”, respectively, and the order of the stop switches 42 to be operated is notified. It is done. For example, when the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is the order of the stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, and 42B, “3412” is notified (at least one of image display, sound display, and lamp color notification). ). Alternatively, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to “A”, “B”, “C”, and “D”, respectively. In the above example, “CDAB” is notified.

Further, as a second method, a color for identifying the background of the reel 31 and / or the stop switch 42 can be given.
For example, the background of the reel 31A and / or the stop switch 42A is white, the background of the reel 31B and / or the stop switch 42B is blue, the background of the reel 31C and / or the stop switch 42C is yellow, The base of the reel 31D and / or the color of the stop switch 42D is red (each has a different color). In the above example, instead of the notification “3412”, “yellow, red, white, and blue” is notified (at least one of image display, sound display, and lamp color notification).

Furthermore, as a third method, among the stop switches 42 to be operated from the first to the fourth, the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth (last) is darkly displayed (or hidden). Is mentioned. In this case, “the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated first> the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated second ≧ corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third. The brightness of the image is set to “the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth”.
When the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or hidden), and corresponds to the fourth stop switch 42 to be operated. For example, the brightness of the image to be set may be set to the same level as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
For example, when the image of the pressing order of “3412” is notified as in the above example, the image is first displayed as “3 • 12”. Note that “●” is an image corresponding to the “4” th pressing order, and may be darkened (hidden) so that the character “4” cannot be seen at all, or “4” The character may be dim enough to be recognized.

When the image display “3 • 12” is displayed, the image display is the same as in the case of 6 selections, so that the player can easily understand the pressing order intuitively. When the first stop switch 42C is operated, one of the following 1) to 3) is executed.
1) “1” corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to “●”, and “●” so far is changed to “4”. Specifically, the image is displayed as “34 • 2”.
2) “1” corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to a display such as “−” or “◯”, and the previous “●” is changed to “4”. Specifically, “34-2” and “34 ○ 2” are displayed as images.
3) Change “1” corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to blank (no image), and change the previous “●” to “4”. Specifically, an image is displayed as “34 * 2” (“*” means blank).

Further, after the second stop, it is possible to display images as “34 ●●”, “34--”, “34OO”, and “34 **” in the same manner as described above.
Further, after the third stop, it is possible to display images as “● 4 ●●”, “−4−−”, “◯ 4OO”, and “* 4 **”.
Alternatively, after the third stop, it is possible to erase the images in the pressing order.
Even when the image is displayed as “4312” for all the pressing orders as in the first method described above, after the stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is displayed. Is preferably erased as in 1) to 3) above, because the operated stop switch 42 is easy to understand. Specifically, after “4312” is displayed, “43 ● 2” (after operation of the stop switch 42C) → “43 ●●” (after operation of the stop switch 42D) → “4 ●●●” (stop switch 42B) (After the operation) and an image display (“●” may be “◯”, “−”, “*” as described above).

Furthermore, as a fourth method, a pressing order is notified using a four-character idiom. For example, when using “Spring / Summer / Autumn / Winter” as one of the four-character idioms, the correct pressing sequence is “Spring → Summer → Autumn → Winter”.
When the pressing order is “3412” as described above, notification (image display, display by sound) may be performed as in the first method.
Alternatively, as in the third method, an image display of “Autumn / Spring / Summer” is displayed before the first stop, and an image display of “Autumn / Winter / Summer” is displayed after the first stop.
In any of the first method to the fourth method, when a pressing order error occurs in the middle, the image in the pressing order may be displayed as it is or when the pressing order error occurs. The image may be deleted.

  Note that, in the thirteenth embodiment, when 24 push order bells are provided as described above, 24 kinds of push order instruction numbers and push order instruction information are provided. For example, if the pressing order instruction information is “A1” to “A9”, “AA”, “AC”, “AF”, “F1” to “F9”, “FA”, “FC”, “FF”, There are 24 types.

Although the 11th to 13th embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
A. Eleventh Embodiment (1) In the non-favorable section, the lottery of the advantageous section was performed only when the result of lottery becomes the target lottery result. As described above, when the winning lottery result is not won (when the condition device is not activated as a result of the internal drawing), the advantageous zone shift lottery, which is a process related to the advantageous zone, is set as described above. This is because it was considered preferable not to do this. Therefore, it is not always necessary to set in this way, and an advantageous section shift lottery may be executed when a winning combination is not won.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, the AT lottery process is executed after the advantageous section shift lottery. Here, a winning lottery result (winning number) determined for the advantageous section is provided, and when the winning lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section transition process (FIG. 45) is executed without executing the advantageous section transition lottery. May be. Similarly, a role lottery result (winning number) determined by the AT is always provided, and when the result of the role lottery is reached, the AT lottery is not executed and the AT set process (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46). May be executed.
Furthermore, a winning lottery result (winning number) determined for the advantageous section and AT is always provided, and when the winning lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section shifting process and the AT lottery process are not executed, AT set processing may be executed.
Further, when a winning lottery result (winning number) that is not won in the advantageous segment shift lottery is provided, the advantageous segment shift lottery may be executed even when the winning lottery result is obtained. In this case, the selected number of advantageous sections may be set to “0”.

(3) When the AT is won, the initial number of games of the AT is determined, the number of games is stored in the AT game number counter, and when the AT game number counter becomes “0”, the AT is terminated. However, the AT is not limited to such a game number management AT but may be a difference number management AT. In the case of a difference number management type AT, an initial value of a difference number that can be acquired is determined at the time of winning an AT and is stored in an AT difference number counter (different from the difference number counter). Then, every time there is a payout, the difference sheet number is subtracted from the AT difference sheet counter. When the AT difference sheet counter becomes “0”, the AT is terminated.
Also in the case of such a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is subtracted when it is one specified number (for example, “3”), but when it is another specified number (for example, “2”), the AT is subtracted. Does not decrement the difference counter.

  (4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in FIG. 39, the setting can be changed after the initialization process is executed. For this reason, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit before the power is turned off, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished before the setting can be changed when the setting change process is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the state in which the setting can be changed is terminated (after “Yes” in step S242 in FIG. 39), and before the main process is started (before step S248), the advantageous section is displayed. The LED flag clear (initialization) process may be executed. In this way, it is possible to perform control so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off after the set value is determined.

(5) One advantageous section clear counter and one difference counter are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two advantageous section clear counters and two difference counters (important counters) may be provided to check consistency.
For example, a first advantageous section clear counter and a second advantageous section clear counter are provided as the advantageous section clear counter. During the advantageous section, both the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter are updated every time the game is consumed. Further, for example, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, in the determination in step S424, the first advantageous section clear counter is determined. When it is determined that the first advantageous interval clear counter is “0”, whether or not the value of the second advantageous interval clear counter is “0”, or the first advantageous interval clear counter and the second advantageous interval clear It is determined whether or not the counter has the same value. If it is determined that the values are “0” or the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

The same applies to the difference counter.
As the difference counter, a first difference counter and a second difference counter are provided. Each time the game is consumed, both the first difference number counter and the second difference number counter are updated. Further, for example, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, in the determination of step S434, the first difference counter is determined. When it is determined that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, whether the second difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, or whether the first difference counter and the second difference counter have the same value Determine whether. When it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded or the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

As described above, if the advantageous section clear counter value and / or the difference number counter value are judged, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (incorrect value) due to the influence of noise, the advantageous section clear counter value Or “0” and / or whether or not the difference counter value exceeds the upper limit value can be determined more accurately.
If the first advantageous interval clear counter and the second advantageous interval clear counter do not match, or if the first difference counter and the second difference counter do not match, for example, an error display is displayed to advance the game. (Main processing) is stopped.

  (6) In the sub difference number management process of FIG. 56, it is determined in step S544 that the symbol combination corresponding to BB has been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and it is determined that the sub difference number counter has exceeded “2164 (D)”. When the sub difference number counter is cleared, a special effect different from the normal BB game may be output in the BB game. A special effect during the BB game can indicate to the player that the sub difference counter has been cleared.

  Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub difference counter is not judged. In the BB game, each game, the sub difference counter is, for example, “2000 (D)” (this is an example of a threshold value. It may be determined whether or not it is exceeded. If it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds “2000 (D)”, the sub difference number counter is cleared, and a special effect (an effect suggesting that the sub difference number counter has been cleared) from the next game. It may be output.

  Furthermore, in the above case, when a power interruption occurs in a game where the sub difference counter during the BB game exceeds “2000 (D)” (the special performance has not been output yet), the power is restored from the power interruption. The special effect may be output from the played game. In this case, at the time of return from power-off, it is sufficient to read the sub-difference counter value or the fact that the BB game is in progress and determine whether to output a special effect.

  Furthermore, if a power interruption occurs during rotation of the reel 31 of a game in which the sub difference counter during the BB game exceeds “2000 (D)”, even if the special effect is output from the game that has recovered from the power interruption. Good. Therefore, in this case, when there is no power interruption, a special effect is output from the next game, but when there is a power interruption during the rotation of the reel 31, a special effect is output from the game. Become.

  (7) A game is played with the specified number “2” during AT (when the specified number is “2”, the indicating function does not operate), the push order bell is won, and the stop switch 42 is operated by chance in the correct push order. When there is a small part payout and the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)”, at the end of the game, an effect such as displaying an image such as “END” may be output to notify the end of AT. preferable. This is to prevent the AT from being ended in a game in which the correct push order is not notified and giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  (8) On the other hand, as described above, in order to prevent the AT from being terminated in a game in which the correct push order is not notified, for example, when a game is played with the prescribed number “2”, the push order bell is won. Even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order, the payout number of the game is set to “2” or less (the difference number of the game is “0” or less) so that the AT does not end in the game. May be.

(9) As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the sub difference number counter continued counting even during the BB game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the BB is won during AT and the game is shifted to the BB game, the sub difference counter may not be updated (the update of the sub difference counter is interrupted during the BB game). .
In this case, for example, in FIG. 56, before step S531, it is determined whether or not the BB is operating (determined by the operating state flag). When the BB is operating, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
Further, when the sub difference counter is not updated during the BB game, the processing in steps S551 and S558 to S561 in FIG. 57 is not necessary. If “No” in the step S547, the process proceeds to a step S552.

B. Twelfth Embodiment (1) Similar to the eleventh embodiment, in FIG. 58, when a winning combination is not won, the transition lottery of the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is not executed. As described above, rules are taken into consideration. Therefore, if the rules are not taken into consideration, the advantageous lot transition lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the advantage lot transition lottery (processing related to the advantage interval) is performed only in one prescribed number (the prescribed number “3” in the example of FIG. 58) in one gaming state (RT). I did it. This is because, according to the rules, it is considered that the transition lottery of the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is determined to be only one specified number in one gaming state (RT). Therefore, if this point is not taken into consideration, the transition lottery of the advantageous section may be executed with a plurality of prescribed numbers in one gaming state (RT).

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, the specified number “2” is designated for non-RT and AT. However, when the game is the final game of the AT game, it is not necessary to indicate the specified number.
(3) In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that a game is played inside BB2, and it is irregular that BB2 wins and shifts to BB2 game. However, the specification is not limited to this, and the specification may be such that, after the AT is executed inside the BB2, the BB2 is won and the BB2 game is executed when the AT end condition is satisfied. In this case, when the AT end condition is satisfied inside the BB2, after the game satisfying the AT end condition is completed (after all reels 31 are stopped and the payout process is executed at the time of winning the small role), The specified number “2” is instructed before the start of the next game (non-AT) (before betting becomes possible), and the player is prompted to win BB2. In the twelfth embodiment, since the prescribed number “2” wins BB2, the prescribed number for winning BB2 is “2”, but for example, when a prescribed BB is awarded with the prescribed number “1” In order to win the BB, the specified number “1” is instructed.
Further, the BB game in such a specification may be a BB game in which medals increase or a BB game in which medals decrease.

(4) When instructing the specified number, it was executed in the game start set process (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game end check process (FIG. 50) may be executed. For example, in the BB2 game, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the BB2 game, and if it is the final game, the specified number of the next game is instructed during the game end check process. However, in the final game of the BB2 game, when a small role wins and there is a payout, and when the payout number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, a specified number is indicated after the payout number is displayed. If the LED indicating the specified number is a dedicated LED, the specified number of the next game can be specified to the dedicated LED while the payout number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when a freeze is executed in the final game of the BB2 game, when the prescribed number of games is designated at the end of the game, any timing before executing the freeze, during the execution of the freeze, or after the end of the freeze It may be.

  (5) As in the twelfth embodiment, when the game can be executed with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers, the function of the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed. For example, in a situation where it is advantageous to play a game with a specified number “3” in a game in an advantageous section (for example, in the case of inside BB2 in FIG. 58), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b is dedicated to three bets. It may be set to a button. In other words, when the number of credits is “3”, in a situation where it is advantageous to play a game with the specified number “3” in the advantageous section, setting the “3” bet when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated. To do. On the other hand, when the number of credits is “2”, in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game in the advantageous section and with the specified number “3”, even if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the “2” bet is not made. Set as follows.

  Alternatively, even in a situation where a game can be played with the specified number “3”, if the number of credits is “2”, setting the “2” bet when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated is set. Also good. In particular, in FIG. 58, in the case of non-RT and AT, when the number of credits is “2”, it is preferable to set the bet “2” when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated.

(6) As in the twelfth embodiment, when most of the game sections are set as advantageous sections, the instruction function can be activated at an arbitrary timing. For example, a difference number counter (which is different from the difference number counter) that can count minus the difference number is provided, and a payout rate for a predetermined period is calculated. When the payout rate for a predetermined period reaches a predetermined lower limit value (the predetermined lower limit value is set to be higher than the lower limit value in the rules, for example), the instruction function is activated to increase the payout rate. Also good. When the payout rate increases and recovers to the reference value, the operation of the instruction function is terminated.
Such an operation of the instruction function when the predetermined lower limit value is reached may be included in “AT”, or may not be included in “AT”. However, since there is no change in operating the instruction function, this corresponds to processing related to the instruction function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is the acquired number display LED 78. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other existing LEDs may be set, or dedicated LEDs for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions may be separately provided.
When a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is provided separately, even if the start switch 41 is operated after displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions in the game start set process, the specified number of instructions It is not necessary to delete the information corresponding to. Further, even if all the reels 31 are stopped, the small role is won, and the medal is paid out, the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions does not have to be deleted.
In addition, when a dedicated LED that displays information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is provided, the specified number of instructions is not confused with the number of payouts, error numbers, etc. Can do. For example, if the specified number of instructions is “2”, “2” can be displayed.

  (8) In the twelfth embodiment, an example in which the prescribed number “2” is instructed has been given. However, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the prescribed number “1” may be designated or the prescribed number “3” may be designated. Conceivable. If the specification has the possibility of indicating any of the specified numbers “1” to “3”, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 when indicating the specified number “1” is “A1”. For example, the display indicating “2” is “A2” and the display indicating the specified number “3” is “A3”.

C. Thirteenth Embodiment (1) In the front view of FIG. 59, the line L1 passes through the center of the four reels 31 and passes through the center of the four stop switches 42. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the entire four stop switches 42 may be arranged on the right side of the position in FIG. 58, for example, so that a part of the stop switch 42B intersects the line L1. On the other hand, the entire four stop switches 42 may be arranged to the left of the position shown in FIG. 58, and for example, a part of the stop switch 42C may be arranged to intersect the line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of FIG. 59, Roman numerals from “1” to “4” are written below the four reels 31. However, the Roman numeral portion may be used as a lamp. In this case, for example, when the stop switch to be operated next is 42C, the Roman numeral “3” lamp is turned on.
Further, different colors may be given to the ranges in which Roman numerals from “1” to “4” are written, and the colors corresponding to the Roman numerals “1” to “4” may be assigned to the stop switches 42A to 42D. Can be mentioned. In the example described above, the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the stop switch 42C is yellow, and the color of the stop switch 42D is red. In this case, the range of the Roman numeral “1” is white, the range of the Roman numeral “2” is blue, the range of the Roman numeral “3” is yellow, and the range of the Roman numeral “4” is red. It is done.

  (3) Further, the portion including the periphery of the reel 31 may be configured from the image display device 23. As described above, a different color is assigned to each stop switch 42. In this case, for example, when the stop switch 42B (blue) is designated at the time of notification of the pressing order, the periphery of the reel 31B is caused to emit blue light.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the interval W3 between the reels 31 is set to be longer than the interval W4 between the stop switches.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set substantially the same. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31.

  (5) In the thirteenth embodiment, as a push order bell, a maximum of 24 choice push orders can be provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a first stop push order bell. Here, in the prior art, the first stop push order bell has three options. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, four options can be set. When displaying the correct push order when winning the first stop push order bell, for example, if the correct stop switch 42 is the stop switch 42C, an image display “XX × 1 ×” may be mentioned.

  Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a first stop and a second stop push order bell (a push order bell in which a correct push order is set for the first stop and the second stop). For example, the first stop is set as the stop switch 42C, the second stop is set as the stop switch 42A, and the third stop and the fourth stop are optional (any of the stop switches 42B and 42D is possible). In this case, the correct answer pressing order can be set to 12 choices. Furthermore, when displaying the correct pressing order as an image, in the above example, the image may be displayed as “2 × 1 ×”. Then, after the stop switch 42C is operated, “2 × − ×” is displayed as an image.

D. Others All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combination.

<Appendix>
The invention (initial invention) described in the initial specification of the present application can include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 14, in order to solve the problems to be solved by the original invention and the problems related to the original invention, respectively. The means and the effect of the initial invention are as follows. However, the invention described in this specification is not meant to be limited to the initial inventions 1-14.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine in which processing relating to a game medium is not executed after a power failure occurs.
In a conventional gaming machine, by turning off the blocker before executing the backup process as a power-off process, even if a medal is inserted during the execution of the backup process, the medal is returned to the player via the blocker. Thus, a technique is known in which the medal addition process is not performed (for example, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-173832).
However, for example, when a power interruption occurs at the moment the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot, the medal passes through the blocker before the power interruption process is executed, and the medal is counted. There was a possibility. Note that it is not preferable in terms of control to execute the medal addition process (medal bet process or medal credit process) after the power failure occurs.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the addition processing of the game media from being executed even when the power is cut off at the same time as the game media is inserted from the game media insertion slot. .

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 1 (the corresponding embodiment will be described in parentheses)
The initial invention (first embodiment (A))
Game media slot (medal slot 47),
A state that is provided in the passage (medal passage) of the game medium (medal) inserted from the game medium insertion slot, and that permits passage of the game medium (ON state) or does not permit passage of the game medium (OFF state) ) Controllable blocker (45),
Detection means A (input sensor 44a) and B (input sensor 44b) (detection means B downstream of detection means A are provided in the passage of the game medium input from the game medium input port and capable of detecting the game medium. Located in)
When an event occurs in which the supply of power is cut off in a situation where the blocker is controlled to permit the passage of the game medium, the event of the supply of the power being cut off is detected, and T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3) is a time until the blocker is controlled in a state where passage is not permitted.
In the situation where the blocker is controlled to allow passage of gaming media, when the gaming media is released from the gaming media slot into the gaming machine, the gaming media is not visible from the front of the gaming machine. From when it becomes possible (position M2 in FIG. 2) until the detection means B detects the game medium and the detection means B no longer detects the game medium (position M4 in FIG. 2). When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
T1 <T2
It is characterized by becoming.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, a power interruption occurs when a game medium is released from the game medium insertion slot toward the inside of the game machine and the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the game machine. In such a case, until the detection means B no longer detects the game medium, the blocker is controlled so that the passage of the game medium is not permitted by detecting the event that the supply of power is cut off. , At least the detection means B does not detect it.
Therefore, since the game medium is not normally detected by the detection means A and B, the game medium addition process (bet process or credit process) is not executed. Therefore, even if the power is cut off when the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine, that is, even when the power is cut off immediately after the game medium is released inside the gaming machine, It is possible to prevent media from being accepted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game media addition process from being executed after the power is cut off.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 2 The initial invention relates to a gate trace of a substrate case in a gaming machine including a substrate case in which a control board is accommodated.
In a conventional gaming machine, a board case that houses a main control board is known. Here, since the substrate case is generally formed by molding, a gate mark remains on the substrate case. And the technique which makes this gate mark a mark is proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2017-042270).
However, since the gate trace of the substrate case has a resin cut portion, it is unclear when viewed from the outside. For this reason, there is a problem that the gate trace may be opened and the inside of the main control board may be accessed.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to suppress the goto action using the gate trace of the substrate case.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (second embodiment)
A predetermined IC (main CPU 55) having a calculation function;
A control board (main control board 50) on which the predetermined IC is mounted on one surface (the surface facing the upper surface of the upper cover 57);
A plurality of surfaces (upper surface, side surface, etc.), and a substrate case (substrate case 56 comprising an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) for accommodating the control substrate;
The substrate case is formed so that the inside is visible,
A gate mark (57b) at the time of molding the substrate case is disposed on a surface that is outside the substrate case and that faces the one surface of the control substrate (the upper surface outside the upper cover 57).
The predetermined IC of the control board is not positioned in a direction perpendicular to the facing surface from the gate mark.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, since the predetermined IC of the control board is not located in the vertical direction of the gate trace of the substrate case, the gate trace is illegally opened and the predetermined IC is accessed. This can be prevented.
Further, since the gate trace of the substrate case does not exist in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control board, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being blocked by the gate trace. As a result, it is possible to easily confirm visually whether or not the predetermined IC is illegal.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 3 The initial invention relates to processing when communication is restored from a disconnection after the disconnection occurs in the communication between the main control board and the sub control board.
In a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine is known in which a command is transmitted from a main control board to a sub control board, and the sub control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received command.
Here, a technique is known in which the sub-control board compares the command received last time with the command received this time, and determines that the command reception is abnormal based on the consistency of these received commands (for example, the special control board). No. 2014-226503).
However, when a command is transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board, a disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub control board. When the communication is restored, the sub control board may not be able to output a normal effect.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make an effect when communication is restored after a disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub control board.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (third embodiment)
A main control board (50);
A sub-control board (80) for controlling the production based on the information received from the main control board,
The sub control board can receive information of the operated stop switch (42) from the main control board,
The sub-control board can output an effect corresponding to the operation of the stop switch based on receiving information of the operated stop switch in a predetermined gaming state (AT),
The sub-control board is
In a case where a predetermined stop switch is operated in the “N” game in the predetermined gaming state, when information on the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received, a predetermined corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch Production (production when the reel corresponding to the predetermined stop switch is stopped) is output, and then information from the main control board becomes unreceivable before all remaining stop switches in the “N” game are operated. Thereafter, the information from the main control board can be received in the “N + a” game, and then the information that the specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch is operated is received in the “N + a” game. Is an effect corresponding to the operation of the specific stop switch, and an effect related to the predetermined effect (for the predetermined effect) When the predetermined information is received in the “N + a + 1” game after that, the output corresponding to the specific stop switch is output. N + a + 1 ”game output is output.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, when communication returns in the middle of the “N + a” game, an effect related to the predetermined effect of the “N” game that has been output is output. Therefore, in the “N + a” game, an effect following the “N” game can be output. Then, since the normal performance is restored when the “N + a + 1” game is entered, it is possible to prevent the production from suddenly changing due to the return of communication in the middle of the “N + a” game. Thereby, before and after the occurrence of the disconnection, it is possible to output an effect without a sense of incongruity.

4). Initial invention 4
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 4 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that allows a stop switch to be operated at high speed.
In the conventional gaming machine, when the stop switch is operated, the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to the lottery result. Further, after the reel is stopped at a predetermined position, the motor is brought into an excited state for a predetermined time. Here, when the operated stop switch is in the ON state or when the motor is in the excited state, the operation of the next stop switch is not accepted.
Here, a technique is known in which the stop operation is not accepted even if the second stop switch is operated after the first stop switch is operated until the reel status becomes the stop state ( For example, refer to JP 2017-093576 A).
However, in the above-described conventional technology, there is a problem that a game cannot be digested at high speed if a long time is required after the stop switch is operated until the next stop switch can be operated.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to make the stop switch operable at high speed.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (fourth embodiment)
Reel (31);
A motor (32) for rotating the reel;
Reel control means (65) for driving the motor to stop the rotation of the reel based on detection of an operation of a stop button (stop button 42a);
Internal lottery means (role lottery means 61),
A sensor (detection sensor 42e) that detects the operation of the stop button is turned on until the stop button is pushed down to the deepest part (position shown in FIG. 12C), and when the push of the stop button is released, the stop The button is configured to be movable to an initial position (position shown in FIG. 12A) by an urging force, and the sensor is turned off until the stop button moves to the initial position.
In the game in which the internal lottery means has determined a predetermined result, the stop button for the predetermined reel is operated at a predetermined timing under the situation where all the reels are rotated by the reel control means, After detecting that the sensor of the stop button with respect to the reel is turned on, an excitation state (four-phase excitation state) for stopping the predetermined reel is set, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) has elapsed since the excitation state. Is configured to end the excitation state,
When the time until the sensor is turned off from the moment when the stop button pushed down to the deepest part is released is T1 (T11 in FIG. 13), and the predetermined time is T2.
T1 <T2
It is characterized by becoming.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is assumed that the start of the excitation state of the motor when the reel is stopped and the moment when the push of the stop button pushed to the deepest part is released are simultaneous. Sometimes the excitation state ends after the sensor is turned off. Therefore, the next stop button operation can be received at the timing when the excitation state of the motor is completed.

5). Initial invention 5
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 5 The initial invention relates to the control of the medal payout device.
In a conventional gaming machine, it is known that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal (for example, JP-A-2006-214434).
Here, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as a hopper motor for rotating the hopper disk. When a constant current flows, the DC motor gradually accelerates from a state where the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped. Then, reach a constant speed (constant speed).
For this reason, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor gradually accelerates from the start of driving the hopper motor until the first medal is ejected. The time required is longer than the medal discharge interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor is rotating at a constant speed, which may give the player a feeling that the discharge of the first medal is delayed.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the player from feeling that the first medal has been delayed.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 5 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (sixth embodiment)
A hopper (35) for storing medals;
A hopper disc (101) provided in the hopper;
A hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disc;
Control means (main control board 50) for controlling the driving of the hopper motor,
The hopper disc is provided with a plurality (eight) of holding portions (102) capable of holding medals stored in the hopper along the outer periphery of the hopper disc,
When the hopper motor is driven and the hopper disk rotates, medals held in the holding part are sequentially discharged from the discharging part (103),
The position of the holding portion where the last discharged medal is held at the moment when the last discharged medal in one payout process is discharged from the discharge portion is defined as a first position,
The position of the holding unit that holds the first discharged medal in the next payout process at the moment when the last discharged medal in the one payout process is discharged from the discharge unit is a second position,
When the control means finishes the one payout process, the holding unit holding the first discharged medal in the next payout process is positioned between the first position and the second position. Then, the drive of the hopper motor is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk is stopped.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, when the holding unit that holds the first discharge medal stops between the first position and the second position, the first position until the first position is reached. The distance is shorter than when stopped at the second position. As a result, the time to reach the first position is also shorter than when it stops at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor is gradually accelerated, the first medal discharge is delayed. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense.

6). Initial invention 6
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to an arrangement of a main control board attached to the inside of a cabinet and a sub control board attached to the back surface of the front door.
2. Description of the Related Art A conventional gaming machine is known that includes a storage electrolytic capacitor on a sub-control board for controlling effects (for example, JP-A-2014-131656).
Here, the electrolytic capacitor for power storage is filled with an electrolytic solution, but when the electrolytic capacitor is ruptured due to a malfunction and the filled electrolytic solution scatters and adheres to the main CPU on the main control board, There is a possibility that the main CPU will malfunction. Further, there is a possibility that the main CPU is damaged due to an impact when the electrolytic capacitor is ruptured.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution is scattered. Also, even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction, the main CPU is not damaged by the impact at that time.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (seventh embodiment)
A cabinet (13);
A front door (12) attached to the cabinet so as to be opened and closed;
A main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control board (80) for controlling the production,
The main control board is attached inside the cabinet,
The sub control board is attached to the back surface of the front door,
The main control board and the sub control board are arranged to face each other when the front door is closed,
A main CPU (55) is disposed on the main control board,
An electrolytic capacitor (86) is disposed at a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub control board.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, since the electrolytic capacitor is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU in the sub-control board, the electrolytic capacitor bursts due to a malfunction, and the electrolytic solution Even if splashes, the scattered electrolyte can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU, thereby preventing the main CPU from malfunctioning.
In addition, even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures, the main CPU can be prevented from receiving the impact directly, thereby preventing the main CPU from being damaged.

7). Initial invention 7
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 7 The initial invention relates to a reel stop control on the main control board side and a production output control on the sub control board side.
In a conventional gaming machine, multiple types of performance contents can be executed, and each performance content when a special role is won (inside) and when a special role is not won (not inside) Are known that have different selection probabilities (for example, JP 2013-146608 A).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the contents of the effect are selected regardless of the lottery result of the internal lottery, both inside and not inside.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately determine the output to be output according to the lottery result of the internal lottery.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (9th embodiment)
A plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols;
A plurality of stop switches (42) operated by the player when stopping each of the reels;
Main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub-control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the production,
The main control means includes
An internal lottery that draws to have a first lottery result (for example, “BB” alone won during non-inside) or a second lottery result (eg, “non-winning” inside BB) Means (role lottery means 61);
A plurality of stop position determination tables defining stop positions of the reels corresponding to the positions of the reels at the moment when the stop switch is operated;
Reel control means (65) for determining a stop position of the reel using any one of the stop position determination tables, and stopping the reel at the determined stop position;
The reel control means determines the stop position of the reel using the same stop position determination table in the game that is the first lottery result and the game that is the second lottery result,
The sub-control means includes
A plurality of production determination tables that define productions to be output;
An effect output control means (91) for determining an effect to be output using any of the effect determination tables, and outputting the determined effect,
The production output control means determines the production to be output by using the production determination table different for the game having the first lottery result and the game having the second lottery result.

(C) Effect of the original invention 7 According to the original invention, the reel control means is the same stop on the main control means side in the game that is the first lottery result by the internal lottery means and the game that is the second lottery result. Although the reel stop position is determined using the position determination table, the effect output control means determines the effect to be output using a different effect determination table on the sub-control means side.
Thereby, even if the reel stop control on the main control means side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub-control means side, and the effects can be diversified.

8). Initial invention 8
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 8 The initial invention relates to a gap between a cabinet and a front door.
In a conventional gaming machine, a protruding side protruding outward is provided at the edge of the opening on the front side of the cabinet, and the protruding side is accommodated inside the front door when the front door is closed. As a result, it is known that the gap between the cabinet and the front door is bent to make it difficult for foreign matter to enter (for example, JP-A-2005-198949).
However, it is conceivable to allow foreign matter to enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door by opening the front door slightly so that the protruding side is detached from the front door.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent a fraudulent act (got act) that opens the front door a little and causes foreign matter to enter from the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (eighth embodiment)
A cabinet (13);
A front door (12) attached to the cabinet so as to be opened and closed;
A door sensor for detecting the opening of the front door,
The lower part of the cabinet is provided with a first closing part (13c) protruding toward the front door when the front door is closed,
In the lower part of the front door, a position below the first closing part is provided with a second closing part (12a) protruding toward the cabinet when the front door is closed,
In the lower part of the front door, a position above the first closing part is provided with a third closing part (12b) that protrudes toward the cabinet when the front door is closed,
In the state where the front door is closed, the first closing part is formed between the second closing part and the third closing part,
The position of the front door when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door is a detection start position,
Even when the front door is in the detection start position, the first closing portion is formed between the second closing portion and the third closing portion.

(C) Effect of the Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, when the front door is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door, and then the second closed part and the third closed part are detected. A 1st obstruction | occlusion part will fall out from between. Further, when the door sensor detects the opening of the front door, it can be notified that the front door is open.
For this reason, before it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open, the first closed portion does not come out between the second closed portion and the third closed portion, and it is notified that the front door is open. Even in a possible position, since the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a bent shape, it is possible to prevent an illegal act (gotten action) that causes foreign matter to enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problem to be Solved by the Initial Invention 9 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine including an advantageous section indicator.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine including an advantageous section indicator has been known (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
However, in a gaming machine equipped with a conventional advantageous section indicator, lighting control of the advantageous section indicator at the time of recovery from power failure has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator when returning from a power failure.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 9 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (11th embodiment)
A notification gaming state (AT) that can notify the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section capable of executing the notification gaming state;
An advantageous section indicator (favorable section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section,
After the power supply is cut off under the condition that the advantageous section indicator is lit, when the power supply resumes with the setting change switch turned off, the advantageous section indicator is displayed after the interruption process is started. The process to turn on can be executed,
After the supply of power is interrupted in the situation where the advantageous section indicator is lit, when the power supply resumes with the setting change switch turned on, the process for turning off the advantageous section indicator After executing this, it is possible to shift to setting change processing.

(C) Effect of the Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section indicator can be appropriately controlled according to the situation at the time of recovery from power failure.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 10 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine including four reels and a stop button.
Conventional gaming machines generally have three reels and three stop buttons (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
In a conventional gaming machine, it has been proposed that the number of reels and stop buttons be four. However, when the number of stop buttons is four, there is a problem that an operation error of the stop button is likely to occur during AT.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it difficult for mistakes in operating the stop button to occur when the number of stop buttons is four.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (13th embodiment)
Four reels (31A-31D),
Four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to the four reels,
A predetermined operation button (24) is arranged above the four stop buttons,
At least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is positioned vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button,
At least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is positioned vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, even when the number of stop buttons is four, the stop buttons at both the left and right ends can be operated using the left and right ends of the operation button as marks. , Stop button operation mistakes can be made difficult to occur.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 11 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of indicating a specified number.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that allows a game to be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
However, in a conventional gaming machine, there are cases where an appropriate specified number and an inappropriate specified number are generated even if a game can be played with any one of a plurality of types of specified numbers.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to make it possible to play a game with an appropriate prescribed number.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (the twelfth embodiment)
Provided with a notification gaming state (AT) that can notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42),
When notifying the operation mode in the notification game state, information corresponding to the operation mode (push order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display unit (acquired number display LED 78).
In the notification game state, a game can be started when any specified number of game values of at least a plurality of specified numbers (“2” or “3”) are input,
In the notification game state, information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed on the predetermined display unit,
In the notification game state, when information corresponding to a specified number is displayed on the predetermined display unit, a predetermined timing (from FIG. 42) until the start switch is detected after all reels stop. , Displayed in step S322),
When displaying the information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display unit, the information corresponding to the operation mode is displayed in a display mode that can be identified (when the specified number is “2”, “0A” is displayed). Features.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, information corresponding to the specified number can be displayed at a predetermined timing until the start switch is detected, so that an appropriate timing can be given to the player. Thus, an appropriate specified number in the game can be notified.
Further, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the information corresponding to the operation mode and the information corresponding to the specified number.

12 Initial invention 12
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 12 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter that counts the number of differences in a notification gaming state.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine including a counter that counts the number of difference sheets during an AT is known (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
In conventional gaming machines, it is required to initialize information relating to an advantageous section when the advantageous section ends. However, there is a case where the next AT is elected early after the AT ends, and there is a case where it is desired to take over the difference number of the previous AT.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to be able to take over the difference number of the previous notification gaming state (AT) while initializing information on the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 12 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (11th embodiment)
A notification gaming state (AT) that can notify the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section capable of executing the notification gaming state;
In the first control means (main control board 50), the accumulated value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets of game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credit; the same applies hereinafter), and the minimum value is set to “0”. A first difference counter (difference counter) that stores the value
The second control means (sub control board 80) includes a second difference counter (sub difference counter) that stores a cumulative value of the difference indicating the difference between the bet number and the payout number of the game value,
At the end of the advantageous interval, the first difference counter is cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the second difference counter is not cleared.

(C) Effect of the Initial Invention 12 According to the initial invention, the first difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section, so that it is possible to comply with the rule of initializing information relating to the advantageous section. In some cases, the second difference counter is not cleared. In this case, the difference number of the previous notification game state can be taken over at the start of the next notification game state.

13. Initial invention 13
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 13 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter that counts the number of differences in a notification gaming state.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine including a counter that counts the number of difference sheets during an AT is known (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
However, in the conventional gaming machine, how to count (update) the difference number at the time of replay winning has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately execute the difference number update process at the time of replay winning.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (11th embodiment)
A notification gaming state (AT) that can notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section capable of executing the notification gaming state;
A difference number counter for storing a cumulative value of a difference indicating a difference between the number of bets of the game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credit; the same shall apply hereinafter) and a minimum value of “0”;
With an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) that counts the number of games in the advantageous section,
1. At least in the game won for a small role, after all reels stop (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section ( 51 or 52, step S424).
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval counter satisfies the advantageous condition end condition, the advantageous interval is determined without determining the value of the difference counter (without executing the process of step S434). The process for finishing (step S435) can be executed,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval counter is not a value that satisfies the advantageous condition termination condition (“No” in step S424), the difference counter updating process (steps S428 and W429) is executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference counter is a value satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section (step S434), and when it is determined that the value satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (“Yes” in step S434) ”), The process for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed,
2. In the game won for replay, after all reels are stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the advantageous section termination condition (FIG. 51). Or, in FIG. 52, step S424),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval counter is a value that satisfies the advantageous condition end condition (“Yes” in step S424), the value of the difference counter is not determined (in step S434). The process for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed (without executing the process)
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is not a value that satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section (“No” in step S424), the difference counter is not executed without executing the update process of the difference counter. Is determined to be a value that satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section (in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, if “Yes” in step S426, the process proceeds to step S434), and the value that satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section (Yes in step S434), the process for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 13 According to the original invention, in the game won for replay, regardless of whether or not the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the condition for satisfying the advantageous section, the difference counter updating process is performed. Therefore, the update process of the difference number in the game won for the replay can be appropriately executed. Furthermore, it is possible to speed up the program processing.

14 Initial invention 14
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 14 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that can execute processing related to an instruction function in a predetermined prescribed number.
Conventionally, a gaming machine having an instruction function is known (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
However, in the conventional gaming machine, the relationship between the specified number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to appropriately execute the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section according to the specified number.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 14 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The initial invention (11th embodiment)
A notification gaming state (AT) capable of executing an instruction function for notifying an operation mode of a stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed,
An advantageous interval counter (advantageous interval clear counter) for counting predetermined variables related to the advantageous interval;
A notification game counter (AT game number counter or AT difference number counter) for counting a specific variable (for example, the number of games and the number of differences) relating to the notification game state,
Having a game that allows at least the first specified number (specified number “3”) or the second specified number (specified number “2”) to be entered;
In a game (AT) in an advantageous section, in a game started based on the first prescribed number being inserted, processing related to the instruction function (for example, notification of correct push order) can be executed (in FIG. 48) In step S382, "Yes"), and the game started based on the input of the second specified number cannot execute the process related to the instruction function ("No" in step S382 in FIG. 48). ,
In the notification game state, in the game started based on the first prescribed number being inserted, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the notification game The counter can be updated (step S333 in FIG. 43),
In the notification game state, in the game started based on the second prescribed number being inserted, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the notification game counter Update is impossible ("No" in step S332 in FIG. 43)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Advantages of the Initial Invention 14 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section counter can be updated with either the first prescribed number or the second prescribed number of games, so that the advantageous section can be optimized. .
In addition, by not updating the notification game counter in the second specified number of games in which the processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed, it is possible to maintain consistency between the execution of the processing related to the instruction function and the update of the notification game counter. it can.

10 Slot machines (gaming machines)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 11 Power switch 12 Front door 12a 2nd obstruction | occlusion part 12b 3rd obstruction | occlusion part 12c Control panel 12d Index 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back board 13c 1st obstruction | occlusion part 14 Symbol display apparatus 14a Reel frame 15 Medal payout apparatus 21 Effect lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Operation button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Discharge sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 42a Stop Button 42b Stopper 42c Coil spring 42d Moving piece 42e Detection sensor 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Input sensor 45 Bro Ca 46 passage sensor 47 medal slot 47a medal guard portion 47b medal placing unit 50 main control board (main control means)
50a Screw hole 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
56 Board Case (Main Board Case)
57 upper cover 57a caulking portion 57b gate mark 57c indented portion 57d protrusion 57e protrusion 58 lower cover 58a caulking portion 58b gate mark 58c boss 61 role lottery means 62 winning flag control means 63 push order instruction number selection means 64 effect group number selection means 65 reel control means 66 winning determination means 67 payout means 71 control command transmission means 73 set value display LED
74 Management information display LED
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1-bet indicator LED
79b 2-bet indicator LED
79c 3-bet indicator LED
79d Game start indicator LED
79e Input indicator LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
86 Electrolytic Capacitor 87 Sub Board Case 91 Production Output Control Means 101 Hopper Disc 102 Holding Part 103 Ejecting Part 110 Reel Base 120 Reel Control Board 121 Reel Board Case

Claims (1)

A hopper for storing medals,
A hopper disc provided in the hopper;
A hopper motor for rotating the hopper disc;
Drive control means for controlling the drive of the hopper motor,
In a game where the credit has reached the upper limit value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the drive control means drives the hopper motor to execute a payout process capable of paying out medals,
The hopper disc is provided with a plurality of holding portions capable of holding medals stored in the hopper,
At certain situations, when the hopper disc the hopper motor is driven to rotate, the medals held in the holding portion is formed so as to be sequentially discharged from the discharge portion through the discharge path,
The position of the holding portion where the last discharged medal at the moment when the last discharged medal of the current game is discharged from the discharging portion by the payout process executed in the predetermined situation is set as the first position,
The position of the holding unit holding the first discharge medal that can be discharged in the next payout process at the moment when the last discharge medal of the current game is discharged from the discharge unit by the payout process executed in the predetermined situation Is the second position,
When the payout process executed in the predetermined situation is finished and the rotation of the hopper disk is stopped, the holding unit that holds the first discharged medal in the next payout process has the first position and the second position. And a predetermined part of the hopper disk is configured to block at least a part of the discharge path .